WO2024046419A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024046419A1
WO2024046419A1 PCT/CN2023/116088 CN2023116088W WO2024046419A1 WO 2024046419 A1 WO2024046419 A1 WO 2024046419A1 CN 2023116088 W CN2023116088 W CN 2023116088W WO 2024046419 A1 WO2024046419 A1 WO 2024046419A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
pieces
difference
original
encoder
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/116088
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
柴晓萌
孙琰
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024046419A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024046419A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02—Arrangements for optimising operational condition

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
  • wireless communication networks such as mobile communication networks
  • the services supported by the network are becoming more and more diverse, and therefore the requirements that need to be met are becoming more and more diverse.
  • the network needs to be able to support ultra-high speeds, ultra-low latency, and/or ultra-large connections.
  • This feature makes network planning, network configuration, and/or resource scheduling increasingly complex.
  • the functions of the network become more and more powerful, such as supporting higher and higher spectrum, supporting high-order multiple input multiple output (MIMO) technology, supporting beam forming, and/or supporting beam management and other new Technology has made network energy conservation a hot research topic.
  • MIMO multiple input multiple output
  • These new requirements, new scenarios, and new features have brought unprecedented challenges to network planning, O&M, and efficient operations.
  • artificial intelligence technology can be introduced into wireless communication networks to achieve network intelligence. Based on this, how to effectively implement artificial intelligence in the network, for example, how to monitor the performance of artificial intelligence, is a question worth studying.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication method and device, in order to improve the accuracy of autoencoder performance monitoring while reducing transmission overhead.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication method, which is applied to a first device and includes: receiving M pieces of first encoded information from a second device, where M is a positive integer; using a first decoder and inputting the The M first encoded information of the first decoder determines the M first decoded information; wherein the first decoder and the first encoder belong to the first autoencoder, and the first encoder is used to Process the input M first original information to determine the M first encoded information; use the second encoder and the M first decoded information input to the second encoder to determine M first re-encodings Information, the M first re-encoding information corresponds to the M first encoding information one-to-one; according to each first encoding information in the M first encoding information and each first encoding information The difference between the corresponding first re-encoded information determines the performance of the first autoencoder.
  • an encoder is introduced at one end of the decoder in the autoencoder, and the difference between the encoding information output by the encoder included in the autoencoder and the re-encoding information output by the encoder introduced by the decoder is compared. , indirectly judging the performance of the autoencoder. It can safely and effectively monitor the performance of the autoencoder while ensuring reduced information transmission overhead.
  • the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, or the functions of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same.
  • the functions of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, including at least one of the following: when the first encoder and the second encoder input the same data, the first encoder and the second encoder The output of the second encoder is the same; when the input data of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, the output difference of the first encoder and the second encoder is less than the preset threshold; the first encoder has compression and quantization functions , the second encoder has compression and quantization functions.
  • the first device may determine The performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to a first value, or if the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is less than or equal to a second threshold, the first device It may be determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value.
  • the first device calculates the difference between each of the M first encoded information and the first re-encoded information corresponding to each of the first encoded information. difference parameters to obtain M difference parameters; if the average of the M difference parameters is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first device can determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, or if the M differences If the average value of the parameters is less than or equal to the second threshold, the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value.
  • the first threshold and the second threshold in the above design may be equal or unequal. Using thresholds to divide the performance levels of autoencoders facilitates subsequent personalized processing of autoencoders with different performance levels, which is more flexible.
  • the first threshold and the second threshold may be pre-configured.
  • the second device indicates the first threshold and/or the second threshold to the first device. For example, when the second device indicates the first threshold or the second threshold to the first device, the first device may determine that the first threshold and the second threshold are equal. For another example, when the second device indicates the first threshold and the second threshold to the first device, the first device may determine whether the first threshold and the second threshold are equal according to the instruction of the second device.
  • the difference parameter corresponding to the i-th first coded information among the M first coded information includes the i-th first coded information and the i-th first coded information among the M first re-coded information.
  • the first threshold, the second threshold, and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information belong to the same magnitude of information, and information of the same magnitude can be compared.
  • Such a design uses thresholds to measure the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information to infer the difference between the original information and the decoded information, assists in determining the performance of the autoencoder, and can improve the accuracy of monitoring the performance of the autoencoder. sex.
  • the difference parameter corresponding to the i-th first coded information among the M first coded information is determined by a scaling factor and the difference between the i-th first coded information and the M first coded information.
  • the difference between the i-th first re-encoded information in the re-encoded information is determined; where i is any positive integer from 1 to M.
  • the difference parameter, the first threshold, and the second threshold determined by the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information and the scaling factor belong to information of the same magnitude, and information of the same magnitude can be compared.
  • the first threshold, the second threshold, and the difference between the original information and the decoded information belong to the information of the first magnitude, and the scaling factor is used to scale the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information to the first magnitude of information.
  • Such a design uses the scale factor and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information to simulate the difference between the original information and the decoded information, and uses the threshold to measure the difference between the original information and the decoded information to assist the performance of the autoencoder
  • the determination can improve the accuracy of autoencoder performance monitoring.
  • the scale factor is preconfigured; or, the scale factor is determined by the second device, and the first device can obtain the scale factor from the second device.
  • the first device can determine the scaling factor by itself.
  • the first device may receive N pieces of second original information from the second device, where N is an integer greater than 1; furthermore, the first device may receive two second pieces of original information from the N pieces of second original information.
  • the scaling factor is determined by the ratio of the difference between the information and the difference between the pair of second encoded information corresponding to the pair of second original information. Wherein, all or part of the N pieces of second original information belong to the M pieces of first original information, or the N pieces of second original information do not include any of the M pieces of first original information.
  • the first device receives N pieces of second original information from the second device, where N is a positive integer; furthermore, the first device compares the data with the reference according to each of the N pieces of second original information.
  • the scaling factor is determined by the ratio of the difference between the original information and the difference between the second encoded information corresponding to each original information and the reference encoded information corresponding to the reference original information.
  • the first device receives N pieces of second original information from the second device, where N is a positive integer; furthermore, the first device compares N pieces of second original information with each other according to each of the N pieces of second original information.
  • the difference between each of the second decoded information and the second encoded information corresponding to each second original information and the second re-encoded information corresponding to each second encoded information The proportion of the difference determines the scaling factor; wherein the N pieces of second decoded information correspond to the N pieces of second original information one-to-one.
  • the second device may trigger the first device to determine the performance of the first autoencoder. For example, before determining the M first re-encoding information, the first device receives fourth information from the second device, and the fourth information is used to trigger performance determination of the first autoencoder.
  • the first device first determines that the performance determination method of the first autoencoder in the above design is feasible and effective, Or it can be described as: in the current scenario, the performance determination method of the first autoencoder in the above design can be used; further, the first device starts the performance determination of the first autoencoder.
  • the first device obtains P pieces of third encoded information from the second device; wherein, the difference between the P pieces of third original information used to generate the P pieces of third encoded information Satisfying the first preset relationship, P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3; all or part of the P third original information belongs to the M first original information, or the P third original information Any one of the M pieces of first original information is not included.
  • the first device determines that the difference between the P pieces of third encoded information satisfies the first preset relationship, the first device can determine the performance of the first autoencoder through the above design.
  • the first device may send first information to the second device, where the first information is used to request the P pieces of third coded information.
  • the second device sends P pieces of third encoded information to the first device.
  • the first device obtains P pieces of third coded information from the second device; wherein the P pieces of third original information used to generate the P pieces of third coded information are the same as the reference original information.
  • the difference between the information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2; all or part of the P third original information belongs to the M first original information, or the P The third original information does not include any of the M first original information.
  • the first device may determine the first self-coding information through the above design. Encoder performance.
  • the first device may send second information to the second device, where the second information is used to request the P pieces of third coded information.
  • the second device sends P pieces of third encoded information to the first device.
  • the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information is used to determine the performance of the autoencoder, which can ensure Accuracy of autoencoder performance monitoring.
  • the first device may also receive third information from the second device, where the third information indicates the difference between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information. corresponding relationship.
  • the third information indicates the difference between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information. corresponding relationship.
  • the above-mentioned first coded information is quantized information, or the first device receives M pieces of first coded information from the second device, which are M pieces of first coded information corresponding to the M pieces of first coded information. Quantitative information. The first device may dequantize the received M pieces of first quantized information to obtain the M pieces of first coded information.
  • the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to a first value or a second value
  • the first value is used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the first requirement
  • the second value is used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the first requirement.
  • the first autoencoder is applied to the CSI feedback scenario.
  • the first coding information includes first channel status indication information, such as quantized CSI based on original CSI;
  • the first decoding information includes first restored channel information, such as restored CSI;
  • the first original information includes first original Channel information, such as original CSI;
  • the first re-encoding information includes second channel status indication information corresponding to the first restored channel information, such as quantized CSI based on the restored CSI.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication method, which is applied to a second device and includes: using a first encoder to process M pieces of input first original information and determine the M pieces of first encoded information, M is a positive integer; send the M first encoding information to the first device, the M first encoding information is used for performance determination of the first autoencoder, the first autoencoder includes the first Encoder.
  • the second device may send fourth information to the first device, where the fourth information is used to trigger performance determination of the first autoencoder.
  • the second device may send first parameter information to the first device, where the first parameter information is used for self-encoding performance determination; wherein the first parameter information includes one or more of the following: Item: one or more reference thresholds used to measure the difference between encoded information and re-encoded information; used to characterize the difference between at least two original information and the difference between the encoded information corresponding to the at least two original information.
  • the re-encoding information is obtained by the first device inputting the encoding information into the decoder and then inputting the output into the encoder for re-encoding.
  • the second device may send P third encoding information to the first device.
  • the P third encoding information is used to determine the effectiveness of the performance of the first autoencoder. Determine; wherein the difference between the P third original information used to generate the P third encoded information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3; or, used to generate the The difference between the P third original information of the P third encoded information and the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the second device may also send third information to the first device, where the third information indicates the correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information. .
  • the present disclosure provides a communication method, applied to a first device, including: receiving P pieces of third coded information from a second device, where the P pieces of third coded information correspond to P pieces of third original information; Wherein, the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2; it is determined that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship. Assume a relationship, or the difference between the P pieces of third coded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship.
  • the first device when the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship, the first device sends sixth information to the second device, and the sixth information for triggering the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or, when the first result indicates that the difference between the P third encoded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, the first device reports to the The second device sends seventh information, the seventh information being used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
  • the performance of the autoencoder is indirectly judged, and then it can be determined whether to further determine the performance of the autoencoder, or to use the current autoencoder.
  • the P third encoded information is the output of the first encoder of the second device for the P third original information input to the first encoder, and the first device A first decoder corresponding to the first encoder is included.
  • a first autoencoder includes the first encoder and the first decoder.
  • the first device sends second information to the second device, where the second information is used to request the P third encoded information.
  • the first device receives third information from the second device, the third information indicating the correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information.
  • the third information may be the index of the third original information corresponding to the third encoded information carried in the third encoded information, or may be transmitted outside the third encoded information but through a preset transmission method.
  • the index of the third original information corresponding to the third encoded information For example, 1 index of the third original information + 1 method of the third encoding information. It can be understood that, in a possible manner, the correspondence between the P pieces of third coded information and the P pieces of third original information can also be determined in a time division manner. In this case, the third information is then No instructions are required to the first device.
  • all or part of the P third original information belongs to the M first original information described in the first aspect, or the P third original information does not include all Any one of the M first original information.
  • the first device determines the first self-determination according to the first aspect and the possible design of the first aspect. Encoder performance.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication method, applied to a second device, including: determining P pieces of third original information, the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies a first preset relationship, and P is greater than Or a positive integer equal to 2; and, sending P third coded information to the first device, the P third coded information corresponding to P third original information, the P third coded information being used for self-encoding Determination of device performance.
  • the second device receives sixth information from the first device, and the sixth information is used to indicate that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies a first preset relationship, The sixth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or the second device receives seventh information from the first device, the seventh information is used to indicate the P third encoding information The difference does not satisfy the first preset relationship, and the seventh information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication method, applied to a first device, including: receiving P pieces of third coded information from a second device, where the P pieces of third coded information correspond to P pieces of third original information, Wherein, the difference between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer; the first device determines the reference codes corresponding to the P pieces of third coded information and the reference original information. The difference between the information satisfies the second preset relationship, or the difference between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship.
  • the first device when the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, the first device sends the eighth device to the second device.
  • Information, the eighth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or, when the difference between the P third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship,
  • the first device sends ninth information to the second device, the ninth information being used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder;
  • the performance of the autoencoder is indirectly judged, and then it can be determined whether to further determine the performance of the autoencoder, or to use the current autoencoder.
  • the first device when the difference between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, the first device may be configured according to the first aspect and the first aspect. The design determines the performance of the first autoencoder.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication method, applied to a second device, including: determining that the difference between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer; and , sending P pieces of third encoding information to the first device, where the P pieces of third encoding information correspond to P pieces of third original information, and the P pieces of third encoding information are used to determine the performance of the autoencoder.
  • the second device receives eighth information from the first device, the eighth information is used to indicate the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information.
  • the second preset relationship is satisfied, the eighth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or the second device receives the ninth information from the first device, the ninth information is used to indicate P
  • the difference between the third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship, and the ninth information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or stop encoding.
  • the performance of the first autoencoder is determined.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication method, applied to a first device, including: receiving first parameter information from a second device, the first parameter information being used to determine the performance of an autoencoder; the first device according to The first parameter information determines the performance of the autoencoder.
  • the first parameter information includes one or more of the following: one or more reference thresholds used to measure the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information; used to characterize at least two original information a proportional factor between the difference and the difference between the encoded information respectively corresponding to the at least two original information; a proportion used to characterize the proportion between the difference between the original information and the decoded information and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information Factor, the number of the encoding information or the re-encoding information; the value range corresponding to the performance of the auto-encoder, the re-encoding information is the output obtained by the first device inputting the encoding information into the decoder and then input into the encoder Obtained by recoding.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication method, applied to a second device, including: determining first parameter information; and sending the first parameter information to the first device, where the first parameter information is used for an autoencoder The performance is determined.
  • the first parameter information includes one or more of the following: one or more reference thresholds used to measure the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information; used to characterize at least two original information a proportional factor between the difference and the difference between the encoded information respectively corresponding to the at least two original information; a proportion used to characterize the proportion between the difference between the original information and the decoded information and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information Factor, the number of the encoding information or the re-encoding information; the value range corresponding to the performance of the auto-encoder, the re-encoding information is the output obtained by the first device inputting the encoding information into the decoder and then input into the encoder Obtained by recoding.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be a first device, a device, a module or a chip in the first device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with the first device.
  • the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the first aspect.
  • the module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
  • a communication module used to receive M pieces of first coded information from the second device, where M is a positive integer
  • Processing module for:
  • M pieces of first decoding information are determined; wherein the first decoder and the first encoder belong to the first autoencoder , the first encoder is used to process the input M pieces of first original information and determine the M pieces of first coded information;
  • the performance of the first autoencoder is determined according to the difference between each first encoding information in the M first encoding information and the first re-encoding information corresponding to each first encoding information.
  • first encoder and the second encoder are the same, or the functions of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same.
  • the specific introduction can be understood with reference to the description in the first aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure.
  • the processing module is specifically configured to: if the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is greater than or equal to the first threshold , then it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value; or if the difference parameter between the one first encoding information and the one first re-encoding information is less than or equal to the second threshold, then It is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to a second value.
  • the processing module is specifically configured to: if each first coding information among the K first coding information corresponds to the first recoding corresponding to each first coding information, If the difference parameter between the information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the proportion of the K first encoded information to the M first encoded information is greater than or equal to the first proportion threshold, then the first autoencoder is determined.
  • the performance corresponds to the first value; or if the difference parameter between each first coding information in the K first coding information and the first re-coding information corresponding to each first coding information is less than or equal to the second threshold, If the proportion of the K pieces of first coded information to the M pieces of first coded information is greater than or equal to the first proportion threshold, then it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value; wherein, the Kth A coded information is included in the M pieces of first coded information, and K is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the processing module is specifically configured to: calculate each first coded information in the M first coded information and the first weight corresponding to each first coded information.
  • the difference parameters between the encoding information are obtained to obtain M difference parameters; if the average of the M difference parameters is greater than or equal to the first threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, or if the M differences If the average value of the parameters is less than or equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value.
  • first threshold and the second threshold can be understood with reference to the description in the first aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure.
  • the involved sending and receiving operations can be performed by the communication module, and the remaining operations are performed by the processing module.
  • the situation in which the processing module starts the performance determination of the first autoencoder can be understood with reference to the description in the first aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure.
  • the sending and receiving operations involved can be performed by the communication module, and the remaining operations are performed by the processing module.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be a second device, a device, a module or a chip in the second device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with the second device.
  • the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the second aspect.
  • the module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
  • a processing module configured to use the first encoder to process the input M pieces of first original information and determine the M pieces of first encoded information, where M is a positive integer;
  • a communication module configured to send the M first encoding information to the first device, the M first encoding information being used for performance determination of a first autoencoder, the first autoencoder including the first Encoder.
  • the communication module is also configured to send fourth information to the first device, where the fourth information is used to trigger performance determination of the first autoencoder.
  • the communication module is also configured to send first parameter information to the first device, where the first parameter information is used to determine the performance of the self-encoding; wherein the definition of the first parameter information may refer to the second It is understood that this aspect will not be described again in this disclosure.
  • the communication module is also configured to send P third encoding information to the first device and the second device to send P third encoding information, and the P third encoding information is used for the performance determination method of the first autoencoder.
  • Validity determination wherein, used to generate the P third codes
  • the difference between the P third original information of the information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3; or, the P third original information used to generate the P third encoded information and The difference between the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the communication module is also configured to send third information to the first device, where the third information indicates the correspondence between the P third original information and the P third encoded information. relation.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be a first device, a device, a module or a chip in the first device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with the first device.
  • the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the third aspect.
  • the module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
  • a communication module configured to receive P pieces of third encoded information from the second device, the P pieces of third encoded information corresponding to P pieces of third original information; wherein the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies The first preset relationship, P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2;
  • a processing module configured to determine that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship, or that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship.
  • the communication module when the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship, the communication module is also used to send sixth information to the second device, and the sixth information is used to trigger the first Determine the performance of the self-encoder; or, when the first result indicates that the difference between the P third encoding information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, the communication module is also configured to send a message to the second device. Seventh information, the seventh information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
  • the P third encoded information is the output of the first encoder of the second device for the P third original information input to the first encoder, and the first device A first decoder corresponding to the first encoder is included.
  • a first autoencoder includes the first encoder and the first decoder.
  • the communication module is also configured to send second information to the second device, where the second information is used to request the P third encoded information.
  • the communication module is also configured to receive third information from the second device, where the third information indicates the difference between the P third original information and the P third encoded information. correspondence between.
  • all or part of the P third original information belongs to the M first original information described in the first aspect, or the P third original information does not include all Any one of the M first original information.
  • the first device determines the first self-determination according to the first aspect and the possible design of the first aspect. Encoder performance.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be a second device, a device, a module or a chip in the second device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with the second device.
  • the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the fourth aspect.
  • the module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
  • a processing module configured to determine P third pieces of original information, the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2;
  • a communication module configured to send P third coded information to the first device, the P third coded information corresponding to P third original information, and the P third coded information used to determine the performance of the autoencoder .
  • the communication module is also configured to receive sixth information from the first device, where the sixth information is used to indicate that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship. , the sixth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or, the communication module is also used to receive the seventh information from the first device, the seventh information is used to indicate the P third The difference between the encoding information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, and the seventh information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication device applied to a first device.
  • the communication device may be the first device, or may be a device, module or chip in the first device, or may be capable of communicating with the first device. Match the device used.
  • the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the fifth aspect.
  • the module may be a hardware circuit, or However, software can also be implemented by hardware circuits combined with software.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
  • a communication module configured to receive P pieces of third encoded information from the second device, the P pieces of third encoded information corresponding to P pieces of third original information, wherein the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information The difference between satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer;
  • a processing module configured to determine that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, or that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship. The difference between does not satisfy the second preset relationship.
  • the communication module when the difference between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, the communication module is also configured to send eighth information to the second device, and the third Eight pieces of information are used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or, when the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship, the communication module also uses In sending ninth information to the second device, the ninth information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder;
  • the processing module when the difference between the P third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, the processing module performs the first aspect according to the first aspect and the possible first aspect. Design, determine the performance of the first autoencoder.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication device applied to a second device.
  • the communication device may be the second device, or may be a device, module or chip in the second device, or may be capable of communicating with the second device. Match the device used.
  • the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the sixth aspect.
  • the module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
  • a processing module configured to determine that the difference between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer
  • a communication module configured to send P third coded information to the first device, the P third coded information corresponding to P third original information, and the P third coded information used to determine the performance of the autoencoder .
  • the communication module is also configured to receive eighth information from the first device, where the eighth information is used to indicate the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information. The difference satisfies the second preset relationship, and the eighth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or, the communication module is also used to receive ninth information from the first device, the ninth information is used to Indicates that the difference between the P third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship, and the ninth information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or Stop the performance determination of the first autoencoder.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication device applied to a first device.
  • the communication device may be the first device, or may be a device, module or chip in the first device, or may be capable of communicating with the first device. Match the device used.
  • the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the seventh aspect.
  • the module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
  • a communication module configured to receive first parameter information from the second device, where the first parameter information is used to determine the performance of the autoencoder;
  • a processing module configured to determine the performance of the autoencoder according to the first parameter information.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication device applied to a second device.
  • the communication device may be the second device, or may be a device, module or chip in the second device, or may be capable of communicating with the second device. Match the device used.
  • the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the eighth aspect.
  • the module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software. accomplish.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
  • a processing module used to determine the first parameter information
  • a communication module configured to send the first parameter information to the first device, where the first parameter information is used for performance determination of the autoencoder.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication device, which includes a processor for implementing the method described in the first, third, fifth or seventh aspect.
  • the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store instructions and data.
  • the communication device may also include a memory.
  • the communication device may further include a communication interface, the communication interface The interface is used for the device to communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, a pin, or other types of communication interfaces.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication device, which includes a processor for implementing the method described in the above second, fourth, sixth or eighth aspect.
  • the processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store instructions and data.
  • the communication device may also include a memory.
  • the communication device may also include a communication interface, which is used for the device to communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, a pin, or other types of communication interfaces.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication system, including a communication device as described in any one of the ninth to sixteenth aspects, or a communication device as described in the ninth and tenth aspects, Or the communication device as described in the eleventh and twelfth aspects, or the communication device as described in the thirteenth and fourteenth aspects, or the communication device as described in the fifteenth and sixteenth aspects .
  • the present disclosure also provides a computer program, which when the computer program is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned first to eighth aspects.
  • the present disclosure also provides a computer program product, including instructions, which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned first to eighth aspects.
  • the present disclosure also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program or instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium.
  • a computer program or instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer program or instructions When the computer program or instructions are run on a computer, the computer program or instructions cause the The computer executes the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned first to eighth aspects.
  • the present disclosure also provides a chip, which is used to execute the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned first to eighth aspects.
  • the chip is used to read the computer program stored in the memory and execute the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned first to eighth aspects.
  • the present disclosure also provides a chip system.
  • the chip system includes a processor and is used to support a computer device to implement the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned first to eighth aspects.
  • the chip system further includes a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary programs and data of the computer device.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips or include chips and other discrete devices.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system
  • Figure 2A is a schematic diagram of the structure of a neuron
  • Figure 2B is a schematic diagram of the layer relationship of the neural network
  • Figure 2C is a schematic diagram of an AI application framework provided by the present disclosure.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system
  • FIGS. 4A to 4D are schematic diagrams of several network architectures
  • Figures 5A to 5B are schematic diagrams of several autoencoder-based CSI feedback frameworks provided by the present disclosure
  • Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of a spatial mapping relationship provided by the present disclosure.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the correlation relationships of several differential changes provided by the present disclosure.
  • Figure 8 is one of the flow diagrams of a communication method provided by the present disclosure.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of another spatial mapping relationship provided by the present disclosure.
  • Figure 10 is one of the flow diagrams of a communication method provided by the present disclosure.
  • Figure 11 is one of the flow diagrams of a communication method provided by the present disclosure.
  • Figure 12 is one of the structural schematic diagrams of the communication device provided by the present disclosure.
  • Figure 13 is one of the structural schematic diagrams of the communication device provided by the present disclosure.
  • the disclosure below refers to at least one (item), indicating one (item) or more (items). Multiple (items) refers to two (items) or more than two (items).
  • “And/or” describes the relationship between associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B. To express: A alone exists, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. The character “/” generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or” relationship.
  • first, second, etc. may be used to describe various objects in this disclosure, these objects should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish objects from each other.
  • the communication system can be a third generation (3G) communication system (such as a universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS)), a fourth generation (4th generation, 4G) communication system (such as long term evolution (LTE) system), fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) communication system, global interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) or wireless Local area network (wireless local area network, WLAN) system, or integration system of multiple systems, or future communication system, such as 6G communication system, etc.
  • the 5G communication system can also be called a new radio (NR) system.
  • One network element in a communication system can send signals to or receive signals from another network element.
  • the signal may include information, signaling or data, etc.
  • the network element can also be replaced by an entity, a network entity, a device, a communication device, a communication module, a node, a communication node, etc.
  • a network element is taken as an example for description.
  • the communication system may include at least one terminal device and at least one access network device.
  • the access network device can send downlink signals to the terminal device, and/or the terminal device can send uplink signals to the access network device.
  • the communication system includes multiple terminal devices, multiple terminal devices can also communicate with each other.
  • Mutual signaling means that both the signal sending network element and the signal receiving network element can be terminal devices.
  • FIG. 1 is a simplified schematic diagram of the wireless communication system provided by the present disclosure.
  • the wireless communication system includes a wireless access network 100.
  • the radio access network 100 may be a next-generation (eg, 6G or higher) radio access network, or a legacy (eg, 5G, 4G, 3G or 2G) radio access network.
  • One or more communication devices 120a-120j, collectively 120
  • the wireless communication system may also include other equipment, such as core network equipment, wireless relay equipment and/or wireless backhaul equipment, etc., which are not shown in Figure 1 .
  • the wireless communication system may include multiple network devices (also called access network devices) at the same time, or may include multiple communication devices at the same time.
  • a network device can serve one or more communication devices at the same time.
  • a communication device can also access one or more network devices at the same time. This disclosure does not limit the number of communication devices and network devices included in the wireless communication system.
  • the network device may be an entity on the network side that is used to transmit or receive signals.
  • the network device may be an access device through which the communication device wirelessly accesses the wireless communication system.
  • the network device may be a base station.
  • Base stations can broadly cover various names as follows, or be replaced with the following names, such as: Node B (NodeB), evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNB), next generation base station (next generation NodeB, gNB), open wireless Access network equipment, relay station, access point, transmission point (transmitting and receiving point, TRP), transmitting point (TP), main station MeNB, Secondary station SeNB, multi-standard wireless (MSR) node, home base station, network controller, access node, wireless node, access point (AP), transmission node, transceiver node, baseband unit (BBU), radio frequency remote unit ( RRU), active antenna unit (AAU), radio head (RRH), central unit (CU), distribution unit (DU), wireless unit (radio unit, RU), centralized unit
  • the base station may be a macro base station, a micro base station, a relay node, a donor node or the like, or a combination thereof.
  • Network equipment may also refer to communication modules, modems or chips provided in the aforementioned equipment or devices.
  • Network equipment can also be a mobile switching center and responsible for device-to-device (D2D), vehicle outreach (vehicle-to-everything, V2X), and machine-to-machine (M2M) communications.
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle outreach
  • M2M machine-to-machine
  • Network devices can support networks with the same or different access technologies. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used by the network equipment.
  • Network equipment can be fixed or mobile.
  • base stations 110a, 110b are stationary and are responsible for wireless transmission and reception in one or more cells from communication devices 120.
  • the helicopter or drone 120i shown in Figure 1 may be configured to act as a mobile base station, and one or more cells may move based on the location of the mobile base station 120i.
  • helicopters or drones (120i) may be configured to function as a communications device that communicates with base station 110b.
  • the communication device used to implement the above access network function may be an access network device, or may be a network device with partial functions of the access network, or may be a device capable of supporting the implementation of the access network function, such as Chip system, hardware circuit, software module, or hardware circuit plus software module. This device can be installed in access network equipment or used in conjunction with access network equipment.
  • the communication device used to implement the function of the access network device is an access network device as an example for description.
  • a communication device may be an entity on the user side that is used to receive or transmit signals, such as a mobile phone.
  • Communication devices can be used to connect people, things and machines.
  • the communication device may communicate with one or more core networks through network devices.
  • Communication devices include handheld devices with wireless connectivity, other processing devices connected to wireless modems, or vehicle-mounted devices.
  • the communication device may be a portable, pocket-sized, handheld, computer-built-in, or vehicle-mounted mobile device.
  • the communication device 120 can be widely used in various scenarios, such as cellular communication, device-to-device D2D, vehicle-to-everything V2X, end-to-end P2P, machine-to-machine M2M, machine type communication MTC, Internet of Things IOT, virtual reality VR, and augmented reality AR, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, drone, robot, remote sensing, passive sensing, positioning, navigation and tracking, autonomous delivery and Mobile etc.
  • cellular communication device-to-device D2D, vehicle-to-everything V2X, end-to-end P2P, machine-to-machine M2M, machine type communication MTC, Internet of Things IOT, virtual reality VR, and augmented reality AR, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, drone, robot, remote sensing, passive sensing, positioning, navigation and tracking, autonomous delivery and Mobile etc.
  • Some examples of communication devices 120 are: 3GPP standard user equipment (UE), fixed devices, mobile devices, handheld devices, wearable devices, cellular phones, smartphones, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phones, laptops, personal computers, Smart books, vehicles, satellites, global positioning system (GPS) equipment, target tracking equipment, drones, helicopters, aircraft, ships, remote control equipment, smart home equipment, industrial equipment, personal communication service (PCS) phones , wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), wireless network camera, tablet computer, handheld computer, mobile Internet device (mobile internet device, MID), wearable devices such as Smart watches, virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control (industrial control), terminals in Internet of Vehicles systems, and self-driving (self-driving) Wireless terminals, wireless terminals in smart grid, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart city (smart city) such as smart refuelers, terminal equipment on high-speed rail and smart homes (smart Wireless terminal
  • the communication device 120 may be a wireless device in the above various scenarios or a device provided in the wireless device, for example, a communication module, a modem or a chip in the above device.
  • Communication equipment can also be called terminal, terminal equipment, user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), etc.
  • the communication device may also be a communication device in a future wireless communication system.
  • Communication equipment can be used in dedicated network equipment or general equipment. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used in the communication equipment.
  • the communication device can be used to act as a base station.
  • a UE may act as a scheduling entity that provides sidelink signals between UEs in V2X, D2D or P2P, etc.
  • cell phone 120a and car 120b communicate with each other using sidelink signals.
  • Cell phone 120a and smart home device 120e communicate without relaying communication signals through base station 110b.
  • the communication device used to implement the functions of the communication device may be a terminal device, or a terminal device having part of the functions of the above communication device, or a device that can support the realization of the functions of the above communication device, such as a chip system,
  • the device can be installed in a terminal device or used in conjunction with the terminal device.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the communication device is a terminal device or a UE as an example for description.
  • a wireless communication system is usually composed of a cell.
  • a base station provides management of the cell.
  • the base station provides communication services to multiple mobile stations (MS) in the cell.
  • the base station includes a baseband unit (BBU) and a remote radio unit (RRU).
  • BBU baseband unit
  • RRU remote radio unit
  • the BBU and RRU can be placed in different places.
  • the RRU is remote and placed in a high traffic area, and the BBU is placed in the central computer room.
  • BBU and RRU can also be placed in the same computer room.
  • the BBU and RRU can also be different components under the same rack.
  • a cell may correspond to a carrier or component carrier.
  • the present disclosure can be applied between a network device and a communication device, between a network device and a network device, or between a communication device and a communication device, that is, between a primary device and a secondary device.
  • the primary device can It is a network device or a communication device.
  • the secondary device can be another network device or communication device.
  • the main device is a communication device
  • the secondary device can be another communication device.
  • the primary device as a network device, such as an access network device
  • the secondary device as a communication device, such as a terminal device, as an example.
  • the communication direction corresponding to the downlink is from the primary device to the secondary device
  • the communication direction corresponding to the uplink is from the secondary device to the primary device.
  • Protocol layer structure between access network equipment and terminal equipment
  • the protocol layer structure may include a control plane protocol layer structure and a user plane protocol layer structure.
  • the control plane protocol layer structure may include radio resource control (RRC) layer, packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, radio link control (RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer and physical layer.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • the user plane protocol layer structure may include the functions of protocol layers such as the PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer and physical layer.
  • the PDCP layer may also include service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol). protocol, SDAP) layer.
  • service data adaptation protocol service data adaptation protocol
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • the protocol layer structure between the access network device and the terminal may also include an artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI) layer for transmitting data related to the AI function.
  • AI artificial intelligence
  • the SDAP layer such as the SDAP layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, and physical layer.
  • the SDAP layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer and physical layer can also be collectively referred to as the access layer.
  • the transmission direction of data it is divided into sending or receiving, and each layer mentioned above is divided into sending part and receiving part.
  • the PDCP layer obtains data from the upper layer, it transmits the data to the RLC layer and MAC layer, and then the MAC layer generates a transmission block, and then wirelessly transmits it through the physical layer.
  • Data is encapsulated accordingly in each layer.
  • the data received by a certain layer from the upper layer of the layer is regarded as the service data unit (SDU) of the layer.
  • SDU service data unit
  • PDU protocol data unit
  • the terminal device may also have an application layer and a non-access layer.
  • the application layer can be used to provide services to applications installed in the terminal device.
  • the downlink data received by the terminal device can be sequentially transmitted from the physical layer to the application layer, and then provided to the application program by the application layer; for another example, The application layer can obtain the data generated by the application program and transmit the data to the physical layer in turn and send it to other communication devices.
  • the non-access layer can be used to forward user data, such as forwarding uplink data received from the application layer to the SDAP layer or forwarding downlink data received from the SDAP layer to the application layer.
  • Access network equipment can include centralized units (central unit, CU) and distributed units (distributed unit, DU). Multiple DUs can be centrally controlled by one CU.
  • the interface between the CU and the DU may be called the F1 interface.
  • the control panel (CP) interface can be F1-C
  • the user panel (UP) interface can be F1-U.
  • CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network: for example, the functions of the PDCP layer and above are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the PDCP layer (such as the RLC layer and MAC layer, etc.) are set in the DU; for example, PDCP
  • the functions of the protocol layers above are set in the CU, and the functions of the PDCP layer and the lower protocol layers are set in the DU.
  • CU or DU can be divided into functions with more protocol layers, and CU or DU can also be divided into partial processing functions with protocol layer.
  • part of the functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer above the RLC layer are set in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer below the RLC layer are set in the DU.
  • the functions of CU or DU can also be divided according to business types or other system requirements, for example, according to delay, and the functions whose processing time needs to meet the delay requirements are set in DU, but do not need to meet the delay.
  • the required functionality is set in CU.
  • the CU may also have one or more functions of the core network.
  • the CU can be set on the network side to facilitate centralized management.
  • the RU of the DU is set far away. Among them, RU has radio frequency function.
  • DU and RU can be divided at the physical layer (PHY).
  • PHY physical layer
  • DU can implement high-level functions in the PHY layer
  • RU can implement low-level functions in the PHY layer.
  • the functions of the PHY layer can include adding cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code, channel coding, rate matching, scrambling, modulation, layer mapping, precoding, resource mapping, physical antenna Mapping, and/or RF transmitting functions.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • the functions of the PHY layer may include CRC, channel decoding, derate matching, descrambling, demodulation, delayer mapping, channel detection, resource demapping, physical antenna demapping, and/or radio frequency reception functions.
  • the high-level functions in the PHY layer may include part of the functions of the PHY layer, for example, this part of the function is closer to the MAC layer, and the lower-layer functions of the PHY layer may include another part of the function of the PHY layer, for example, this part of the function is closer to the radio frequency function.
  • high-level functions in the PHY layer may include adding CRC codes, channel coding, rate matching, scrambling, modulation, and layer mapping
  • low-level functions in the PHY layer may include precoding, resource mapping, physical antenna mapping, and radio frequency transmission.
  • the high-level functions in the PHY layer may include adding CRC codes, channel coding, rate matching, scrambling, modulation, layer mapping, and precoding
  • the low-layer functions in the PHY layer may include resource mapping, physical antenna mapping, and radio frequency Send function.
  • the functions of the CU may be implemented by one entity, or may be implemented by different entities.
  • the functions of the CU can be further divided, that is, the control plane and the user plane are separated and implemented through different entities, namely the control plane CU entity (i.e., CU-CP entity) and the user plane CU entity (i.e., CU-UP entity).
  • the CU-CP entity and the CU-UP entity can be coupled with the DU to jointly complete the functions of the access network equipment.
  • the signaling generated by the CU can be sent to the terminal device through DU, or the signaling generated by the terminal device can be sent to the CU through DU.
  • RRC or PDCP layer signaling will eventually be processed into physical layer signaling and sent to the terminal device, or it will be converted from the received physical layer signaling.
  • the RRC or PDCP layer signaling can be considered to be sent through DU, or sent through DU and RU.
  • any one of the above DU, CU, CU-CP, CU-UP and RU can be a software module, a hardware structure, or a software module + hardware structure, without limitation.
  • the existence forms of different entities can be different and are not limited.
  • DU, CU, CU-CP, and CU-UP are software modules
  • RU is a hardware structure.
  • the communication system may also include more terminal devices and more access networks.
  • the equipment may also include other network elements, such as core network equipment, network management and/or network elements used to implement artificial intelligence functions.
  • network management can also be called operation administration and maintenance (OAM) network element, referred to as OAM.
  • OAM operation administration and maintenance
  • Operations mainly complete the analysis, prediction, planning and configuration of daily networks and services; maintenance mainly involves daily operational activities such as testing and fault management of the network and its services.
  • the network manager can detect the network operating status and optimize network connections and performance. , improve network operation stability and reduce network maintenance costs.
  • the method provided by the present disclosure can be used for communication between access network equipment and terminal equipment, and can also be used for communication between other communication equipment, such as communication between macro base stations and micro base stations in wireless backhaul links.
  • other communication equipment such as communication between macro base stations and micro base stations in wireless backhaul links.
  • the communication between two terminal devices in the side link (SL), or the communication between the terminal device and the network management (OAM), etc. are not restricted.
  • AI artificial intelligence
  • the AI model is the specific implementation of the AI technical function.
  • the AI model represents the mapping relationship between the input and output of the model.
  • AI models can be neural networks, linear regression models, decision tree models, support vector machines (SVM), Bayesian networks, Q learning models or other machine learning (ML) models.
  • An auto-encoder is a kind of unsupervised learning neural network. Its characteristic is that the input data is used as label data. Therefore, the auto-encoder can also be understood as self-supervised learning. neural network. Autoencoders can be used for data compression and recovery.
  • An autoencoder can generally refer to a network structure composed of two sub-models.
  • An autoencoder can also be called a bilateral model, a two-terminal model or a collaborative model.
  • an autoencoder includes an encoder and a decoder. In part, the encoder and decoder are used in a matched manner, and it can be understood that the encoder and decoder are matching AI models.
  • the encoder in the autoencoder can encode (for example, compress) the original information A to obtain the encoded information B; the decoder in the autoencoder can decode the encoded information B to obtain the corresponding information of the original information A.
  • the decoded information A' can also be described as the restored original information A.
  • the decoder is the inverse operation of the encoder; for example, the encoding process of the encoder includes compression processing, and the decoding process of the decoder includes decompression processing.
  • the encoder and decoder included in the same autoencoder can be deployed on different devices respectively.
  • the terminal device side can use the encoder to compress the original channel information
  • the access network device side can use the decoder to compress the compressed original channel information. The information is restored and the restored channel information is obtained.
  • Neural network is a specific implementation form of AI or machine learning technology. According to the universal approximation theorem, neural networks can theoretically approximate any continuous function, which enables neural networks to have the ability to learn arbitrary mappings.
  • each neuron performs a weighted sum operation on its input values and outputs the operation result through an activation function.
  • the bias for weighted summation of input values according to the weight is, for example, b. There are many forms of activation functions.
  • b, wi , xi can be decimals, integers (such as 0, positive integers or negative integers), or complex numbers and other possible values.
  • the activation functions of different neurons in a neural network can be the same or different.
  • Neural networks generally include multiple layers, and each layer may include one or more neurons. By increasing the depth and/or width of a neural network, the expressive ability of the neural network can be improved, providing more powerful information extraction and abstract modeling capabilities for complex systems.
  • the depth of the neural network may refer to the number of layers included in the neural network, and the number of neurons included in each layer may be called the width of the layer.
  • the neural network includes an input layer and an output layer. The input layer of the neural network processes the received input information through neurons, and passes the processing results to the output layer, which obtains the output results of the neural network.
  • the neural network includes an input layer, a hidden layer and an output layer, as shown in Figure 2B.
  • the input layer of the neural network processes the received input information through neurons and passes the processing results to the intermediate hidden layer.
  • the hidden layer calculates the received processing results and obtains the calculation results.
  • the hidden layer passes the calculation results to the output layer or
  • the adjacent hidden layer finally obtains the output result of the neural network from the output layer.
  • a neural network may include one hidden layer, or multiple hidden layers connected in sequence, without limitation.
  • the AI model used by the encoder or decoder in this disclosure can be a deep neural network (DNN).
  • DNNs can include feedforward neural networks (FNN), convolutional neural networks (CNN), or recurrent neural networks (RNN).
  • FNN feedforward neural networks
  • CNN convolutional neural networks
  • RNN recurrent neural networks
  • the training data set is used for training the AI model.
  • the training data set can include the input of the AI model, or include the input and target output of the AI model.
  • the training data set includes one or more training data.
  • the training data may be training samples input to the AI model, or may be the target output of the AI model. Among them, the target output can also be called a label or a label sample.
  • the training data set is one of the important parts of machine learning. Model training is essentially to learn some of its features from the training data so that the output of the AI model is as close as possible to the target output, such as the difference between the output of the AI model and the target output. The difference is as small as possible.
  • the composition and selection of training data sets can, to a certain extent, determine the performance of the trained AI model.
  • the training data only includes training samples input to the encoder in the autoencoder, or the training samples are label samples.
  • a loss function can be defined during the training process of AI models (such as neural networks).
  • the loss function describes the gap or difference between the output value of the AI model and the target output value. This disclosure does not limit the specific form of the loss function.
  • the training process of the AI model is the process of adjusting the model parameters of the AI model so that the value of the loss function is less than the threshold, or the value of the loss function meets the target requirements.
  • the AI model is a neural network, and adjusting the model parameters of the neural network includes adjusting at least one of the following parameters: the number of layers of the neural network, the width, the weight of the neuron, or the parameters in the activation function of the neuron.
  • Inference data can be used as input to the trained AI model for inference of the AI model.
  • the inference data is input into the AI model, and the corresponding output can be obtained, which is the inference result.
  • the design of AI models mainly includes data collection links (such as collecting training data and/or inference data), model training links, and model inference links. It may further include an application link of the reasoning results.
  • data collection links such as collecting training data and/or inference data
  • model training links such as collecting training data and/or inference data
  • model inference links It may further include an application link of the reasoning results.
  • FIG 2C to illustrate an AI application framework.
  • data sources are used to provide training data sets and inference data.
  • the AI model is obtained by analyzing or training the training data (training data) provided by the data source.
  • the AI model represents the mapping relationship between the input and output of the model. Learning an AI model through model training nodes is equivalent to using training data to learn the mapping relationship between the input and output of the model.
  • the AI model trained through the model training link is used to perform inference based on the inference data provided by the data source to obtain the inference results.
  • This link can also be understood as: input the inference data into the AI model, obtain the output through the AI model, and the output is the inference result.
  • the inference result may indicate: configuration parameters used (executed) by the execution object, and/or operations performed by the execution object.
  • the inference results are released in the inference result application link.
  • the inference results can be planned uniformly by the execution (actor) entity.
  • the execution entity can send the inference results to one or more execution objects (for example, core network equipment, access network equipment). , terminal equipment or network management, etc.) to execute.
  • the execution entity can also feed back the performance of the model to the data source to facilitate the subsequent update and training of the model.
  • network elements with artificial intelligence functions may be included in the communication system.
  • the above steps related to AI model design can be executed by one or more network elements with artificial intelligence functions.
  • AI functions (such as AI modules or AI entities) can be configured in existing network elements in the communication system to implement AI-related operations, such as AI model training and/or inference.
  • the existing network element may be access network equipment (such as gNB), terminal equipment, core network equipment, or network management, etc.
  • Operations mainly complete the analysis, prediction, planning and configuration of daily networks and services; maintenance mainly involves daily operational activities such as testing and fault management of the network and its services.
  • the network manager can detect the network operating status and optimize network connections and performance. , improve network operation stability and reduce network maintenance costs.
  • independent network elements can also be introduced into the communication system to perform AI-related operations, such as training AI models.
  • the independent network element may be called an AI network element or an AI node, and this disclosure does not limit this name.
  • the AI network element can be directly connected to the access network equipment in the communication system, or indirectly connected through a third-party network element and the access network equipment. catch.
  • third-party network elements can be authentication management function (AMF) network elements, user plane function (UPF) network elements and other core network elements, network management, cloud servers or other network elements. They are not allowed. limit.
  • AMF authentication management function
  • UPF user plane function
  • FIG. 3 a communication system is shown.
  • the communication system includes an access network device 110, a terminal device 120 and a terminal device 130; and, the AI network element 140 is also introduced into the communication system shown in Figure 3.
  • a model can infer one parameter or multiple parameters.
  • the training processes of different models can be deployed in different devices or nodes, or they can be deployed in the same device or node.
  • the inference processes of different models can be deployed in different devices or nodes, or they can be deployed in the same device or node.
  • the terminal device can train the supporting encoder and decoder and then send the model parameters of the decoder to the access network device.
  • the access network equipment can indicate the model parameters of the encoder to the terminal equipment after training the supporting encoder and decoder.
  • the AI network element can train the supporting encoder and decoder, and then send the model parameters of the encoder to the terminal device and the model parameters of the decoder to the access network. equipment. Then, the model inference step corresponding to the encoder is performed in the terminal equipment, and the model inference step corresponding to the decoder is performed in the access network equipment. Take other existing network elements (such as network management and core network elements) other than terminal equipment and access network equipment to complete the model training process as an example. After other existing network elements can train supporting encoders and decoders, they will The model parameters of the encoder are sent to the terminal equipment, and the model parameters of the decoder are sent to the access network equipment. Then, the model inference step corresponding to the encoder is performed in the terminal equipment, and the model inference step corresponding to the decoder is performed in the access network equipment.
  • the model inference step corresponding to the encoder is performed in the terminal equipment, and the model inference step corresponding to the decoder is performed in the access network equipment.
  • the model parameters may include the structural parameters of one or more of the following models (such as the number of layers and/or weights of the model, etc.), the input parameters of the model (such as input dimensions, the number of input ports), or the output of the model. Parameters (such as output dimensions, number of output ports).
  • the input dimension may refer to the size of an input data.
  • the input dimension corresponding to the sequence may indicate the length of the sequence.
  • the number of input ports may refer to the amount of input data.
  • the output dimension can refer to the size of an output data.
  • the output dimension corresponding to the sequence can indicate the length of the sequence.
  • the number of output ports can refer to the amount of output data.
  • the present disclosure also provides several network architectures as shown in Figures 4A to 4D, taking model training and/or inference in access network equipment as an example, and performing model training and/or inference in access network equipment.
  • the functional modules are divided.
  • the access network equipment includes a near-real-time access network intelligent control (RAN intelligent controller, RIC) module for model learning and/or inference.
  • the near real-time RIC may obtain network side and/or terminal side information from at least one of CU, DU and RU, and the information may include training data or inference data.
  • near-real-time RIC can be used for model training, and the trained model can also be used for inference.
  • the near real-time RIC may submit the inference results to at least one of CU, DU and RU.
  • CU and DU can interact with inference results.
  • inference results can be exchanged between DU and RU.
  • near-real-time RIC submits inference results to DU, and DU submits them to RU.
  • a non-real-time RIC can be included outside the access network equipment.
  • the non-real-time RIC can be located in the OAM or core. network equipment.
  • This non-real-time RIC is used for model learning and inference.
  • the non-real-time RIC may obtain network-side and/or terminal-side information from at least one of CU, DU, and RU, and the information may include training data or inference data.
  • non-real-time RIC is used for model training, and the trained model can also be used for inference.
  • the non-real-time RIC may submit the inference results to at least one of CU, DU and RU.
  • CU and DU can interact with inference results.
  • inference results can be exchanged between DU and RU.
  • non-real-time RIC submits inference results to DU, and DU submits them to RU.
  • the access network equipment includes near-real-time RIC, and the access network equipment also includes non-real-time RIC.
  • the non-real-time RIC can be located in the OAM or core network equipment.
  • non-real-time RIC can be used for model training.
  • Near-real-time RIC can obtain the model parameters of the trained AI model from the non-real-time RIC, and obtain the network-side sum from at least one of CU, DU and RU. /Or information on the terminal side, use this information and the trained AI model to obtain inference results.
  • the near real-time RIC can also submit the inference results to at least one of CU, DU and RU.
  • CU and DU can exchange inference results.
  • DU and RU can exchange inference results, for example.
  • Near real-time RIC submits the inference results to DU, and DU submits them to RU.
  • near-real-time RIC is used for model training and inference using the trained model, and non-real-time RIC does not participate in the training or inference of the model; or, non-real-time RIC is used for model training and
  • the trained model is used for inference, and real-time RIC does not participate in the training or inference of the model.
  • near-real-time RIC is used to train the model and send the model parameters of the trained AI model to the non-real-time RIC.
  • Real-time RIC utilizes trained models for inference.
  • FIG. 4B shows an example diagram of a network architecture to which the method provided by the present disclosure can be applied. Compared with (c) in Figure 4A, the CU is separated into CU-CP and CU-UP in Figure 4B.
  • Figure 4C shows an example diagram of a network architecture to which the method provided by the present disclosure can be applied.
  • the access network equipment includes one or more AI entities, and the function of the AI entity is similar to the above-mentioned near real-time RIC.
  • OAM includes one or more AI entities whose functions are similar to the above-mentioned non-real-time RIC.
  • the core network equipment includes one or more AI entities whose functions are similar to the above-mentioned non-real-time RIC.
  • differences in models may include at least one of the following differences: structural parameters of the model (such as the number of layers and/or weights of the model, etc.), input parameters of the model, or output parameters of the model.
  • Figure 4D shows an example diagram of a network architecture to which the method provided by the present disclosure can be applied.
  • the access network equipment in Figure 4D is separated into CU and DU.
  • the CU may include an AI entity whose functions are similar to the above-mentioned near real-time RIC.
  • the DU may include an AI entity whose functions are similar to the above-mentioned near real-time RIC.
  • both CU and DU include AI entities, the models trained by their respective AI entities are different, and/or the models used for inference are different.
  • the CU in Figure 4D can be further divided into CU-CP and CU-UP.
  • one or more AI models can be deployed in CU-CP.
  • one or more AI models may be deployed in CU-UP.
  • the OAM of the access network device and the OAM of the core network device can be deployed independently.
  • the present disclosure relates to feedback technology of channel state information (CSI).
  • the access network device needs to obtain the channel state information CSI of the channel.
  • the access network device can decide to schedule the resources of the downlink data channel of the terminal device based on the CSI.
  • Configurations such as modulation and coding scheme (MCS) and precoding.
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • CSI belongs to a kind of channel information, which is a kind of information that can reflect channel characteristics and channel quality.
  • the channel information may also be called channel response.
  • the CSI may be represented by a channel matrix.
  • the CSI may include a channel matrix, or the CSI may be composed of a feature vector of a channel.
  • the access network equipment since the uplink and downlink channels do not have reciprocity or cannot guarantee the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, the access network equipment usually sends downlink reference signals to the terminal equipment. , the terminal equipment performs channel measurement and interference measurement to estimate the downlink channel information based on the received downlink reference signal.
  • the downlink channel information includes CSI, and then feeds back the CSI to the access network equipment.
  • the terminal device can generate a CSI report based on the estimated CSI and feed it back to the access network device in a predefined or configured manner by the access network device.
  • the downlink reference signal includes channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) or synchronizing signal block (synchronizing signal/physical broadcast channel block, SSB).
  • CSI-RS channel state information-reference signal
  • SSB synchronizing signal block
  • the CSI report includes feedback quantities such as rank indicator (rank indicator, RI), channel quality indicator (channel quality indicator, CQI), and precoding matrix indicator (precoding matrix indicator, PMI).
  • RI is used to indicate the number of downlink transmission layers recommended by the terminal equipment
  • CQI is used to indicate the modulation and coding method that the current channel conditions judged by the terminal equipment can support
  • PMI is used to indicate the precoding recommended by the terminal equipment
  • the precoding layer indicated by the PMI The number corresponds to RI. For example, if RI is 1, then PMI indicates one layer of precoding; if RI is N, then PMI indicates N layer precoding. N is a positive integer greater than 1. It can be understood that N layer precoding corresponds to The N downlink transmission layers indicated by RI. It can be seen that the larger the number of downlink transmission layers indicated by the RI, the higher the PMI feedback overhead, resulting in larger CSI feedback overhead.
  • Introducing artificial intelligence AI into wireless communication networks creates an AI-based CSI feedback method.
  • the CSI in the downlink channel information measured and estimated by the terminal equipment is recorded as the original CSI.
  • the terminal equipment uses the AI model to compress and quantify the original CSI and then sends it to the access network equipment.
  • the access network equipment uses the AI model to compress and quantize the received CSI.
  • the quantized CSI is dequantized and decompressed to obtain the restored CSI.
  • the autoencoder can be introduced into CSI feedback to construct a CSI feedback method based on the autoencoder.
  • the autoencoder is trained based on the downlink channel information or the original CSI in the downlink channel information.
  • the training data set of the autoencoder includes several original CSIs.
  • the training process of the autoencoder can be completed in model training nodes such as access network equipment, network management OAM or core network equipment, and then the model training node can deploy the encoder in the trained autoencoder on the terminal device, and The decoder in the trained autoencoder is deployed on the access network device.
  • Figure 5A illustrates a CSI feedback method based on an autoencoder.
  • the encoder of the autoencoder has compression and quantization functions.
  • the terminal equipment inputs the original CSI to the encoder, and the encoder outputs Quantized CSI based on original CSI; deploy an autoencoder decoder in the access network equipment, which has dequantization and decompression functions.
  • FIG. 5B illustrates a CSI feedback method based on an autoencoder.
  • the encoding of the autoencoder in terminal equipment deployment The encoder has a compression function and a quantization function, but the compression function and the quantization function are implemented by a compressor and a quantizer respectively.
  • the terminal device inputs the original CSI to the encoder, and the compressor in the encoder outputs compression based on the original CSI.
  • CSI then the terminal device uses a quantizer to quantize the compressed CSI based on the original CSI to obtain quantized CSI based on the original CSI.
  • the decoder has decompression and dequantization functions, but the dequantization and decompression functions are implemented by the dequantizer and the decompressor respectively.
  • the access network device uses the dequantizer to dequantize the received quantized CSI based on the original CSI to obtain the dequantized compressed CSI, and then the access network device inputs the dequantized compressed CSI to the decompressor, and the decompressor Output the recovered CSI.
  • the compressor can also be described as a compression module, compression unit or compression device;
  • the quantizer can also be described as a quantization module, quantization unit or quantization device;
  • the dequantizer can also be described as a dequantization module, dequantization unit or dequantization device;
  • a decompressor may alternatively be described as a decompression module, decompression unit or decompression device. This disclosure is not limiting in this regard.
  • AI models are sensitive to scene changes.
  • the performance of the AI model may decrease sharply.
  • the performance of the autoencoder may be reduced. The performance of the autoencoder will directly affect the feedback and recovery accuracy of CSI. How to monitor the performance of the autoencoder has become an issue worth studying.
  • the performance of the autoencoder is generally determined by comparing the difference between the input of the encoder (original CSI) and the output of the decoder (recovered CSI).
  • original CSI original CSI
  • decoder the output of the decoder
  • recovered CSI residual CSI
  • a decoder is deployed in addition to the encoder in the terminal device.
  • the encoder and decoder are matched and used to form an autoencoder.
  • the terminal device inputs the original CSI to the autoencoder, and the output of the autoencoder is the recovery CSI.
  • the end device compares the difference between the original CSI and the recovered CSI to determine the performance of the autoencoder.
  • the decoder is more complex than the encoder.
  • Running the encoder and decoder on the terminal device will increase the processing complexity of the terminal device, and the decoder may involve the algorithm privacy of the access network device. Deploying the decoder in the terminal device will Reduce communication security.
  • the terminal device sends the original CSI to the access network device, and the access network device compares the difference between the original CSI and the CSI restored by the decoder to determine the performance of the autoencoder. Such a design will cause CSI feedback overhead increases.
  • the present disclosure provides a performance monitoring solution for an autoencoder.
  • the input of the first encoder includes original information.
  • the output of includes encoded information;
  • the input of the first decoder includes encoded information, and the output of the first decoder includes decoded information.
  • the output of the first decoder is processed by the second encoder to obtain the output of the second encoder, and the output of the second encoder includes re-encoding information.
  • the performance of the autoencoder is indirectly determined by comparing the difference between the re-encoding information output by the second encoder and the encoding information output by the first encoder.
  • the autoencoder performance monitoring solution provided by this disclosure can be applied to autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenarios, or other scenarios that require the deployment of autoencoders.
  • the original information includes original CSI.
  • Deploy the first encoder in the terminal device and deploy the first decoder and the second encoder in the access network device. There is no need to deploy the decoder in the terminal device, which can avoid increasing the processing complexity of the terminal device and improve communication security. ; There is also no need to transmit a large amount of original CSI for autoencoder performance monitoring, which can reduce CSI overhead.
  • the CSI feedback in this application is not limited to downlink CSI feedback, and may also be applied to uplink CSI feedback, or CSI feedback between things, such as sidelink SL. CSI in this application can be replaced by channel information.
  • the second encoder may be the first encoder itself, or an encoder with the same function as the first encoder.
  • the same function of the first encoder and the second encoder can be understood as: when the input data of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, the outputs of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, or the first encoder
  • the output difference between the first encoder and the second encoder is less than the preset threshold, but the model parameters and/or the applied AI model types of the first encoder and the second encoder are different.
  • the functions of the first encoder and the second encoder may also be the same: when the first encoder has compression and quantization functions, the second encoder also needs to have compression and quantization functions; or, the first encoder has compression but When it does not have the quantization function, the second encoder has the compression function but does not have the quantization function.
  • the aforementioned original information includes original channel information, such as original CSI; the encoding information includes quantized CSI based on the original CSI; decoding The information includes restored CSI; the recoding information includes quantized CSI based on the restored CSI.
  • the set of original CSI and restored CSI is called channel space, and the set of quantized CSI based on original CSI and quantized CSI based on restored CSI is called latent variable space.
  • One sample point in the channel space represents one original CSI or one restored CSI
  • one sample point in the latent variable space represents one quantized CSI based on the original CSI or one quantized CSI based on the restored CSI.
  • the first encoder or the second encoder can be regarded as a function f(*).
  • the function f(*) can represent mapping 1 sample point in the channel space to 1 sample point in the latent variable space, or it can be described as 1 sample point in the latent variable space is 1 sample point in the channel space projection.
  • the original CSI is denoted as V
  • the quantized CSI based on the original CSI is denoted as z
  • there is a functional relationship: z f(V).
  • a mapping relationship diagram is shown.
  • the difference between the restored CSI and the original CSI can be expressed as the distance between corresponding sample points in the channel space. Then there is a corresponding corresponding
  • the difference between the quantized CSI based on the restored CSI and the quantized CSI based on the original CSI can be expressed. Therefore, you can monitor The difference between z and indirectly determines the recovered CSI and the original CSI V, thereby enabling performance monitoring of the autoencoder.
  • calculation methods such as Euclidean distance, minimum mean square error (MSE) distance, or cosine similarity can be used to measure the distance between two sample points in the channel space or latent variable space.
  • MSE minimum mean square error
  • the Euclidean distance refers to the distance between two points in the Euclidean space.
  • the Euclidean distance of point r(r 1 ,r 2 ,...,r n ) and point q(q 1 ,q 2 ,...,q n ) is specifically expressed as
  • the MSE distance is specifically expressed as The smaller the Euclidean distance or MSE distance of two sample points in the same space, the smaller the distance or difference between the two sample points.
  • the cosine similarity of two sample points in the same space refers to the cosine value of the angle between the two sample points.
  • the cosine value of an angle of 0 degrees is 1.
  • the cosine value of any other angle is not greater than 1.
  • the minimum cosine value is The value is -1.
  • the cosine values corresponding to two sample points can determine whether the two sample points point roughly in the same direction. The greater the cosine similarity between the two sample points in the same space, the smaller the distance or difference between the two sample points.
  • Such a correlation can also be described as the distance between sample points in the channel space and the distance between the corresponding projections in the latent variable space are consistent, or it can also be described as the distance between the sample points in the channel space and the distance in the hidden variable space.
  • the distances between corresponding projections in the latent variable space remain positively correlated.
  • Figure 7 shows several situations showing the correlation between the distance between two sample points in the channel space and the distance between their projections in the latent variable space. Among them, the solid line in Figure 7 represents the channel space, and the dotted line represents the hidden variable space. (a) in Figure 7 illustrates the distance correlation corresponding to the training data set, and (b) in Figure 7 illustrates the distance correlation corresponding to the measurement data set 1.
  • (c) in Figure 7 illustrates the distance correlation corresponding to measurement data set 2.
  • the training data set includes several pieces of downlink channel information or the original CSI in the downlink channel information.
  • the test data set 1 includes several pieces of downlink channel information or the original CSI in the downlink channel information that have the same distribution as the training data set, such as the same channel environment.
  • the test Data set 2 includes several pieces of downlink channel information or original CSI in the downlink channel information whose distribution is different from that of the training data set, for example, the channel environment is different.
  • the first device is a device responsible for monitoring the performance of the autoencoder.
  • the first device can be a model inference node using a decoder or a model training node used to train the autoencoder.
  • the second encoder and the second encoder are deployed in the first device.
  • the first decoder in the first autoencoder; the second device is a model inference node using the encoder, and the first encoder in the first autoencoder is deployed in the second device.
  • the first device can be an access network device or other network elements used to train the autoencoder, such as network management OAM, core network equipment or independent AI network elements, etc.
  • the second device may be a terminal device.
  • Figure 8 illustrates a communication method, which mainly includes the following processes.
  • the first device receives M pieces of first coded information from the second device.
  • the process by which the second device determines any one of the M first encoded information can be understood as follows: the second device uses the first encoder and the first original information input to the first encoder. , determine the first encoding information.
  • the M pieces of first coded information correspond to the M pieces of first original information in a one-to-one manner.
  • the first encoder has compression and quantization functions, and the original information input to the first encoder directly outputs the compressed and quantized information.
  • the first encoder can compress and quantize the input one first original information, and output the one first original information.
  • a piece of first coded information corresponding to the information, and the piece of first coded information is quantized information.
  • the aforementioned first original information includes the first original channel information estimated by the second device measurement reference signal, such as the downlink reference signal;
  • the first original channel information includes original CSI.
  • the first coding information may include quantized CSI based on the original CSI, and the first coding information is specifically a bit sequence. In this case, the first equipment What the body receives is M first coded information.
  • the first encoder has a compression function and a quantization function, but the quantization function and the compression function are respectively completed by the first quantizer and the first compressor included in the first encoder, and the input
  • the original information of the first encoder may first obtain compressed information through the first compressor and then obtain quantized information through the first quantizer.
  • the first coded information in this application may refer to information after compression without quantization, or may refer to information after compression and quantization.
  • the first compressor may Perform compression processing on a first original information, and output a first encoded information corresponding to the first original information.
  • the first encoded information is unquantized information; furthermore, the second device can use the first quantization
  • the processor performs quantization processing on the piece of first coded information to obtain a piece of first quantized information corresponding to the piece of first coded information.
  • the input of the first quantizer includes the first encoding information, and the output of the first quantizer includes the first quantization information.
  • the first original information includes the first original channel information estimated by the second device by measuring the downlink reference signal; wherein the first original channel information includes the original CSI.
  • the first coding information can be understood as compressed CSI based on the original CSI, and the first coding information is specifically a floating point number sequence. In this case, what the first device specifically receives is M pieces of first coding information corresponding to M pieces of first quantization information.
  • the first coded information may refer to compressed and quantized information
  • the first compressor can perform compression processing on the input first original information, and output a first compressed information corresponding to the first original information, and the first compressed information is unquantized information; and then , the second device can use the first quantizer to perform quantization processing on the piece of first compressed information, and obtain a piece of first quantized information corresponding to the piece of first compressed information.
  • the input of the first quantizer includes the first compression information
  • the output of the first quantizer includes the first quantization information.
  • the first original information includes the first original channel information estimated by the second device by measuring the downlink reference signal; wherein the first original channel information includes the original CSI.
  • the first compressed information can be understood as compressed CSI based on the original CSI, and the first compressed information is specifically a floating point number sequence.
  • what the first device specifically receives is M pieces of first quantized information corresponding to M pieces of first compressed information, and the M pieces of first quantized information are M pieces of first encoded information.
  • the quantizer may be one of the following: a non-uniform quantizer, a scalar quantizer, a vector quantizer, a quantizer designed based on experience, or a quantizer obtained through AI training.
  • the quantizer may be combined with the first encoder Train together.
  • Quantization processing can also be called quantization operation. Quantization processing can be understood as finding the item closest to the quantity to be quantified in the quantization dictionary and outputting the index of the item.
  • the quantity to be quantized in this design is the first compressed information, and the index output by querying the quantization dictionary is included in the first quantized information corresponding to the first compressed information.
  • the first quantizer used by the second device may be pre-configured, for example, in a protocol-defined manner, or the second device and the first device may pre-negotiate a first quantizer.
  • the second device can also decide on its own the first quantizer to use, and send information indicating the first quantizer to use to the first device.
  • the M pieces of first coded information (or M pieces of first quantized information) sent by the second device are transmitted to the first device through the channel, and the M pieces of first coded information (or M pieces of first quantized information) received by the first device There may be a certain transmission loss between the M first quantized information) and the M first coded information (or M first quantized information) sent by the second device, or it may be understood that the M first codes received by the first device There is a certain difference between the information (or M first quantized information) and the M first encoded information (or M first quantized information) sent by the second device.
  • the present disclosure ignores the transmission loss or difference, or the method provided by the present disclosure is not limited by the transmission loss or difference.
  • M is a positive integer.
  • the value of M can be determined by the first device.
  • the first device may monitor the performance of the autoencoder based on the continuously received first encoding information, and the value of M may specifically correspond to the frequency with which the first device determines the performance of the autoencoder. For example, every time the first device receives a first encoding information, it judges the performance of the autoencoder, and M is 1. In another example, when the first device receives a specified number of first encoding information and determines the performance of the primary autoencoder, the value of M is the aforementioned specified number.
  • the first device judges the performance of the autoencoder every specified time period, the value of M is the number of first encoding information sent by the second device within the aforementioned specified time period.
  • the first device may also monitor the performance of the autoencoder based on the discontinuously received first encoding information. For example, M pieces of first encoding information are received every specified time period or every set number of pieces of first encoding information, and the performance of the autoencoder is judged based on the M pieces of first encoding information, where M is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first device uses the first decoder and the M pieces of first encoding information to determine the M pieces of first decoding information.
  • the first decoder and the first encoder belong to the same autoencoder, such as being recorded as the first autoencoder. Understandably, yes It is predefined that the first device uses the first decoder in the first autoencoder, and the second device uses the first encoder in the first autoencoder. Or when sending M pieces of first encoding information, the second device indicates one or more of the following to the first device: a first encoder, a first decoder, or a first autoencoder.
  • the M pieces of first decoded information are in one-to-one correspondence with the M pieces of first encoded information, and the M pieces of first decoded information are in one-to-one correspondence with the M pieces of first original information.
  • the i-th first decoded information among the M pieces of first decoded information corresponds to the i-th first original information among the M pieces of first original information
  • the i-th first decoded information is the i-th piece of first decoded information recovered from the first device.
  • the first original information. i is any positive integer from 1 to M, or it can be described as a positive integer from 1 to M.
  • the first decoding information may specifically refer to the recovered CSI.
  • the M pieces of first coded information sent by the first device are quantized information.
  • the first decoder has dequantization and decompression functions.
  • the first device may input M pieces of first encoded information to the first decoder in parallel or serially, and the first decoder may output M pieces of first decoded information.
  • the first decoder has a decompression function and a dequantization function, and the dequantization function and the decompression function are respectively provided by a first dequantizer and a first decompressor included in the first decoder. accomplish.
  • the first device may first use the first dequantizer to dequantize the M pieces of first coded information to obtain M pieces of dequantized information corresponding to the M pieces of first coded information; then, the first device parallelizes the M pieces of dequantized information. Or it is serially input to the first decompressor, and the first decompressor outputs corresponding M pieces of first decoded information.
  • the dequantization information corresponding to the first encoding information includes dequantized compressed CSI.
  • the second device sends M pieces of first quantized information corresponding to the M pieces of first coded information.
  • the first decoder has dequantization and decompression functions.
  • the first device may input M pieces of first quantized information to the first decoder in parallel or serially, and the first decoder may output M pieces of first decoded information.
  • the first decoder has a decompression function and a dequantization function, but the decompression function and dequantization function are respectively implemented by the first decompressor and the first dequantizer included in the first decoder.
  • the first device may first use a first dequantizer to dequantize the M pieces of first quantized information and restore the M pieces of first compressed information; furthermore, the first device may input the M pieces of first compressed information in parallel or serially to The first decompressor outputs corresponding M pieces of first decompressed information.
  • the M pieces of first decompressed information are also M pieces of first decoded information.
  • the first encoding information obtained by the second device using the first encoder includes compressed CSI based on the original CSI; the first quantization information includes quantized CSI based on the original CSI;
  • the first encoded information restored by the first device using the dequantizer includes dequantized compressed CSI.
  • the aforementioned first dequantizer is used in conjunction with the first quantizer in S801, and the first dequantizer can be understood as the inverse operation of the first quantizer.
  • the input of the first dequantizer includes M pieces of first quantization information
  • the output includes M pieces of first encoding information.
  • the first dequantizer is also preconfigured.
  • the second device sends information indicating the first quantizer
  • the first device can determine the matching first dequantizer based on the information indicating the first quantizer.
  • the first device uses the second encoder and the M pieces of first decoding information input to the second encoder to determine M pieces of first re-encoding information.
  • the second encoder may be the first encoder or an encoder with the same function as the first encoder.
  • the definition of the same function can be understood with reference to the foregoing description, and will not be repeated in this disclosure.
  • the M pieces of first re-encoded information correspond to the M pieces of first decoded information on a one-to-one basis, and the M pieces of first re-encoded information correspond to the M pieces of first encoded information on a one-to-one basis.
  • the first re-encoded information is information comparable to the first encoded information
  • the first re-encoded information is quantized information
  • the first re-encoded information is quantized information
  • the first re-encoded information is unquantized information
  • the second encoder has compression and quantization functions and the compression and quantization functions are implemented by the same module.
  • the first device can input M pieces of first decoded information to the second encoder in parallel or serially,
  • the second encoder may output M pieces of first re-encoded information, where the M pieces of first re-encoded information are quantized information.
  • one of the M first re-encoding information may include quantized CSI based on one recovered CSI.
  • the second encoder has a compression function and a quantization function, and the compression function and the quantization function are respectively implemented by a second compressor and a second quantizer included in the second encoder.
  • the first device may input M pieces of first decoded information to the second compressor in parallel or serially, and the second compressor may output M pieces of first heavily compressed information.
  • the first device may use the second quantizer to perform quantization processing on M pieces of first re-compressed information to obtain M pieces of first re-compressed information.
  • the M pieces of first re-encoded information may be the M pieces of first re-compressed information, or M pieces of first re-encoded information, specifically corresponding to whether the first encoded information is quantized information.
  • one of the M first-level compressed information may include one based on recovery.
  • Compressed CSI of CSI may include quantized CSI based on the recovered 1 CSI.
  • the first device determines the performance of the first autoencoder based on the difference between the M pieces of first encoding information and the M pieces of first re-encoding information.
  • the M first encoding information and the M first re-encoding information in step S804 are both For quantified information, the first device calculates the difference between the M pieces of first encoded information and the M pieces of first re-encoded information received by the first device.
  • one of the M pieces of first original information includes first original channel information, such as original CSI.
  • One first coding information among the M pieces of first coding information includes quantized CSI based on the original CSI; one piece of first recoding information among the M pieces of first recoding information includes quantized CSI based on the recovered CSI.
  • the first device may determine the performance of the first autoencoder by comparing differences between the M quantized CSIs based on the original CSI and the M quantized CSIs based on the recovered CSIs.
  • the M pieces of first encoding information and M pieces of first re-encoding information in step S804 can be All are unquantified information, or all are quantified information.
  • the first device receives M corresponding to the M first coded information. the first quantitative information.
  • the first device may use a dequantizer to process M pieces of first quantized information to obtain M pieces of first coded information.
  • the first device calculates is the difference between the M pieces of first encoded information and the M pieces of first re-encoded information obtained by dequantization processing by the first device.
  • one of the M pieces of first original information includes first original channel information, such as original CSI.
  • One first coding information among the M pieces of first coding information includes dequantized compressed CSI; one piece of first recoding information among the M pieces of first recoding information includes compressed CSI based on the restored CSI.
  • the first device may determine the performance of the first autoencoder by comparing differences between the M dequantized compressed CSIs and the M compressed CSIs based on the recovered CSIs.
  • the first device can use a quantizer to perform the compression on the M pieces of first re-compressed information. After quantization processing, M pieces of first quantized information are obtained, that is, M pieces of first re-encoded information.
  • the first device may calculate differences between the M pieces of first quantized information and the M pieces of first weighted information to determine the performance of the autoencoder. For example, in a CSI feedback scenario, one of the M pieces of first original information includes first original channel information, such as original CSI.
  • One of the M first quantization information includes the quantized CSI based on the original CSI; one of the M first re-encoding information includes the compressed CSI based on the restored CSI, and the M-th first re-encoding information includes the compressed CSI based on the restored CSI.
  • One of the first quantization information in the quantization information includes quantized CSI based on the restored CSI.
  • the first device may determine the performance of the first autoencoder by comparing differences between the M quantized CSIs based on the original CSI and the M quantized CSIs based on the recovered CSIs.
  • the performance determination method of the first self-editer will be described on a case-by-case basis.
  • Case 1 M is 1. If the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, or if the If the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is less than or equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value.
  • the first threshold and the second threshold may be equal or unequal.
  • the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value or the second value.
  • the performance of the first autoencoder can correspond to other values in addition to the first value or the second value. Different values correspond to different performance definitions, and this disclosure is not limiting.
  • the first threshold and the second threshold are thresholds set to measure the difference between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information.
  • the difference parameter between one piece of first coded information and the one first re-coded information includes the difference between one piece of first coded information and the one first re-coded information.
  • one piece of first coding information is represented as z
  • one piece of first recoding information is represented as Illustratively, the sample points in the latent variable space are used as an example to describe.
  • the first threshold is equal to the second threshold
  • the first threshold or the second threshold can be understood as the distance difference threshold D1 between sample points in the latent variable space.
  • First device can calculate distance The size relationship with D1 is used to determine the performance of the first autoencoder.
  • the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, and the first value may be used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the first requirement.
  • the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value, and the second value may be used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the first requirement.
  • the first threshold and the second threshold are thresholds set to measure the difference between the first original information and the first decoded information.
  • the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information may be determined based on the scaling factor and the difference between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information.
  • the scaling factor may be understood as a coefficient used to adjust the difference between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information to the same level as the difference between the original information and the decoded information.
  • the difference parameter between one first encoded information and the one first re-encoded information may be equal to the product of the scaling factor and the difference between one first encoded information and the one first re-encoded information.
  • the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is a value of the same magnitude as the difference between the first original information and the first decoded information.
  • sample points in the channel space are used as an example for description.
  • the first threshold can be understood as the distance difference threshold D2 between sample points in the channel space.
  • one first encoding information is represented as z
  • one first re-encoding information is represented as The scaling factor is denoted k.
  • the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, and the first value may be used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the first requirement.
  • the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value, and the second value may be used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the first requirement.
  • the aforementioned scaling factor may be preconfigured to the first device, or the scaling factor may be determined by the first device based on multiple pieces of original information and multiple pieces of coded information corresponding to the multiple pieces of original information.
  • the scale factor is determined by the second device based on multiple pieces of original information and multiple pieces of coded information corresponding to the pieces of original information, and then the first device obtains the scale factor from the second device.
  • the scale factor is variable, and the first device can periodically update the scale factor when determining the scale factor.
  • the second device determines the scaling factor the first device can configure the timing for the second device to report the scaling factor. For example, the second device reports once for periodic reporting or dynamic indication reporting.
  • the scaling factor reported by the second device each time may be the same or different. This disclosure is not limiting in this regard.
  • first device and the second device determine the scaling factor in the same manner.
  • the following is an example of how the first device determines the scaling factor.
  • the first device may receive N pieces of second original information from the second device and N pieces of second encoded information corresponding to the N pieces of second original information. Wherein, all or part of the N pieces of second original information belong to the M pieces of first original information, or the N pieces of second original information do not include any of the M pieces of first original information.
  • N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the first device may determine the scaling factor based on the ratio between the difference between pairs of second original information in the N pieces of second original information and the difference between pairs of second encoded information corresponding to the pair of second original information.
  • the first device may divide the N pieces of second original information into multiple groups of original information, where each group of original information includes two second pieces of original information among the N pieces of second original information.
  • the N pieces of second coded information can also be divided into multiple groups of coded information, where each group of coded information includes two pieces of second coded information among the N pieces of second coded information.
  • the N second original information includes N second original channel information in the current communication environment.
  • N may be 3, and the 3 second original information may include 3 original CSIs in the current environment.
  • the three second original information are represented as V1, V2, and V3 respectively.
  • the three second coded information corresponding to the three second original information are respectively represented as z1, z2, and z3 in the latent variable space.
  • the scaling factor k can be expressed as:
  • the first device may use the difference between the N pieces of second original information and the reference original information and the difference between the N pieces of second encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information. proportion, determine the scaling factor.
  • the reference original information may include one or more original information in the training data set of the first encoder.
  • the reference encoding information may be label data corresponding to the reference original information in the training data set of the first encoder, or the reference
  • the encoded information may be sent by the second device to the first device.
  • N can be 1 or an integer greater than 1.
  • the N second original information includes N second original channel information in the current communication environment.
  • the 3 second original information includes 3 original CSIs
  • the reference original information includes 1 original CSI in the training data set of the first autoencoder.
  • V1 represents the reference original information
  • the reference coding information corresponding to V1 is represented as z1 in the latent variable space
  • V2, V3, and V4 represent 3 original CSIs among the M first original information
  • the 3 second The three second coded information corresponding to the original information are represented as z2, z3, and z4 respectively in the latent variable space.
  • the scaling factor k can be expressed as:
  • N is 2, and the two second original information may include two original CSIs in the current environment.
  • the reference original information The information includes the 2 original CSIs in the training data set of the first autoencoder.
  • V1 and V2 represent the two original CSIs in the training data set of the first autoencoder
  • V3 and V4 represent the two original CSIs in the M first original information
  • V1, V2, V3, and V4 are They are represented as z1, z2, z3, and z4 respectively in the latent variable space.
  • the scaling factor k can be expressed as:
  • the first device may calculate the difference between each second original information among the N second original information and each second decoded information among the N second decoded information.
  • the ratio of the difference between the second encoded information corresponding to each second original information and the second re-encoded information corresponding to each second encoded information determines the scaling factor; wherein, the N second decoded The information corresponds one-to-one to the N pieces of second original information.
  • the first device can use the first decoder to decode the N second encoder information corresponding to the N second original information to obtain N second decoded information, and then the first device can use the second encoder to decode the N second encoder information.
  • N pieces of second decoded information are re-encoded to obtain N pieces of second re-encoded information.
  • the N second original information includes N second original channel information in the current communication environment.
  • N 3 pieces of second original information include 3 pieces of original CSI.
  • the 3 second original information denotes the 3 second original information as V1, V2, V3.
  • the three second coded information corresponding to the three second original information are recorded as z1, z2, and z3 respectively.
  • the three second decoded information corresponding to the three second original information are represented as V1', V2', V3'.
  • the three second re-encoded information corresponding to the three second decoded information are recorded as z1', z2', z3'
  • the scale factor k can be expressed as:
  • the first device can measure each of the K first encoding information and the corresponding first encoding information of the K first encoding information according to the first threshold, the second threshold or other thresholds. Difference parameter between one layer of encoded information.
  • K pieces of first coded information are included in M pieces of first coded information.
  • K pieces of first coded information include part or all of the M pieces of first coded information.
  • K is an integer less than or equal to M.
  • the performance corresponding to the first autoencoder is determined.
  • the first value or if the difference parameter between the K pieces of first encoded information and the first re-encoded information corresponding to the K pieces of first encoded information is less than or equal to the second threshold, determine the value of the first autoencoder. Performance corresponds to the second value.
  • the proportion of the K pieces of first coding information to the M pieces of first coding information is greater than or equal to a first proportion threshold, and the first proportion threshold may be preconfigured.
  • K can be expressed as Among them, ⁇ represents the first proportion threshold, and the value of ⁇ can be 0.6, 0.7 or other values. Indicates rounding up. Or it can also be described as: if Then it can be determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value.
  • the first device can calculate the difference parameter between each of the M first encoded information and the first re-encoded information corresponding to each of the first encoded information, and obtain M difference parameters; then the first device can determine the average value of the M difference parameters.
  • the first device may measure the average of the M difference parameters based on the first threshold, the second threshold, or other thresholds.
  • the average of the M difference parameters is greater than or equal to the first threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, or if the average of the M difference parameters is less than or equal to the second threshold, Then it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value.
  • first threshold the second threshold, the first value, the second value, and the difference parameters between a piece of first encoded information and a corresponding piece of first re-encoded information
  • second threshold the first value
  • second value the difference parameters between a piece of first encoded information and a corresponding piece of first re-encoded information
  • the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the first requirement or determine that the performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the first requirement. Further, when the performance of the first autoencoder is poor, the first device can also perform one or more of the following operations: update the first autoencoder; instruct the second device to stop using the first autoencoder; instruct the second device to stop using the first autoencoder.
  • the second device uses an encoder in another autoencoder; instructs the second device to use a traditional CSI feedback method for CSI feedback.
  • Figure 8 further illustrates optional step S805:
  • the above communication method provided by the present disclosure introduces an encoder at one end of the decoder in the deployed autoencoder, and compares the encoding information output by the encoder included in the autoencoder with the re-encoding information output by the encoder introduced by the decoder. The difference between them can be indirectly judged Performance of autoencoders. It can safely and effectively monitor the performance of the autoencoder while ensuring reduced information transmission overhead.
  • the disclosure also provides a performance monitoring solution for the autoencoder, mainly by judging whether the difference relationship between the encoded information is consistent with the corresponding original information, or by judging whether the difference relationship between the encoded information and the re-encoded information is consistent with the corresponding difference.
  • the difference relationship between the original information and the decoded information is consistent and determines the performance of the autoencoder.
  • this solution mainly uses the distance relationship between sample points in the latent variable space and the distance relationship between sample points in the channel space to measure the performance of the autoencoder. .
  • Figure 10 illustrates a communication method, which mainly includes the following processes.
  • the second device sends P pieces of third coded information to the first device.
  • the second device can use the first encoder to process the P pieces of third original information and determine the P pieces of third encoded information, that is, the P pieces of third encoded information are generated based on the P pieces of third original information.
  • the P third coded information can be P projections of the P third original information in the channel space into the latent variable space.
  • the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies the first preset relationship
  • P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3.
  • the P pieces of third original information form a group of two pieces of third original information.
  • the P pieces of third original information are divided into multiple groups of third original information.
  • One set of third original information among multiple sets of third original information corresponds to one piece of difference information, and the difference information corresponding to one set of third original information is used to indicate the difference between two third original information in the third original information.
  • the magnitude relationship between the plurality of difference information corresponding to the plurality of sets of third original information satisfies the first preset relationship.
  • P third original information corresponds to P sample points in the channel space. When P is 3, the three third original information are recorded as V1, V2, and V3 respectively.
  • the first preset relationship may include: d(V1, V2)>d(V2, V3).
  • the second device may actively send P pieces of third coded information to the first device, or may send P pieces of third coded information triggered by a request from the first device.
  • Figure 10 also illustrates an optional step S1000 before S1001: the first device sends second information to the second device, and the second information is used to request P third original information that satisfies the first preset relationship, Or the second information is used to request P pieces of third coded information generated based on P pieces of third original information that satisfy the first preset relationship. Furthermore, in S1001, the second device sends P pieces of third coded information to the first device.
  • first preset relationships corresponding to the P pieces of third original information may be predefined.
  • the second device and the first device can pre-agree on the resources occupied by sending the P pieces of third coded information corresponding to the P pieces of third original information.
  • the first device can determine the P pieces of third original information after receiving the P pieces of third coded information.
  • the second device may send third information to the first device, where the third information is used to indicate the correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information.
  • the third information includes the identifier, resource ID, etc. of the third original information corresponding to each channel state indication information in the P third coded information.
  • S1002 The first device determines whether the differences between the P pieces of third coded information satisfy the first preset relationship.
  • pairs of P pieces of third coded information form a group of third coded information
  • the P pieces of third coded information are divided into multiple groups of third coded information.
  • One group of third encoding information among multiple groups of third encoding information corresponds to one piece of difference information
  • the difference information corresponding to one group of third encoding information is used to indicate the difference between two third encoding information in the group of third encoding information.
  • the first device may specifically determine that the magnitude relationship between the plurality of difference information corresponding to the plurality of sets of third encoding information satisfies the first preset relationship.
  • P third original information corresponds to P sample points in the channel space.
  • the three third original information are recorded as V1, V2, and V3 respectively.
  • the projections of the P third original information in the latent variable space are recorded as z1, z2, and z3 respectively.
  • the first device can determine whether z1, z2, z3 conform to the following relationship included in the first preset relationship: d(z1,z2)>d(z2,z3 ).
  • the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the second requirement, and the first device may not perform Any operation; if the difference between the P third encoded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, the first device can determine that the performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the second requirement, and the first device can then provide the second device with Send fifth information, the fifth information being used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder.
  • the method in Figure 10 and the method in Figure 8 can be used together. First, the principle of using the method in Figure 10 and the method in Figure 8 together will be explained below.
  • a key point in judging the performance of the autoencoder is to use the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information to reflect the difference between the original information and the decoded information, or to use the sample points in the latent variable space
  • the distance between reflects the distance between sample points in the channel space. It can also be known from the several relationship diagrams illustrated in Figure 7 that when the distance between sample points in the channel space is consistent with the distance between the corresponding projections in the latent variable space, the relationship between the encoding information and the re-encoding information is used The difference reflects the difference between the original information and the decoded information with reliability.
  • the method in Figure 10 can be regarded as a scheme for judging the effectiveness of the performance monitoring scheme of the autoencoder described in Figure 8.
  • judging Determine whether the difference relationship between the encoded information and the re-encoded information is consistent with the difference relationship between the original information and the decoded information, and determine whether the performance monitoring scheme of the autoencoder described in Figure 8 can be applied.
  • Such a design can improve the effectiveness and accuracy of the autoencoder performance monitoring solution.
  • Figure 10 illustrates S1003a: when the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information satisfies the first preset relationship, the first device performs performance monitoring of the first autoencoder based on the encoding information and the re-encoding information.
  • the first device may determine that the solution illustrated in Figure 8 is invalid.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates S1003b: when the difference between the P pieces of third encoded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, the first device stops performance monitoring of the first autoencoder.
  • Figure 11 illustrates another communication method, which mainly includes the following processes.
  • the second device sends P pieces of third coded information to the first device.
  • the second device can use the first encoder to process the P pieces of third original information and determine the P pieces of third encoded information, that is, the P pieces of third encoded information are generated based on the P pieces of third original information.
  • the P third coded information can be P projections of the P third original information in the channel space into the latent variable space.
  • the reference original information may include at least one reference original information in the training data set of the first autoencoder.
  • the difference between 1 third original information in the P third original information and the reference original information can be recorded as 1 difference information.
  • the differences between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information can be recorded as P pieces of difference information, and the magnitude relationship between the P pieces of difference information satisfies the second preset relationship.
  • take the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario as an example.
  • One sample point corresponding to the reference original information in the channel space is recorded as V1.
  • P third original information corresponds to P sample points in the channel space.
  • the two third original information are recorded as V2 and V3 respectively.
  • the second preset relationship may include: d(V1,V2)>d(V1,V3).
  • the reference original information includes Q pieces of reference original information in the training data set of the first autoencoder, and Q is a positive integer greater than 1, 1 third original information among the P pieces of third original information can be combined with Q
  • the difference between one of the reference original information is recorded as one piece of difference information.
  • the difference between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information can be recorded as Q ⁇ P pieces of difference information, and the size relationship between the Q ⁇ P pieces of difference information satisfies the second preset relationship.
  • the two sample points corresponding to the reference original information in the channel space are denoted V1 and V2.
  • P third original information corresponds to P sample points in the channel space.
  • the two third original information are recorded as V3 and V4 respectively.
  • the second preset relationship may include: d(V1,V3)>d(V1,V4), and d(V2,V3)>d(V2,V4).
  • the second device may actively send P pieces of third coded information to the first device, or may send P pieces of third coded information triggered by a request from the first device.
  • Figure 10 also illustrates an optional step S1100 before S1101: the first device sends second information to the second device, and the second information is used to request P third original information that satisfies the second preset relationship, Or the second information is used to request P pieces of third coded information generated based on P pieces of third original information that satisfy the second preset relationship.
  • the second device sends P pieces of third coded information to the first device.
  • a second preset relationship corresponding to the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information may be predefined.
  • the second device and the first device can pre-agree on the resources occupied by sending the P pieces of third coded information corresponding to the P pieces of third original information.
  • the first device can determine the P pieces of third original information after receiving the P pieces of third coded information.
  • the second device may send third information to the first device, where the third information is used to indicate the correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information.
  • the third information includes the identifier, resource ID, etc. of the third original information corresponding to each of the P pieces of third coded information.
  • the first device determines whether the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information generated based on the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship.
  • the difference between one piece of third piece of coded information and the reference coded information among the P pieces of third coded information is recorded as one piece of difference information.
  • the differences between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information can be recorded as P pieces of difference information.
  • the magnitude relationship between the P pieces of difference information satisfies the second preset relationship.
  • the first device can specifically determine P third coded information The size relationship between the corresponding plurality of difference information satisfies the second preset relationship.
  • the reference original information refers to the reference channel information.
  • One reference channel information corresponds to one sample point in the channel space, denoted as V1.
  • P third original information corresponds to P sample points in the channel space.
  • the two third original information are recorded as V2 and V3 respectively.
  • the projection of the reference channel information in the latent variable space is denoted as z1
  • the projection of the P third original information in the latent variable space is denoted as z2 and z3 respectively.
  • the first device can determine whether z1, z2, and z3 comply with the following relationship included in the second preset relationship: d(z1,z2)>d(z1,z3 ).
  • the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the second requirement.
  • a device may not perform any operation; if the difference between the P third encoding information and the reference encoding information does not meet the second preset relationship, the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the second requirement, and then The first device may send fifth information to the second device, the fifth information being used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder.
  • the method in Figure 11 and the method in Figure 8 can be used together.
  • the principle of combining the method of Fig. 11 and the method of Fig. 8 will be explained below. It can be seen from the description in S804 that a key point in judging the performance of the autoencoder is to use the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information to reflect the difference between the original information and the decoded information, or to use the sample points in the latent variable space The distance between reflects the distance between sample points in the channel space.
  • the method in Figure 11 can be regarded as a scheme to determine the effectiveness of the performance monitoring scheme of the autoencoder described in Figure 8, by judging the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information, and the difference between the original information and the decoded information. Whether the difference relationship is consistent, determine whether the performance monitoring scheme of the autoencoder described in Figure 8 can be applied. Such a design can improve the effectiveness and accuracy of the autoencoder performance monitoring solution.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates S1103a: when the difference between the P third encoding information and the reference encoding information satisfies the second preset relationship, the first device performs the first autoencoder according to the encoding information and the re-encoding information. Performance monitoring.
  • the first device may determine that the solution illustrated in Figure 8 is invalid.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates S1103b: when the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information and the reference encoding information satisfies the second preset relationship, the first device stops performance monitoring of the first autoencoder.
  • FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 are only examples, illustrating the way in which the first device determines the effectiveness of the monitoring solution described in FIG. 8 .
  • the method of determining the validity of the performance monitoring scheme of the autoencoder in the present disclosure can be performed by the second device.
  • the second device and the first device can use the same validity determination method, which can be implemented with reference to the solution in Figure 10 or Figure 11 , which will not be described again in this disclosure.
  • the second device when determining that the solution described in Figure 8 is valid, the second device sends fourth information to the first device, and the fourth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication device 1200 , which includes a processing module 1201 and a communication module 1202 .
  • the communication device 1200 may be a second device, or may be a communication device applied to the second device or used in conjunction with the second device, capable of implementing a communication method executed by the second device; or, the communication device 1200 may be a first device.
  • the device may also be a communication device applied to the first device or used in conjunction with the first device, capable of implementing the communication method executed by the first device.
  • the communication module may also be called a transceiver module, a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver device, etc.
  • the processing module may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing unit, or a processing device.
  • the communication module is used to perform the sending operation and receiving operation on the second device side or the first device side in the above method.
  • the device used to implement the receiving function in the communication module can be regarded as a receiving unit, and the devices used in the communication module can be regarded as receiving units.
  • the device that implements the sending function is regarded as a sending unit, that is, the communication module includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the processing module 1201 can be used to implement the processing functions of the first device in the examples described in Figures 8, 10 and 11, and the communication module 1202 can be used to implement the processing functions of the first device in the examples of Figures 8, 10 and 11.
  • the processing module 1201 can be used to implement the processing functions of the second device in the examples described in Figures 8, 10 and 11, and the communication module 1202 can be used to implement the processing functions of the second device in the examples of Figures 8, 10 and 11.
  • the aforementioned communication module and/or processing module can be implemented through a virtual module.
  • the processing module can be implemented through a software functional unit or a virtual device, and the communication module can be implemented through a software function or a virtual device.
  • the processing module or the communication module can also be implemented by a physical device.
  • the communication module can be an input/output circuit and/or a communication interface to perform input operations (corresponding to the aforementioned receiving operations), Output operation (corresponding to the aforementioned sending operation); the processing module is an integrated processor or microprocessor or integrated circuit.
  • each functional module in each example of this disclosure may be integrated into one processor. It can also exist physically alone, or two or more modules can be integrated into one module.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules.
  • the present disclosure also provides a communication device 1300.
  • the communication device 1300 may be a chip or a chip system.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the communication device 1300 can be used to implement the functions of any network element in the communication system described in the foregoing examples.
  • Communication device 1300 may include at least one processor 1310.
  • the processor 1310 is coupled to a memory, and the memory may be located within the device, or the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be located outside the device.
  • the communication device 1300 may further include at least one memory 1320.
  • the memory 1320 stores the necessary computer programs, computer programs or instructions and/or data to implement any of the above examples; the processor 1310 may execute the computer program stored in the memory 1320 to complete the method in any of the above examples.
  • the communication device 1300 may also include a communication interface 1330, and the communication device 1300 may interact with other devices through the communication interface 1330.
  • the communication interface 1330 may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, a pin, or other types of communication interfaces.
  • the communication interface 1330 in the device 1300 can also be an input-output circuit, which can input information (or receive information) and output information (or send information)
  • the processor is an integrated processor, a microprocessor, an integrated circuit, or a logic circuit, and the processor can determine output information based on input information.
  • Coupling in this disclosure is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information interaction between devices, units or modules.
  • the processor 1310 may cooperate with the memory 1320 and the communication interface 1330.
  • the present disclosure does not limit the specific connection medium between the above-mentioned processor 1310, memory 1320 and communication interface 1330.
  • the bus 1340 may be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc.
  • PCI peripheral component interconnect
  • EISA extended industry standard architecture
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of presentation, only one thick line is used in Figure 13, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • a processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field-programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component that may implement or execute the present disclosure.
  • the disclosed methods, steps and logical block diagrams are disclosed.
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor, etc.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the present disclosure can be directly embodied as executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the memory may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., or it may be a volatile memory (volatile memory), such as a random access memory.
  • Get memory random-access memory, RAM.
  • Memory is, but is not limited to, any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.
  • the memory in the present disclosure can also be a circuit or any other device capable of realizing a storage function, used to store program instructions and/or data.
  • the communication device 1300 can be applied to the first device.
  • the communication device 1300 can be the first device, or can support the first device to implement the first device in any of the above-mentioned examples.
  • functional device The memory 1320 stores computer programs (or instructions) and/or data that implement the functions of the first device in any of the above examples.
  • the processor 1310 can execute the computer program stored in the memory 1320 to complete the method executed by the first device in any of the above examples.
  • the communication interface in the communication device 1300 can be used to interact with the second device, send information to the second device or receive information from the second device.
  • the communication device 1300 can be applied to the second device, and specifically the communication device 1300 can be a third device.
  • the second device may also be a device capable of supporting the second device and realizing the functions of the second device in any of the above-mentioned examples.
  • the memory 1320 stores computer programs (or instructions) and/or data that implement the functions of the second device in any of the above examples.
  • the processor 1310 can execute the computer program stored in the memory 1320 to complete the method executed by the second device in any of the above examples.
  • the communication interface in the communication device 1300 can be used to interact with the first device, send information to the first device or receive information from the first device.
  • the communication device 1300 provided in this example can be applied to a first device to complete the method performed by the first device, or applied to a second device to complete the method performed by the second device. Therefore, the technical effects that can be obtained can be referred to the above method examples and will not be described again here.
  • the present disclosure provides a communication system, including a first device and a second device, wherein the first device and the second device can implement what is provided in the examples shown in Figures 8, 10 and 11 communication method.
  • the technical solutions provided by this disclosure can be implemented in whole or in part through software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer program instructions When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in the present disclosure are produced in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a second device, a first device, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another, e.g., the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that contains one or more available media integrated.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, tape), optical media (eg, digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or semiconductor media, etc.
  • examples may refer to each other.
  • methods and/or terms between method embodiments may refer to each other.
  • functions and/or terms between device embodiments may refer to each other.
  • Cross-references, for example, functions and/or terms between apparatus examples and method examples may refer to each other.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Compression, Expansion, Code Conversion, And Decoders (AREA)
  • Compression Or Coding Systems Of Tv Signals (AREA)

Abstract

The present disclosure provides a communication method and apparatus, applied to the technical field of communications. The communication method can be executed by a first device, and comprises: receiving M pieces of first encoded information from a second device; determining M pieces of first decoded information by using a first decoder and the M pieces of first encoded information inputted into the first decoder, wherein the first decoder and a first encoder belong to a first autoencoder, and the first encoder is used to process inputted M pieces of first original information to determine the M pieces of first encoded information; determining M pieces of first re-encoded information by using a second encoder and the M pieces of first decoded information inputted into the second encoder; and determining the performance of the first autoencoder according to the difference between each of the M pieces of first encoded information and the first re-encoded information corresponding to each piece of first encoded information. According to the present disclosure, the accuracy of autoencoder performance monitoring can be improved while reducing channel state information feedback overhead.

Description

一种通信方法及装置A communication method and device
相关申请的交叉引用Cross-references to related applications
本申请要求在2022年08月31日提交中华人民共和国知识产权局、申请号为202211056078.6、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application submitted to the Intellectual Property Office of the People's Republic of China on August 31, 2022, with application number 202211056078.6 and the application title "A communication method and device", the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference. Applying.
技术领域Technical field
本公开涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The present disclosure relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
背景技术Background technique
在无线通信网络中，例如在移动通信网络中，网络支持的业务越来越多样，因此需要满足的需求越来越多样。例如，网络需要能够支持超高速率、超低时延、和/或超大连接。该特点使得网络规划、网络配置、和/或资源调度越来越复杂。此外，由于网络的功能越来越强大，例如支持的频谱越来越高、支持高阶多入多出(multiple input multiple output，MIMO)技术、支持波束赋形、和/或支持波束管理等新技术，使得网络节能成为了热门研究课题。这些新需求、新场景和新特性给网络规划、运维和高效运营带来了前所未有的挑战。为了迎接该挑战，可以将人工智能技术引入无线通信网络中，从而实现网络智能化。基于此，如何在网络中有效地实现人工智能，比如，如何监测人工智能的性能，是一个值得研究的问题。In wireless communication networks, such as mobile communication networks, the services supported by the network are becoming more and more diverse, and therefore the requirements that need to be met are becoming more and more diverse. For example, the network needs to be able to support ultra-high speeds, ultra-low latency, and/or ultra-large connections. This feature makes network planning, network configuration, and/or resource scheduling increasingly complex. In addition, as the functions of the network become more and more powerful, such as supporting higher and higher spectrum, supporting high-order multiple input multiple output (MIMO) technology, supporting beam forming, and/or supporting beam management and other new Technology has made network energy conservation a hot research topic. These new requirements, new scenarios, and new features have brought unprecedented challenges to network planning, O&M, and efficient operations. In order to meet this challenge, artificial intelligence technology can be introduced into wireless communication networks to achieve network intelligence. Based on this, how to effectively implement artificial intelligence in the network, for example, how to monitor the performance of artificial intelligence, is a question worth studying.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本公开提供一种通信方法及装置，以期在降低传输开销的同时提升对自编码器性能监控的准确性。The present disclosure provides a communication method and device, in order to improve the accuracy of autoencoder performance monitoring while reducing transmission overhead.
第一方面，本公开提供一种通信方法，该通信方法应用于第一设备，包括：接收来自第二设备的M个第一编码信息，M为正整数；利用第一解码器和输入所述第一解码器的所述M个第一编码信息，确定M个第一解码信息；其中，所述第一解码器和第一编码器属于第一自编码器，所述第一编码器用于对输入的M个第一原始信息处理，确定所述M个第一编码信息；利用第二编码器和输入所述第二编码器的所述M个第一解码信息，确定M个第一重编码信息，所述M个第一重编码信息与所述M个第一编码信息一一对应；根据所述M个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息和所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异，确定所述第一自编码器的性能。In a first aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication method, which is applied to a first device and includes: receiving M pieces of first encoded information from a second device, where M is a positive integer; using a first decoder and inputting the The M first encoded information of the first decoder determines the M first decoded information; wherein the first decoder and the first encoder belong to the first autoencoder, and the first encoder is used to Process the input M first original information to determine the M first encoded information; use the second encoder and the M first decoded information input to the second encoder to determine M first re-encodings Information, the M first re-encoding information corresponds to the M first encoding information one-to-one; according to each first encoding information in the M first encoding information and each first encoding information The difference between the corresponding first re-encoded information determines the performance of the first autoencoder.
上述设计中，在部署自编码器中解码器的一端引入一个编码器，通过比较自编码器所包括的编码器输出的编码信息和该解码器引入的编码器输出的重编码信息之间的差异，间接判断自编码器的性能。能够在保证减少信息传输开销的同时安全有效的监控自编码器的性能。In the above design, an encoder is introduced at one end of the decoder in the autoencoder, and the difference between the encoding information output by the encoder included in the autoencoder and the re-encoding information output by the encoder introduced by the decoder is compared. , indirectly judging the performance of the autoencoder. It can safely and effectively monitor the performance of the autoencoder while ensuring reduced information transmission overhead.
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器相同，或者所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的功能相同。可选的，所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的功能相同，包括如下中的至少一项：当第一编码器和第二编码器的输入相同数据时，第一编码器和第二编码器的输出相同；当第一编码器和第二编码器的输入相同数据时，第一编码器和第二编码器的输出差异小于预设阈值；第一编码器具备压缩和量化功能，第二编码器具备压缩和量化功能。利用相同或相同功能的编码器，进行编码和重编码，可以避免编码器之间的差异的干扰，降低编码信息和重编码信息之间的差异的误差。In a possible design, the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, or the functions of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same. Optionally, the functions of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, including at least one of the following: when the first encoder and the second encoder input the same data, the first encoder and the second encoder The output of the second encoder is the same; when the input data of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, the output difference of the first encoder and the second encoder is less than the preset threshold; the first encoder has compression and quantization functions , the second encoder has compression and quantization functions. Using encoders with the same or identical functions for encoding and re-encoding can avoid interference from differences between encoders and reduce errors from differences between encoded information and re-encoded information.
下面区分M的取值，对第一自编码器的性能的确定方式进行说明。The following differentiates the value of M and explains how to determine the performance of the first autoencoder.
M为1时，在一种可能的设计中，如果所述1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数大于或等于第一阈值，则第一设备可以确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，或如果所述1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数小于或等于第二阈值，则第一设备可以确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值。When M is 1, in a possible design, if the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first device may determine The performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to a first value, or if the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is less than or equal to a second threshold, the first device It may be determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value.
M大于1时，在一种可能的设计中，如果K个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息与所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数大于或等于第一阈值，所述K个第一编码信息占所述M个第一编码信息的比例大于或等于第一比例阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，或如果K个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息与所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数小于或等于第二阈值，所述K个第一编码信息占所述M个第一编码信息的比例大于或等于第一比例阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值；其中，所述K个第一编码信息包含于所 述M个第一编码信息，K为小于或等于M的正整数。When M is greater than 1, in a possible design, if the difference parameter between each of the K first encoded information and the first re-encoded information corresponding to each first encoded information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the proportion of the K pieces of first encoded information to the M pieces of first encoded information is greater than or equal to the first proportion threshold, then it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, or If the difference parameter between each of the K first encoded information and the first re-encoded information corresponding to each first encoded information is less than or equal to the second threshold, the K first encoded information If the proportion of the information in the M pieces of first encoded information is greater than or equal to the first proportion threshold, then it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value; wherein the K pieces of first encoded information are included in the As for the M pieces of first coded information, K is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
M大于1时，在另一种可能的设计中，第一设备计算M个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息与所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数，得到M个差异参数；如果M个差异参数的平均值大于或等于第一阈值，则第一设备可以确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，或如果M个差异参数的平均值小于或等于第二阈值，则第一设备可以确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值。When M is greater than 1, in another possible design, the first device calculates the difference between each of the M first encoded information and the first re-encoded information corresponding to each of the first encoded information. difference parameters to obtain M difference parameters; if the average of the M difference parameters is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first device can determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, or if the M differences If the average value of the parameters is less than or equal to the second threshold, the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value.
上述设计中的第一阈值和第二阈值可以相等，或者不相等。利用阈值划分自编码的性能等级，便于后续针对不同性能等级的自编码器进行对应的个性化处理，较为灵活。The first threshold and the second threshold in the above design may be equal or unequal. Using thresholds to divide the performance levels of autoencoders facilitates subsequent personalized processing of autoencoders with different performance levels, which is more flexible.
在一种可能的设计中，第一阈值、第二阈值可以是预先配置的。在另一种可能的设计中，第二设备向第一设备指示第一阈值/或第二阈值。例如，第二设备向第一设备指示第一阈值或第二阈值时，第一设备可以确定第一阈值和第二阈值相等。又如，第二设备向第一设备指示第一阈值和第二阈值时，第一设备根据第二设备的指示，可以确定第一阈值和第二阈值是否相等。In a possible design, the first threshold and the second threshold may be pre-configured. In another possible design, the second device indicates the first threshold and/or the second threshold to the first device. For example, when the second device indicates the first threshold or the second threshold to the first device, the first device may determine that the first threshold and the second threshold are equal. For another example, when the second device indicates the first threshold and the second threshold to the first device, the first device may determine whether the first threshold and the second threshold are equal according to the instruction of the second device.
下面对上述设计中的差异参数进行说明。The difference parameters in the above design are explained below.
在一种可能的设计中，所述M个第一编码信息中第i个第一编码信息对应的差异参数包括所述第i个第一编码信息与所述M个第一重编码信息中第i个第一重编码信息之间的差异。此设计中，第一阈值、第二阈值、以及编码信息与重编码信息之间的差异属于同一量级的信息，同一量级的信息之间可以作比较。In a possible design, the difference parameter corresponding to the i-th first coded information among the M first coded information includes the i-th first coded information and the i-th first coded information among the M first re-coded information. The difference between i first re-encoded information. In this design, the first threshold, the second threshold, and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information belong to the same magnitude of information, and information of the same magnitude can be compared.
这样的设计，利用阈值对编码信息与重编码信息之间的差异进行衡量，以推测原始信息与解码信息之间的差异，辅助自编码器性能的确定，能够提升对自编码器性能监控的准确性。Such a design uses thresholds to measure the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information to infer the difference between the original information and the decoded information, assists in determining the performance of the autoencoder, and can improve the accuracy of monitoring the performance of the autoencoder. sex.
在另一种可能的设计中，所述M个第一编码信息中第i个第一编码信息对应的差异参数是由比例因子以及所述第i个第一编码信息与所述M个第一重编码信息中第i个第一重编码信息之间的差异确定的；其中，i为1至M中的任意一个正整数。此设计中，由编码信息与重编码信息之间的差异以及比例因子确定的差异参数、第一阈值、以及第二阈值属于同一量级的信息，同一量级的信息之间可以作比较。可以理解的是，第一阈值、第二阈值、以及原始信息与解码信息之间的差异属于第一量级的信息，比例因子用于将编码信息和重编码信息之间的差异缩放为第一量级的信息。In another possible design, the difference parameter corresponding to the i-th first coded information among the M first coded information is determined by a scaling factor and the difference between the i-th first coded information and the M first coded information. The difference between the i-th first re-encoded information in the re-encoded information is determined; where i is any positive integer from 1 to M. In this design, the difference parameter, the first threshold, and the second threshold determined by the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information and the scaling factor belong to information of the same magnitude, and information of the same magnitude can be compared. It can be understood that the first threshold, the second threshold, and the difference between the original information and the decoded information belong to the information of the first magnitude, and the scaling factor is used to scale the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information to the first magnitude of information.
这样的设计，利用比例因子和编码信息与重编码信息之间的差异模拟原始信息与解码信息之间的差异，并利用阈值对原始信息与解码信息之间的差异进行衡量，辅助自编码器性能的确定，能够提升对自编码器性能监控的准确性。Such a design uses the scale factor and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information to simulate the difference between the original information and the decoded information, and uses the threshold to measure the difference between the original information and the decoded information to assist the performance of the autoencoder The determination can improve the accuracy of autoencoder performance monitoring.
下面对比例因子的确定方式进行说明。The method of determining the scale factor is explained below.
一种可能的设计中，所述比例因子是预配置的；或者，所述比例因子是第二设备确定的，第一设备可以从所述第二设备中获取该比例因子。In a possible design, the scale factor is preconfigured; or, the scale factor is determined by the second device, and the first device can obtain the scale factor from the second device.
另一种可能的设计中，第一设备可以自行确定所述比例因子。In another possible design, the first device can determine the scaling factor by itself.
例如，第一设备可以接收来自所述第二设备的N个第二原始信息，所述N为大于1的整数；进而，第一设备根据所述N个第二原始信息中两两第二原始信息之间的差异和所述两两第二原始信息对应的两两第二编码信息之间的差异的比例，确定所述比例因子。其中，所述N个第二原始信息中的全部或部分属于所述M个第一原始信息，或者，所述N个第二原始信息不包括所述M个第一原始信息中的任意一个。For example, the first device may receive N pieces of second original information from the second device, where N is an integer greater than 1; furthermore, the first device may receive two second pieces of original information from the N pieces of second original information. The scaling factor is determined by the ratio of the difference between the information and the difference between the pair of second encoded information corresponding to the pair of second original information. Wherein, all or part of the N pieces of second original information belong to the M pieces of first original information, or the N pieces of second original information do not include any of the M pieces of first original information.
例如，第一设备接收来自所述第二设备的N个第二原始信息，所述N为正整数；进而，第一设备根据所述N个第二原始信息中每个第二原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异和所述每个原始信息对应的第二编码信息与所述参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异的比例，确定所述比例因子。For example, the first device receives N pieces of second original information from the second device, where N is a positive integer; furthermore, the first device compares the data with the reference according to each of the N pieces of second original information. The scaling factor is determined by the ratio of the difference between the original information and the difference between the second encoded information corresponding to each original information and the reference encoded information corresponding to the reference original information.
例如，第一设备接收来自所述第二设备的N个第二原始信息，所述N为正整数；进而，第一设备根据所述N个第二原始信息中每个第二原始信息与N个第二解码信息中每个第二解码信息之间的差异和所述每个第二原始信息对应的第二编码信息与所述每个第二编码信息对应的第二重编码信息之间的差异的比例，确定所述比例因子；其中，所述N个第二解码信息与所述N个第二原始信息一一对应。For example, the first device receives N pieces of second original information from the second device, where N is a positive integer; furthermore, the first device compares N pieces of second original information with each other according to each of the N pieces of second original information. The difference between each of the second decoded information and the second encoded information corresponding to each second original information and the second re-encoded information corresponding to each second encoded information The proportion of the difference determines the scaling factor; wherein the N pieces of second decoded information correspond to the N pieces of second original information one-to-one.
下面对第一设备启动第一自编码器的性能确定的情况进行说明。The following describes the situation in which the first device starts the performance determination of the first autoencoder.
在一种可能的设计中，可以由第二设备触发第一设备进行第一自编码器的性能确定。例如，第一设备在确定所述M个第一重编码信息之前，接收来自所述第二设备的第四信息，所述第四信息用于触发所述第一自编码器的性能确定。In a possible design, the second device may trigger the first device to determine the performance of the first autoencoder. For example, before determining the M first re-encoding information, the first device receives fourth information from the second device, and the fourth information is used to trigger performance determination of the first autoencoder.
在另一种可能的设计中，第一设备首先确定上述设计中第一自编码器的性能确定方式可行、有效， 或者描述为：在当前场景中可以使用上述设计中第一自编码器的性能确定方式；进而，第一设备启动第一自编码器的性能确定。In another possible design, the first device first determines that the performance determination method of the first autoencoder in the above design is feasible and effective, Or it can be described as: in the current scenario, the performance determination method of the first autoencoder in the above design can be used; further, the first device starts the performance determination of the first autoencoder.
下面第一自编码器的性能确定方式的可行性或称有效性的判定方式进行说明。The feasibility or validity determination method of the first autoencoder's performance determination method will be described below.
在一种可能的设计中，第一设备获取来自所述第二设备的P个第三编码信息；其中，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于3的正整数；所述P个第三原始信息中的全部或部分属于所述M个第一原始信息，或者，所述P个第三原始信息不包括所述M个第一原始信息中的任意一个。In a possible design, the first device obtains P pieces of third encoded information from the second device; wherein, the difference between the P pieces of third original information used to generate the P pieces of third encoded information Satisfying the first preset relationship, P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3; all or part of the P third original information belongs to the M first original information, or the P third original information Any one of the M pieces of first original information is not included.
当第一设备确定所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足所述第一预设关系时，第一设备可以通过上述设计确定第一自编码器的性能。When the first device determines that the difference between the P pieces of third encoded information satisfies the first preset relationship, the first device can determine the performance of the first autoencoder through the above design.
可选的，第一设备可以向所述第二设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于请求所述P个第三编码信息。第二设备响应于该第一信息，向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息。Optionally, the first device may send first information to the second device, where the first information is used to request the P pieces of third coded information. In response to the first information, the second device sends P pieces of third encoded information to the first device.
在另一种可能的设计中，第一设备获取来自所述第二设备的P个第三编码信息；其中，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数；所述P个第三原始信息中的全部或部分属于所述M个第一原始信息，或者，所述P个第三原始信息不包括所述M个第一原始信息中的任意一个。In another possible design, the first device obtains P pieces of third coded information from the second device; wherein the P pieces of third original information used to generate the P pieces of third coded information are the same as the reference original information. The difference between the information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2; all or part of the P third original information belongs to the M first original information, or the P The third original information does not include any of the M first original information.
当第一设备确定所述P个第三编码信息和与所述参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足所述第二预设关系时，第一设备可以通过上述设计确定第一自编码器的性能。When the first device determines that the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, the first device may determine the first self-coding information through the above design. Encoder performance.
可选的，第一设备可以向所述第二设备发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于请求所述P个第三编码信息。第二设备响应于该第一信息，向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息。Optionally, the first device may send second information to the second device, where the second information is used to request the P pieces of third coded information. In response to the first information, the second device sends P pieces of third encoded information to the first device.
上述设计中，通过判断编码信息的变化趋势与原始信息的变化趋势是否保持一致，且在保持一致的情况下，利用编码信息和重编码信息之间的差异进行自编码器性能的确定，能够确保对自编码器性能监控的准确性。In the above design, by judging whether the change trend of the encoded information is consistent with the change trend of the original information, and if they are consistent, the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information is used to determine the performance of the autoencoder, which can ensure Accuracy of autoencoder performance monitoring.
在一种可能的设计中，第一设备还可以接收来自所述第二设备的第三信息，所述第三信息指示所述P个第三原始信息与所述P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。这样的设计，可以辅助第一设备快速地判断编码信息的变化趋势与原始信息的变化趋势是否保持一致。In a possible design, the first device may also receive third information from the second device, where the third information indicates the difference between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information. corresponding relationship. Such a design can assist the first device to quickly determine whether the changing trend of the encoded information is consistent with the changing trend of the original information.
在一种可能的设计中，上述第一编码信息为量化后的信息，或者，第一设备接收来自第二设备的M个第一编码信息，是M个第一编码信息对应的M个第一量化信息。第一设备可以对收到的所述M个第一量化信息进行解量化处理，得到所述M个第一编码信息。In a possible design, the above-mentioned first coded information is quantized information, or the first device receives M pieces of first coded information from the second device, which are M pieces of first coded information corresponding to the M pieces of first coded information. Quantitative information. The first device may dequantize the received M pieces of first quantized information to obtain the M pieces of first coded information.
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值或第二值，所述第一值用于指示所述第一自编码器的性能不满足第一要求，所述第二值用于指示所述第一自编码器的性能满足第一要求。第一设备在确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应所述第一值时，向所述第二设备发送第五信息，所述第五信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器。这样的设计可以避免在第一编码器性能不满足要求的情况下，第二设备继续使用第一编码器所导致的信息编解码错误。In a possible design, the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to a first value or a second value, and the first value is used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the first requirement, so The second value is used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the first requirement. When the first device determines that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, the first device sends fifth information to the second device, where the fifth information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the First encoder. Such a design can avoid information encoding and decoding errors caused by the second device continuing to use the first encoder when the performance of the first encoder does not meet the requirements.
在一种可能的设计中，第一自编码器应用于CSI反馈场景。所述第一编码信息包括第一信道状态指示信息，如基于原始CSI的量化CSI；所述第一解码信息包括第一恢复信道信息，如恢复的CSI；所述第一原始信息包括第一原始信道信息，如原始的CSI；所述第一重编码信息包括与所述第一恢复信道信息对应的第二信道状态指示信息，如基于恢复的CSI的量化CSI。In one possible design, the first autoencoder is applied to the CSI feedback scenario. The first coding information includes first channel status indication information, such as quantized CSI based on original CSI; the first decoding information includes first restored channel information, such as restored CSI; the first original information includes first original Channel information, such as original CSI; the first re-encoding information includes second channel status indication information corresponding to the first restored channel information, such as quantized CSI based on the restored CSI.
第二方面，本公开提供一种通信方法，该通信方法应用于第二设备，包括：利用第一编码器用于对输入的M个第一原始信息处理，确定所述M个第一编码信息，M为正整数；向第一设备发送所述M个第一编码信息，所述M个第一编码信息用于第一自编码器的性能确定，所述第一自编码器包括所述第一编码器。In a second aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication method, which is applied to a second device and includes: using a first encoder to process M pieces of input first original information and determine the M pieces of first encoded information, M is a positive integer; send the M first encoding information to the first device, the M first encoding information is used for performance determination of the first autoencoder, the first autoencoder includes the first Encoder.
在一种可能的设计中，第二设备可以向第一设备发送第四信息，所述第四信息用于触发所述第一自编码器的性能确定。In a possible design, the second device may send fourth information to the first device, where the fourth information is used to trigger performance determination of the first autoencoder.
在一种可能的设计中，第二设备可以向第一设备发送第一参数信息，所述第一参数信息用于自编码的性能确定；其中，第一参数信息包括如下中的一项或多项：用于衡量编码信息和重编码信息之间差异的一个或多个参考阈值；用于表征至少两个原始信息的差异与所述至少两个原始信息分别对应的编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子；用于表征原始信息和解码信息的差异与编码信息与重编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子，所述编码信息或所述重编码信息的数量；自编码器的性能对应的取值范围，所 述重编码信息为第一设备将所述编码信息输入解码器获得的输出再输入编码器进行重编码获得的。In a possible design, the second device may send first parameter information to the first device, where the first parameter information is used for self-encoding performance determination; wherein the first parameter information includes one or more of the following: Item: one or more reference thresholds used to measure the difference between encoded information and re-encoded information; used to characterize the difference between at least two original information and the difference between the encoded information corresponding to the at least two original information. a scaling factor of a ratio; a scaling factor used to characterize the ratio between the difference between the original information and the decoded information and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information, the amount of the encoded information or the re-encoded information; the performance of the autoencoder The corresponding value range, so The re-encoding information is obtained by the first device inputting the encoding information into the decoder and then inputting the output into the encoder for re-encoding.
在一种可能的设计中，第二设备可以向第一设备发送第二设备发送P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息用于第一自编码器的性能确定方式的有效性判定；其中，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于3的正整数；或者，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数。In a possible design, the second device may send P third encoding information to the first device. The P third encoding information is used to determine the effectiveness of the performance of the first autoencoder. Determine; wherein the difference between the P third original information used to generate the P third encoded information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3; or, used to generate the The difference between the P third original information of the P third encoded information and the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
在一种可能的设计中，第二设备还可以向第一设备发送第三信息，所述第三信息指示所述P个第三原始信息与所述P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。In a possible design, the second device may also send third information to the first device, where the third information indicates the correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information. .
第三方面，本公开提供一种通信方法，应用于第一设备，包括：接收来自第二设备的P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息；其中，所述P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数；确定所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足所述第一预设关系，或者，所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足所述第一预设关系。In a third aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication method, applied to a first device, including: receiving P pieces of third coded information from a second device, where the P pieces of third coded information correspond to P pieces of third original information; Wherein, the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2; it is determined that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship. Assume a relationship, or the difference between the P pieces of third coded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship.
上述设计中，可以确定编码信息的变化趋势与原始信息的变化趋势是否保持一致，从而可以间接判断自编码器的性能，能够在保证减少信息传输开销的同时安全有效的监控自编码器的性能。In the above design, it can be determined whether the changing trend of the encoded information is consistent with the changing trend of the original information, so that the performance of the autoencoder can be indirectly judged, and the performance of the autoencoder can be safely and effectively monitored while reducing information transmission overhead.
在一种可能的设计中，当所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系时，所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送第六信息，所述第六信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或，当所述第一结果指示所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足第一预设关系时，所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送第七信息，所述第七信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。In a possible design, when the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship, the first device sends sixth information to the second device, and the sixth information for triggering the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or, when the first result indicates that the difference between the P third encoded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, the first device reports to the The second device sends seventh information, the seventh information being used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
上述设计中，通过判断编码信息的变化趋势与原始信息的变化趋势是否保持一致，间接判断自编码器的性能，进而可以确定是否进一步确定自编码器的性能，或，使用当前自编码器。In the above design, by judging whether the change trend of the encoded information is consistent with the change trend of the original information, the performance of the autoencoder is indirectly judged, and then it can be determined whether to further determine the performance of the autoencoder, or to use the current autoencoder.
在一种可能的设计中，所述P个第三编码信息为第二设备的第一编码器针对输入所述第一编码器的所述P个第三原始信息的输出，所述第一设备包括与所述第一编码器对应的第一解码器。第一自编码器包括所述第一编码器和所述第一解码器。In a possible design, the P third encoded information is the output of the first encoder of the second device for the P third original information input to the first encoder, and the first device A first decoder corresponding to the first encoder is included. A first autoencoder includes the first encoder and the first decoder.
在一种可能的设计中，第一设备向第二设备发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于请求所述P个第三编码信息。In a possible design, the first device sends second information to the second device, where the second information is used to request the P third encoded information.
在一种可能的设计中，第一设备接收来自所述第二设备的第三信息，所述第三信息指示所述P个第三原始信息与所述P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。举例而言，第三信息可以是携带在第三编码信息中的与该第三编码信息对应的第三原始信息的索引，或，在第三编码信息外但通过预设的传输方式来传输与该第三编码信息对应的第三原始信息的索引。比如，1个第三原始信息的索引+1个第三编码信息的方式。可以理解的是，在一种可能的方式中，也可以通过时分的方式确定所述P个第三编码信息与所述P个第三原始信息的对应，这种情况下，该第三信息则无需指示给第一设备。In a possible design, the first device receives third information from the second device, the third information indicating the correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information. relation. For example, the third information may be the index of the third original information corresponding to the third encoded information carried in the third encoded information, or may be transmitted outside the third encoded information but through a preset transmission method. The index of the third original information corresponding to the third encoded information. For example, 1 index of the third original information + 1 method of the third encoding information. It can be understood that, in a possible manner, the correspondence between the P pieces of third coded information and the P pieces of third original information can also be determined in a time division manner. In this case, the third information is then No instructions are required to the first device.
在一种可能的设计中，所述P个第三原始信息中的全部或部分属于第一方面中描述的所述M个第一原始信息，或者，所述P个第三原始信息不包括所述M个第一原始信息中的任意一个。In a possible design, all or part of the P third original information belongs to the M first original information described in the first aspect, or the P third original information does not include all Any one of the M first original information.
在一种可能的设计中，当所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系时，所述第一设备按照第一方面以及第一方面可能的设计，确定第一自编码器的性能。In a possible design, when the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship, the first device determines the first self-determination according to the first aspect and the possible design of the first aspect. Encoder performance.
第四方面，本公开提供一种通信方法，应用于第二设备，包括：确定P个第三原始信息，所述P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数；以及，向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息，所述P个第三编码信息用于自编码器性能的确定。In a fourth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication method, applied to a second device, including: determining P pieces of third original information, the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies a first preset relationship, and P is greater than Or a positive integer equal to 2; and, sending P third coded information to the first device, the P third coded information corresponding to P third original information, the P third coded information being used for self-encoding Determination of device performance.
在一种可能的设计中，所述第二设备接收来自第一设备的第六信息，所述第六信息用于指示所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，所述第六信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或者，所述第二设备接收来自第一设备的第七信息，所述第七信息用于指示所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足第一预设关系，所述第七信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。In a possible design, the second device receives sixth information from the first device, and the sixth information is used to indicate that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies a first preset relationship, The sixth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or the second device receives seventh information from the first device, the seventh information is used to indicate the P third encoding information The difference does not satisfy the first preset relationship, and the seventh information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
此外，一些可能的设计可参照第三方面理解，本公开对此不进行赘述。 In addition, some possible designs can be understood with reference to the third aspect, which will not be described in detail in this disclosure.
第五方面，本公开提供一种通信方法，应用于第一设备，包括：接收来自第二设备的P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息，其中，所述P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为正整数；所述第一设备确定P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，或者，P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系。In a fifth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication method, applied to a first device, including: receiving P pieces of third coded information from a second device, where the P pieces of third coded information correspond to P pieces of third original information, Wherein, the difference between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer; the first device determines the reference codes corresponding to the P pieces of third coded information and the reference original information. The difference between the information satisfies the second preset relationship, or the difference between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship.
上述设计中，可以确定编码信息的变化趋势与原始信息的变化趋势是否保持一致，从而可以间接判断自编码器的性能，能够在保证减少信息传输开销的同时安全有效的监控自编码器的性能。In the above design, it can be determined whether the changing trend of the encoded information is consistent with the changing trend of the original information, so that the performance of the autoencoder can be indirectly judged, and the performance of the autoencoder can be safely and effectively monitored while reducing information transmission overhead.
在一种可能的设计中，当P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系时，所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送第八信息，所述第八信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或，当P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系时，所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送第九信息，所述第九信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定；In a possible design, when the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, the first device sends the eighth device to the second device. Information, the eighth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or, when the difference between the P third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship, The first device sends ninth information to the second device, the ninth information being used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder;
上述设计中，通过判断编码信息的变化趋势与原始信息的变化趋势是否保持一致，间接判断自编码器的性能，进而可以确定是否进一步确定自编码器的性能，或，使用当前自编码器。In the above design, by judging whether the change trend of the encoded information is consistent with the change trend of the original information, the performance of the autoencoder is indirectly judged, and then it can be determined whether to further determine the performance of the autoencoder, or to use the current autoencoder.
在一种可能的设计中，当P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系时，所述第一设备按照第一方面以及第一方面可能的设计，确定第一自编码器的性能。In a possible design, when the difference between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, the first device may be configured according to the first aspect and the first aspect. The design determines the performance of the first autoencoder.
此外，一些可能的设计可参照第三方面理解，本公开对此不进行赘述。In addition, some possible designs can be understood with reference to the third aspect, which will not be described in detail in this disclosure.
第六方面，本公开提供一种通信方法，应用于第二设备，包括：确定所述P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为正整数；以及，向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息，所述P个第三编码信息用于自编码器性能的确定。In a sixth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication method, applied to a second device, including: determining that the difference between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer; and , sending P pieces of third encoding information to the first device, where the P pieces of third encoding information correspond to P pieces of third original information, and the P pieces of third encoding information are used to determine the performance of the autoencoder.
在一种可能的设计中，所述第二设备接收来自第一设备的第八信息，所述第八信息用于指示P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，所述第八信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或者，所述第二设备接收来自第一设备的第九信息，所述第九信息用于指示P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系，所述第九信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。In a possible design, the second device receives eighth information from the first device, the eighth information is used to indicate the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information. The second preset relationship is satisfied, the eighth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or the second device receives the ninth information from the first device, the ninth information is used to indicate P The difference between the third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship, and the ninth information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or stop encoding. The performance of the first autoencoder is determined.
此外，一些可能的设计可参照第三方面理解，本公开对此不进行赘述。In addition, some possible designs can be understood with reference to the third aspect, which will not be described in detail in this disclosure.
第七方面，本公开提供一种通信方法，应用于第一设备，包括：接收来自第二设备的第一参数信息，所述第一参数信息用于确定自编码器的性能；第一设备根据所述第一参数信息，确定自编码器的性能。In a seventh aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication method, applied to a first device, including: receiving first parameter information from a second device, the first parameter information being used to determine the performance of an autoencoder; the first device according to The first parameter information determines the performance of the autoencoder.
在一种可能的设计中，第一参数信息包括如下中的一项或多项：用于衡量编码信息和重编码信息之间差异的一个或多个参考阈值；用于表征至少两个原始信息的差异与所述至少两个原始信息分别对应的编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子；用于表征原始信息和解码信息的差异与编码信息与重编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子，所述编码信息或所述重编码信息的数量；自编码器的性能对应的取值范围，所述重编码信息为第一设备将所述编码信息输入解码器获得的输出再输入编码器进行重编码获得的。In a possible design, the first parameter information includes one or more of the following: one or more reference thresholds used to measure the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information; used to characterize at least two original information a proportional factor between the difference and the difference between the encoded information respectively corresponding to the at least two original information; a proportion used to characterize the proportion between the difference between the original information and the decoded information and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information Factor, the number of the encoding information or the re-encoding information; the value range corresponding to the performance of the auto-encoder, the re-encoding information is the output obtained by the first device inputting the encoding information into the decoder and then input into the encoder Obtained by recoding.
第八方面，本公开提供一种通信方法，应用于第二设备，包括：确定第一参数信息；以及向第一设备发送所述第一参数信息，所述第一参数信息用于自编码器的性能确定。In an eighth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication method, applied to a second device, including: determining first parameter information; and sending the first parameter information to the first device, where the first parameter information is used for an autoencoder The performance is determined.
在一种可能的设计中，第一参数信息包括如下中的一项或多项：用于衡量编码信息和重编码信息之间差异的一个或多个参考阈值；用于表征至少两个原始信息的差异与所述至少两个原始信息分别对应的编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子；用于表征原始信息和解码信息的差异与编码信息与重编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子，所述编码信息或所述重编码信息的数量；自编码器的性能对应的取值范围，所述重编码信息为第一设备将所述编码信息输入解码器获得的输出再输入编码器进行重编码获得的。In a possible design, the first parameter information includes one or more of the following: one or more reference thresholds used to measure the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information; used to characterize at least two original information a proportional factor between the difference and the difference between the encoded information respectively corresponding to the at least two original information; a proportion used to characterize the proportion between the difference between the original information and the decoded information and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information Factor, the number of the encoding information or the re-encoding information; the value range corresponding to the performance of the auto-encoder, the re-encoding information is the output obtained by the first device inputting the encoding information into the decoder and then input into the encoder Obtained by recoding.
第九方面，本公开提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是第一设备，也可以是第一设备中的装置、模块或芯片等，或者是能够和第一设备匹配使用的装置。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括执行第一方面中所描述的方法/操作/步骤/动作所一一对应的模块，该模块可以是硬件电路，也可是软件，也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括处理模块和通信模块。In a ninth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication device. The communication device may be a first device, a device, a module or a chip in the first device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with the first device. In one design, the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the first aspect. The module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software. accomplish. In one design, the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
一种示例：One example:
通信模块，用于接收来自第二设备的M个第一编码信息，M为正整数； A communication module, used to receive M pieces of first coded information from the second device, where M is a positive integer;
处理模块，用于：Processing module for:
利用第一解码器和输入所述第一解码器的所述M个第一编码信息，确定M个第一解码信息；其中，所述第一解码器和第一编码器属于第一自编码器，所述第一编码器用于对输入的M个第一原始信息处理，确定所述M个第一编码信息；Using the first decoder and the M pieces of first encoding information input to the first decoder, M pieces of first decoding information are determined; wherein the first decoder and the first encoder belong to the first autoencoder , the first encoder is used to process the input M pieces of first original information and determine the M pieces of first coded information;
利用第二编码器和输入所述第二编码器的所述M个第一解码信息，确定M个第一重编码信息，所述M个第一重编码信息与所述M个第一编码信息一一对应；以及，Utilize the second encoder and the M first decoded information input to the second encoder to determine M first re-encoded information, the M first re-encoded information and the M first encoded information one-to-one correspondence; and,
根据所述M个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息和所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异，确定所述第一自编码器的性能。The performance of the first autoencoder is determined according to the difference between each first encoding information in the M first encoding information and the first re-encoding information corresponding to each first encoding information.
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器相同，或者所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的功能相同。具体的介绍可参照第一方面中的描述理解，本公开对此不再赘述。In a possible design, the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, or the functions of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same. The specific introduction can be understood with reference to the description in the first aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure.
下面区分M的取值，对处理模块用于确定第一自编码器的性能的实施方式进行说明。The following differentiates between the values of M and explains the implementation of the processing module for determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
M为1时，在一种可能的设计中，处理模块，具体用于：如果所述1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数大于或等于第一阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值；或如果所述1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数小于或等于第二阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值。When M is 1, in a possible design, the processing module is specifically configured to: if the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is greater than or equal to the first threshold , then it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value; or if the difference parameter between the one first encoding information and the one first re-encoding information is less than or equal to the second threshold, then It is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to a second value.
M大于1时，在一种可能的设计中，处理模块，具体用于：如果K个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息与所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数大于或等于第一阈值，所述K个第一编码信息占所述M个第一编码信息的比例大于或等于第一比例阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值；或如果K个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息与所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数小于或等于第二阈值，所述K个第一编码信息占所述M个第一编码信息的比例大于或等于第一比例阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值；其中，所述K个第一编码信息包含于所述M个第一编码信息，K为小于或等于M的正整数。When M is greater than 1, in a possible design, the processing module is specifically configured to: if each first coding information among the K first coding information corresponds to the first recoding corresponding to each first coding information, If the difference parameter between the information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the proportion of the K first encoded information to the M first encoded information is greater than or equal to the first proportion threshold, then the first autoencoder is determined. The performance corresponds to the first value; or if the difference parameter between each first coding information in the K first coding information and the first re-coding information corresponding to each first coding information is less than or equal to the second threshold, If the proportion of the K pieces of first coded information to the M pieces of first coded information is greater than or equal to the first proportion threshold, then it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value; wherein, the Kth A coded information is included in the M pieces of first coded information, and K is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
M大于1时，在另一种可能的设计中，处理模块，具体用于：计算M个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息与所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数，得到M个差异参数；如果M个差异参数的平均值大于或等于第一阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，或如果M个差异参数的平均值小于或等于第二阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值。When M is greater than 1, in another possible design, the processing module is specifically configured to: calculate each first coded information in the M first coded information and the first weight corresponding to each first coded information. The difference parameters between the encoding information are obtained to obtain M difference parameters; if the average of the M difference parameters is greater than or equal to the first threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, or if the M differences If the average value of the parameters is less than or equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value.
有关第一阈值和第二阈值的定义介绍可参照第一方面中的描述理解，本公开对此不再进行赘述。Introduction to the definitions of the first threshold and the second threshold can be understood with reference to the description in the first aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure.
有关对上述设计中的差异参数以及对应的比例因子的定义介绍可参照第一方面中的描述理解，本公开对此不再进行赘述。其中涉及到的收发操作可由通信模块执行，其余的操作由处理模块执行。The introduction to the definition of the difference parameters and the corresponding scaling factors in the above design can be understood with reference to the description in the first aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure. The involved sending and receiving operations can be performed by the communication module, and the remaining operations are performed by the processing module.
有关处理模块启动第一自编码器的性能确定的情况可参照第一方面中的描述理解，本公开对此不再进行赘述。其中涉及到的收发操作可由通信模块执行，其余的操作由处理模块执行。The situation in which the processing module starts the performance determination of the first autoencoder can be understood with reference to the description in the first aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure. The sending and receiving operations involved can be performed by the communication module, and the remaining operations are performed by the processing module.
有关第一编码信息、第一自编码器的性能、以及第一自编码应用于CSI反馈场景等的相关定义，可参照第一方面中的描述理解，本公开对此均不再进行赘述。Relevant definitions of the first encoding information, the performance of the first autoencoder, and the application of the first autoencoder to CSI feedback scenarios can be understood with reference to the description in the first aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure.
第十方面，本公开提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是第二设备，也可以是第二设备中的装置、模块或芯片等，或者是能够和第二设备匹配使用的装置。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括执行第二方面中所描述的方法/操作/步骤/动作所一一对应的模块，该模块可以是硬件电路，也可是软件，也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括处理模块和通信模块。In a tenth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication device. The communication device may be a second device, a device, a module or a chip in the second device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with the second device. In one design, the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the second aspect. The module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software. accomplish. In one design, the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
一种示例：One example:
处理模块，用于利用第一编码器用于对输入的M个第一原始信息处理，确定所述M个第一编码信息，M为正整数；A processing module configured to use the first encoder to process the input M pieces of first original information and determine the M pieces of first encoded information, where M is a positive integer;
通信模块，用于向第一设备发送所述M个第一编码信息，所述M个第一编码信息用于第一自编码器的性能确定，所述第一自编码器包括所述第一编码器。A communication module, configured to send the M first encoding information to the first device, the M first encoding information being used for performance determination of a first autoencoder, the first autoencoder including the first Encoder.
在一种可能的设计中，通信模块，还用于向第一设备发送第四信息，所述第四信息用于触发所述第一自编码器的性能确定。In a possible design, the communication module is also configured to send fourth information to the first device, where the fourth information is used to trigger performance determination of the first autoencoder.
在一种可能的设计中，通信模块，还用于向第一设备发送第一参数信息，所述第一参数信息用于自编码的性能确定；其中，第一参数信息的定义可参照第二方面的描述理解，本公开对此不再进行赘述。In a possible design, the communication module is also configured to send first parameter information to the first device, where the first parameter information is used to determine the performance of the self-encoding; wherein the definition of the first parameter information may refer to the second It is understood that this aspect will not be described again in this disclosure.
在一种可能的设计中，通信模块，还用于向第一设备发送第二设备发送P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息用于第一自编码器的性能确定方式的有效性判定；其中，用于生成所述P个第三编码 信息的P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于3的正整数；或者，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数。In a possible design, the communication module is also configured to send P third encoding information to the first device and the second device to send P third encoding information, and the P third encoding information is used for the performance determination method of the first autoencoder. Validity determination; wherein, used to generate the P third codes The difference between the P third original information of the information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3; or, the P third original information used to generate the P third encoded information and The difference between the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
在一种可能的设计中，通信模块，还用于向第一设备发送第三信息，所述第三信息指示所述P个第三原始信息与所述P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。In a possible design, the communication module is also configured to send third information to the first device, where the third information indicates the correspondence between the P third original information and the P third encoded information. relation.
第十一方面，本公开提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是第一设备，也可以是第一设备中的装置、模块或芯片等，或者是能够和第一设备匹配使用的装置。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括执行第三方面中所描述的方法/操作/步骤/动作所一一对应的模块，该模块可以是硬件电路，也可是软件，也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括处理模块和通信模块。In an eleventh aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication device. The communication device may be a first device, a device, a module or a chip in the first device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with the first device. In one design, the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the third aspect. The module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software. accomplish. In one design, the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
一种示例：One example:
通信模块，用于接收来自第二设备的P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息；其中，所述P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数；A communication module, configured to receive P pieces of third encoded information from the second device, the P pieces of third encoded information corresponding to P pieces of third original information; wherein the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies The first preset relationship, P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2;
处理模块，用于确定所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足所述第一预设关系，或者，所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足所述第一预设关系。A processing module configured to determine that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship, or that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship. .
其中，当所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系时，通信模块，还用于向所述第二设备发送第六信息，所述第六信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或，当所述第一结果指示所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足第一预设关系时，通信模块，还用于向所述第二设备发送第七信息，所述第七信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。Wherein, when the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship, the communication module is also used to send sixth information to the second device, and the sixth information is used to trigger the first Determine the performance of the self-encoder; or, when the first result indicates that the difference between the P third encoding information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, the communication module is also configured to send a message to the second device. Seventh information, the seventh information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
在一种可能的设计中，所述P个第三编码信息为第二设备的第一编码器针对输入所述第一编码器的所述P个第三原始信息的输出，所述第一设备包括与所述第一编码器对应的第一解码器。第一自编码器包括所述第一编码器和所述第一解码器。In a possible design, the P third encoded information is the output of the first encoder of the second device for the P third original information input to the first encoder, and the first device A first decoder corresponding to the first encoder is included. A first autoencoder includes the first encoder and the first decoder.
在一种可能的设计中，通信模块，还用于向第二设备发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于请求所述P个第三编码信息。In a possible design, the communication module is also configured to send second information to the second device, where the second information is used to request the P third encoded information.
在一种可能的设计中，通信模块，还用于接收来自所述第二设备的第三信息，所述第三信息指示所述P个第三原始信息与所述P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。In a possible design, the communication module is also configured to receive third information from the second device, where the third information indicates the difference between the P third original information and the P third encoded information. correspondence between.
在一种可能的设计中，所述P个第三原始信息中的全部或部分属于第一方面中描述的所述M个第一原始信息，或者，所述P个第三原始信息不包括所述M个第一原始信息中的任意一个。In a possible design, all or part of the P third original information belongs to the M first original information described in the first aspect, or the P third original information does not include all Any one of the M first original information.
在一种可能的设计中，当所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系时，所述第一设备按照第一方面以及第一方面可能的设计，确定第一自编码器的性能。In a possible design, when the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship, the first device determines the first self-determination according to the first aspect and the possible design of the first aspect. Encoder performance.
第十二方面，本公开提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是第二设备，也可以是第二设备中的装置、模块或芯片等，或者是能够和第二设备匹配使用的装置。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括执行第四方面中所描述的方法/操作/步骤/动作所一一对应的模块，该模块可以是硬件电路，也可是软件，也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括处理模块和通信模块。In a twelfth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication device. The communication device may be a second device, a device, a module or a chip in the second device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with the second device. In one design, the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the fourth aspect. The module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software. accomplish. In one design, the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
一种示例：An example:
处理模块，用于确定P个第三原始信息，所述P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数；A processing module configured to determine P third pieces of original information, the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2;
通信模块，用于向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息，所述P个第三编码信息用于自编码器性能的确定。A communication module, configured to send P third coded information to the first device, the P third coded information corresponding to P third original information, and the P third coded information used to determine the performance of the autoencoder .
在一种可能的设计中，通信模块，还用于接收来自第一设备的第六信息，所述第六信息用于指示所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，所述第六信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或者，通信模块，还用于接收来自第一设备的第七信息，所述第七信息用于指示所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足第一预设关系，所述第七信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。In a possible design, the communication module is also configured to receive sixth information from the first device, where the sixth information is used to indicate that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship. , the sixth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or, the communication module is also used to receive the seventh information from the first device, the seventh information is used to indicate the P third The difference between the encoding information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, and the seventh information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
此外，一些可能的设计可参照第十一方面理解，本公开对此不再进行赘述。In addition, some possible designs can be understood with reference to the eleventh aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure.
第十三方面，本公开提供一种通信装置，应用于第一设备，该通信装置可以是第一设备，也可以是第一设备中的装置、模块或芯片等，或者是能够和第一设备匹配使用的装置。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括执行第五方面中所描述的方法/操作/步骤/动作所一一对应的模块，该模块可以是硬件电路，也 可是软件，也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括处理模块和通信模块。In a thirteenth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication device applied to a first device. The communication device may be the first device, or may be a device, module or chip in the first device, or may be capable of communicating with the first device. Match the device used. In one design, the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the fifth aspect. The module may be a hardware circuit, or However, software can also be implemented by hardware circuits combined with software. In one design, the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
一种示例：One example:
通信模块，用于接收来自第二设备的P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息，其中，所述P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为正整数；A communication module, configured to receive P pieces of third encoded information from the second device, the P pieces of third encoded information corresponding to P pieces of third original information, wherein the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information The difference between satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer;
处理模块，用于确定P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，或者，P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系。A processing module configured to determine that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, or that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship. The difference between does not satisfy the second preset relationship.
其中，当P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系时，通信模块，还用于向所述第二设备发送第八信息，所述第八信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或，当P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系时，通信模块，还用于向所述第二设备发送第九信息，所述第九信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定；Wherein, when the difference between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, the communication module is also configured to send eighth information to the second device, and the third Eight pieces of information are used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or, when the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship, the communication module also uses In sending ninth information to the second device, the ninth information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder;
在一种可能的设计中，当P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系时，所述处理模块按照第一方面以及第一方面可能的设计，确定第一自编码器的性能。In a possible design, when the difference between the P third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, the processing module performs the first aspect according to the first aspect and the possible first aspect. Design, determine the performance of the first autoencoder.
此外，一些可能的设计可参照第十一方面理解，本公开对此不再进行赘述。In addition, some possible designs can be understood with reference to the eleventh aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure.
第十四方面，本公开提供一种通信装置，应用于第二设备，该通信装置可以是第二设备，也可以是第二设备中的装置、模块或芯片等，或者是能够和第二设备匹配使用的装置。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括执行第六方面中所描述的方法/操作/步骤/动作所一一对应的模块，该模块可以是硬件电路，也可是软件，也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括处理模块和通信模块。In a fourteenth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication device applied to a second device. The communication device may be the second device, or may be a device, module or chip in the second device, or may be capable of communicating with the second device. Match the device used. In one design, the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the sixth aspect. The module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software. accomplish. In one design, the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
处理模块，用于确定所述P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为正整数；A processing module configured to determine that the difference between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer;
通信模块，用于向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息，所述P个第三编码信息用于自编码器性能的确定。A communication module, configured to send P third coded information to the first device, the P third coded information corresponding to P third original information, and the P third coded information used to determine the performance of the autoencoder .
在一种可能的设计中，通信模块，还用于接收来自第一设备的第八信息，所述第八信息用于指示P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，所述第八信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或者，通信模块，还用于接收来自第一设备的第九信息，所述第九信息用于指示P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系，所述第九信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。In a possible design, the communication module is also configured to receive eighth information from the first device, where the eighth information is used to indicate the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information. The difference satisfies the second preset relationship, and the eighth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or, the communication module is also used to receive ninth information from the first device, the ninth information is used to Indicates that the difference between the P third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship, and the ninth information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or Stop the performance determination of the first autoencoder.
此外，一些可能的设计可参照第十一方面理解，本公开对此不再进行赘述。In addition, some possible designs can be understood with reference to the eleventh aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure.
第十五方面，本公开提供一种通信装置，应用于第一设备，该通信装置可以是第一设备，也可以是第一设备中的装置、模块或芯片等，或者是能够和第一设备匹配使用的装置。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括执行第七方面中所描述的方法/操作/步骤/动作所一一对应的模块，该模块可以是硬件电路，也可是软件，也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括处理模块和通信模块。In a fifteenth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication device applied to a first device. The communication device may be the first device, or may be a device, module or chip in the first device, or may be capable of communicating with the first device. Match the device used. In one design, the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the seventh aspect. The module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software. accomplish. In one design, the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
通信模块，用于接收来自第二设备的第一参数信息，所述第一参数信息用于确定自编码器的性能；A communication module, configured to receive first parameter information from the second device, where the first parameter information is used to determine the performance of the autoencoder;
处理模块，用于根据所述第一参数信息，确定自编码器的性能。A processing module, configured to determine the performance of the autoencoder according to the first parameter information.
第一参数的定义可参照第七方面的描述理解，本公开对此不再进行赘述。The definition of the first parameter can be understood with reference to the description of the seventh aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure.
第十六方面，本公开提供一种通信装置，应用于第二设备，该通信装置可以是第二设备，也可以是第二设备中的装置、模块或芯片等，或者是能够和第二设备匹配使用的装置。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括执行第八方面中所描述的方法/操作/步骤/动作所一一对应的模块，该模块可以是硬件电路，也可是软件，也可以是硬件电路结合软件实现。一种设计中，该通信装置可以包括处理模块和通信模块。In a sixteenth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication device applied to a second device. The communication device may be the second device, or may be a device, module or chip in the second device, or may be capable of communicating with the second device. Match the device used. In one design, the communication device may include a module that performs one-to-one correspondence with the method/operation/step/action described in the eighth aspect. The module may be a hardware circuit, software, or a combination of hardware circuit and software. accomplish. In one design, the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module.
处理模块，用于确定第一参数信息；A processing module used to determine the first parameter information;
通信模块，用于向第一设备发送所述第一参数信息，所述第一参数信息用于自编码器的性能确定。A communication module, configured to send the first parameter information to the first device, where the first parameter information is used for performance determination of the autoencoder.
第一参数的定义可参照第七方面的描述理解，本公开对此不再进行赘述。The definition of the first parameter can be understood with reference to the description of the seventh aspect, which will not be described again in this disclosure.
第十七方面，本公开提供一种通信装置，所述通信装置包括处理器，用于实现上述第一方面、第三方面、第五方面、或第七方面所描述的方法。处理器与存储器耦合，存储器用于存储指令和数据，所述处理器执行所述存储器中存储的指令时，可以实现上述第一方面、第三方面、第五方面、或第七方面描述的方法。可选的，所述通信装置还可以包括存储器。所述通信装置还可以包括通信接口，所述通信接 口用于该装置与其它设备进行通信，示例性的，通信接口可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块、管脚或其它类型的通信接口。In a seventeenth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication device, which includes a processor for implementing the method described in the first, third, fifth or seventh aspect. The processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store instructions and data. When the processor executes the instructions stored in the memory, the method described in the first aspect, the third aspect, the fifth aspect, or the seventh aspect can be implemented. . Optionally, the communication device may also include a memory. The communication device may further include a communication interface, the communication interface The interface is used for the device to communicate with other devices. For example, the communication interface may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, a pin, or other types of communication interfaces.
第十八方面，本公开提供一种通信装置，所述通信装置包括处理器，用于实现上述第二方面、第四方面、第六方面、或第八方面所描述的方法。处理器与存储器耦合，存储器用于存储指令和数据，所述处理器执行所述存储器中存储的指令时，可以实现上述第二方面、第四方面、第六方面、或第八方面描述的方法。可选的，所述通信装置还可以包括存储器。所述通信装置还可以包括通信接口，所述通信接口用于该装置与其它设备进行通信，示例性的，通信接口可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块、管脚或其它类型的通信接口。In an eighteenth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication device, which includes a processor for implementing the method described in the above second, fourth, sixth or eighth aspect. The processor is coupled to a memory, and the memory is used to store instructions and data. When the processor executes the instructions stored in the memory, the method described in the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the sixth aspect, or the eighth aspect can be implemented. . Optionally, the communication device may also include a memory. The communication device may also include a communication interface, which is used for the device to communicate with other devices. For example, the communication interface may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, a pin, or other types of communication interfaces.
第十九方面，本公开提供了一种通信***，包括如第九方面至第十六方面中任一方面所描述的通信装置，或，如第九方面和第十方面所描述的通信装置，或如第十一方面和第十二方面所描述的通信装置，或如第十三方面和第十四方面所描述的通信装置，或如第十五方面和第十六方面所描述的通信装置。In a nineteenth aspect, the present disclosure provides a communication system, including a communication device as described in any one of the ninth to sixteenth aspects, or a communication device as described in the ninth and tenth aspects, Or the communication device as described in the eleventh and twelfth aspects, or the communication device as described in the thirteenth and fourteenth aspects, or the communication device as described in the fifteenth and sixteenth aspects .
第二十方面，本公开还提供了一种计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面至第八方面中任一方面提供的方法。In a twentieth aspect, the present disclosure also provides a computer program, which when the computer program is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned first to eighth aspects.
第二十一方面，本公开还提供了一种计算机程序产品，包括指令，当所述指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第八方面中任一方面提供的方法。In a twenty-first aspect, the present disclosure also provides a computer program product, including instructions, which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned first to eighth aspects.
第二十二方面，本公开还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令，当所述计算机程序或者指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面至第八方面中任一方面提供的方法。In a twenty-second aspect, the present disclosure also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program or instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium. When the computer program or instructions are run on a computer, the computer program or instructions cause the The computer executes the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned first to eighth aspects.
第二十三方面，本公开还提供了一种芯片，所述芯片用于执行上述第一方面至第八方面中任一方面提供的方法。可选的，所述芯片用于读取存储器中存储的计算机程序，执行上述第一方面至第八方面中任一方面提供的方法。In a twenty-third aspect, the present disclosure also provides a chip, which is used to execute the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned first to eighth aspects. Optionally, the chip is used to read the computer program stored in the memory and execute the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned first to eighth aspects.
第二十四方面，本公开还提供了一种芯片***，该芯片***包括处理器，用于支持计算机装置实现上述第一方面至第八方面中任一方面提供的方法。在一种可能的设计中，所述芯片***还包括存储器，所述存储器用于保存该计算机装置必要的程序和数据。该芯片***可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a twenty-fourth aspect, the present disclosure also provides a chip system. The chip system includes a processor and is used to support a computer device to implement the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned first to eighth aspects. In a possible design, the chip system further includes a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary programs and data of the computer device. The chip system can be composed of chips or include chips and other discrete devices.
如上第二方面至第二十四方面的任一方面所提供的方案的效果，可参考第一方面中的相应描述。For the effect of the solution provided by any one of the above second to twenty-fourth aspects, reference can be made to the corresponding description in the first aspect.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为一种通信***的结构示意图；Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system;
图2A为神经元结构的一种示意图；Figure 2A is a schematic diagram of the structure of a neuron;
图2B为神经网络的层关系的一种示意图；Figure 2B is a schematic diagram of the layer relationship of the neural network;
图2C为本公开提供的一种AI应用框架示意图；Figure 2C is a schematic diagram of an AI application framework provided by the present disclosure;
图3为另一种通信***的结构示意图；Figure 3 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication system;
图4A～图4D为几种网络架构的示意图；Figures 4A to 4D are schematic diagrams of several network architectures;
图5A～图5B为本公开提供的几种基于自编码器的CSI反馈框架示意图；Figures 5A to 5B are schematic diagrams of several autoencoder-based CSI feedback frameworks provided by the present disclosure;
图6为本公开提供的一种空间映射关系示意图；Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of a spatial mapping relationship provided by the present disclosure;
图7为本公开提供的几种差异变化的关联关系示意图；Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the correlation relationships of several differential changes provided by the present disclosure;
图8为本公开提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图之一；Figure 8 is one of the flow diagrams of a communication method provided by the present disclosure;
图9为本公开提供的另一种空间映射关系示意图；Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of another spatial mapping relationship provided by the present disclosure;
图10为本公开提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图之一；Figure 10 is one of the flow diagrams of a communication method provided by the present disclosure;
图11为本公开提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图之一；Figure 11 is one of the flow diagrams of a communication method provided by the present disclosure;
图12为本公开提供的通信装置的结构示意图之一；Figure 12 is one of the structural schematic diagrams of the communication device provided by the present disclosure;
图13为本公开提供的通信装置的结构示意图之一。Figure 13 is one of the structural schematic diagrams of the communication device provided by the present disclosure.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为了使本公开的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合附图对本公开作进一步地详细描述。In order to make the purpose, technical solutions and advantages of the present disclosure clearer, the present disclosure will be described in further detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本公开如下涉及的至少一个(项)，指示一个(项)或多个(项)。多个(项)，是指两个(项)或两个(项)以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可 以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。另外，应当理解，尽管在本公开中可能采用术语第一、第二等来描述各对象、但这些对象不应限于这些术语。这些术语仅用来将各对象彼此区分开。The disclosure below refers to at least one (item), indicating one (item) or more (items). Multiple (items) refers to two (items) or more than two (items). "And/or" describes the relationship between associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B. To express: A alone exists, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. The character "/" generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or" relationship. In addition, it should be understood that although the terms first, second, etc. may be used to describe various objects in this disclosure, these objects should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish objects from each other.
本公开如下描述中所提到的术语“包括”和“具有”以及它们的任何变形，意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。例如包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、***、产品或设备没有限定于已列出的步骤或单元，而是可选地还包括其他没有列出的步骤或单元，或可选地还包括对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。需要说明的是，本公开中，“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本公开中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何方法或设计方案不应被解释为比其它方法或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言，使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。Reference to the terms "including" and "having" and any variations thereof in the following description of the present disclosure is intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion. For example, a process, method, system, product or device that includes a series of steps or units is not limited to the listed steps or units, but optionally also includes other unlisted steps or units, or optionally also Includes other steps or units that are inherent to such processes, methods, products, or devices. It should be noted that in this disclosure, words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used to represent examples, illustrations or explanations. Any method or design described in this disclosure as "exemplary" or "such as" is not intended to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other methods or designs. Rather, use of the words "exemplary" or "such as" is intended to present the concept in a concrete manner.
本公开提供的技术可以应用于各种通信***，例如，该通信***可以是第三代(3th generation，3G)通信***(例如通用移动通信***(universal mobile telecommunication system，UMTS))、***(4th generation，4G)通信***(例如长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)***)、第五代(5th generation，5G)通信***、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access，WiMAX)或者无线局域网(wireless local area network，WLAN)***、或者多种***的融合***，或者是未来的通信***，例如6G通信***等。其中，5G通信***还可以称为新无线(new radio，NR)***。The technology provided by this disclosure can be applied to various communication systems. For example, the communication system can be a third generation (3G) communication system (such as a universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS)), a fourth generation (4th generation, 4G) communication system (such as long term evolution (LTE) system), fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) communication system, global interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) or wireless Local area network (wireless local area network, WLAN) system, or integration system of multiple systems, or future communication system, such as 6G communication system, etc. Among them, the 5G communication system can also be called a new radio (NR) system.
通信***中的一个网元可以向另一个网元发送信号或从另一个网元接收信号。其中信号可以包括信息、信令或者数据等。其中，网元也可以被替换为实体、网络实体、设备、通信设备、通信模块、节点、通信节点等等，本公开中以网元为例进行描述。例如，通信***可以包括至少一个终端设备和至少一个接入网设备。接入网设备可以向终端设备发送下行信号，和/或终端设备可以向接入网设备发送上行信号此外可以理解的是，若通信***中包括多个终端设备，多个终端设备之间也可以互发信号，即信号的发送网元和信号的接收网元均可以是终端设备。One network element in a communication system can send signals to or receive signals from another network element. The signal may include information, signaling or data, etc. The network element can also be replaced by an entity, a network entity, a device, a communication device, a communication module, a node, a communication node, etc. In this disclosure, a network element is taken as an example for description. For example, the communication system may include at least one terminal device and at least one access network device. The access network device can send downlink signals to the terminal device, and/or the terminal device can send uplink signals to the access network device. In addition, it can be understood that if the communication system includes multiple terminal devices, multiple terminal devices can also communicate with each other. Mutual signaling means that both the signal sending network element and the signal receiving network element can be terminal devices.
本公开提供的通信方法可以应用于5G、6G、卫星通信等无线通信***中。参见图1，图1是本公开提供的无线通信***的一简化示意图。如图1所示，该无线通信***包括无线接入网100。无线接入网100可以是下一代(例如6G或更高版本)无线接入网，或传统(例如5G、4G、3G或2G)无线接入网。一个或多个通信设备(120a-120j，统称为120)可以相互连接或连接到无线接入网100中的一个或多个网络设备(110a、110b，统称为110)。可选的，图1只是示意图，该无线通信***中还可以包括其它设备，如还可以包括核心网设备、无线中继设备和/或无线回传设备等，在图1中未画出。The communication method provided by the present disclosure can be applied to wireless communication systems such as 5G, 6G, and satellite communications. Referring to Figure 1, Figure 1 is a simplified schematic diagram of the wireless communication system provided by the present disclosure. As shown in Figure 1, the wireless communication system includes a wireless access network 100. The radio access network 100 may be a next-generation (eg, 6G or higher) radio access network, or a legacy (eg, 5G, 4G, 3G or 2G) radio access network. One or more communication devices (120a-120j, collectively 120) may be connected to each other or to one or more network devices (110a, 110b, collectively 110) in the wireless access network 100. Optionally, Figure 1 is only a schematic diagram. The wireless communication system may also include other equipment, such as core network equipment, wireless relay equipment and/or wireless backhaul equipment, etc., which are not shown in Figure 1 .
可选的，在实际应用中，该无线通信***可以同时包括多个网络设备(也称为接入网设备)，也可以同时包括多个通信设备。一个网络设备可以同时服务于一个或多个通信设备。一个通信设备也可以同时接入一个或多个网络设备。本公开对该无线通信***中包括的通信设备和网络设备的数量不做限定。Optionally, in practical applications, the wireless communication system may include multiple network devices (also called access network devices) at the same time, or may include multiple communication devices at the same time. A network device can serve one or more communication devices at the same time. A communication device can also access one or more network devices at the same time. This disclosure does not limit the number of communication devices and network devices included in the wireless communication system.
其中，网络设备可以是网络侧的一种用于发射或接收信号的实体。网络设备可以为通信设备通过无线方式接入到该无线通信***中的接入设备，如网络设备可以是基站。基站可以广义的覆盖如下中的各种名称，或与如下名称进行替换，比如：节点B(NodeB)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB，eNB)、下一代基站(next generation NodeB，gNB)、开放无线接入网(open radio access network，O-RAN)中的接入网设备、中继站、接入点、传输点(transmitting and receiving point，TRP)、发射点(transmitting point，TP)、主站MeNB、辅站SeNB、多制式无线(MSR)节点、家庭基站、网络控制器、接入节点、无线节点、接入点(AP)、传输节点、收发节点、基带单元(BBU)、射频拉远单元(RRU)、有源天线单元(AAU)、射频头(RRH)、中心单元(CU)、分布单元(DU)、无线单元(radio unit，RU)、集中单元控制面(CU control plane，CU-CP)节点、集中单元用户面(CU user plane，CU-UP)节点、定位节点等。基站可以是宏基站、微基站、中继节点、施主节点或类似物，或其组合。网络设备还可以指用于设置于前述设备或装置内的通信模块、调制解调器或芯片。网络设备还可以是移动交换中心以及设备到设备(Device-to-Device，D2D)、车辆外联(vehicle-to-everything，V2X)、机器到机器(machine-to-machine，M2M)通信中承担基站功能的设备、6G网络中的网络侧设备、未来的通信***中承担基站功能的设备等。网络设备可以支持相同或不同接入技术的网络。本申请的实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。The network device may be an entity on the network side that is used to transmit or receive signals. The network device may be an access device through which the communication device wirelessly accesses the wireless communication system. For example, the network device may be a base station. Base stations can broadly cover various names as follows, or be replaced with the following names, such as: Node B (NodeB), evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNB), next generation base station (next generation NodeB, gNB), open wireless Access network equipment, relay station, access point, transmission point (transmitting and receiving point, TRP), transmitting point (TP), main station MeNB, Secondary station SeNB, multi-standard wireless (MSR) node, home base station, network controller, access node, wireless node, access point (AP), transmission node, transceiver node, baseband unit (BBU), radio frequency remote unit ( RRU), active antenna unit (AAU), radio head (RRH), central unit (CU), distribution unit (DU), wireless unit (radio unit, RU), centralized unit control plane (CU control plane, CU-CP ) node, centralized unit user plane (CU user plane, CU-UP) node, positioning node, etc. The base station may be a macro base station, a micro base station, a relay node, a donor node or the like, or a combination thereof. Network equipment may also refer to communication modules, modems or chips provided in the aforementioned equipment or devices. Network equipment can also be a mobile switching center and responsible for device-to-device (D2D), vehicle outreach (vehicle-to-everything, V2X), and machine-to-machine (M2M) communications. Equipment with base station functions, network side equipment in 6G networks, equipment with base station functions in future communication systems, etc. Network devices can support networks with the same or different access technologies. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used by the network equipment.
网络设备可以是固定的，也可以是移动的。例如，基站110a、110b是静止的，并负责来自通信设备120的一个或多个小区中的无线传输和接收。图1中示出的直升机或无人机120i可以被配置成充当移动基站，并且一个或多个小区可以根据移动基站120i的位置移动。在其他示例中，直升机或无人机 (120i)可以被配置成用作与基站110b通信的通信设备。Network equipment can be fixed or mobile. For example, base stations 110a, 110b are stationary and are responsible for wireless transmission and reception in one or more cells from communication devices 120. The helicopter or drone 120i shown in Figure 1 may be configured to act as a mobile base station, and one or more cells may move based on the location of the mobile base station 120i. In other examples, helicopters or drones (120i) may be configured to function as a communications device that communicates with base station 110b.
本公开中，用于实现如上接入网络功能的通信装置可以是接入网设备，也可以是具有接入网络的部分功能的网络设备，也可以是能够支持实现接入网络功能的装置，例如芯片***，硬件电路、软件模块、或硬件电路加软件模块，该装置可以被安装在接入网设备中或者和接入网设备匹配使用。本公开的方法中，以用于实现接入网设备功能的通信装置是接入网设备为例进行描述。In the present disclosure, the communication device used to implement the above access network function may be an access network device, or may be a network device with partial functions of the access network, or may be a device capable of supporting the implementation of the access network function, such as Chip system, hardware circuit, software module, or hardware circuit plus software module. This device can be installed in access network equipment or used in conjunction with access network equipment. In the method of the present disclosure, the communication device used to implement the function of the access network device is an access network device as an example for description.
通信设备可以是用户侧的一种用于接收或发射信号的实体，如手机。通信设备可以用于连接人、物和机器。通信设备可通过网络设备与一个或多个核心网进行通信。通信设备包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备或车载设备等。通信设备可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置。通信设备120可以广泛应用于各种场景，例如蜂窝通信、设备到设备D2D、车到所有V2X、端到端P2P、机器到机器M2M、机器类型通信MTC、物联网IOT、虚拟现实VR、增强现实AR、工业控制、自动驾驶、远程医疗、智能电网、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通、智慧城市、无人机、机器人、遥感、被动传感、定位、导航与跟踪、自主交付与移动等。通信设备120的一些举例为：3GPP标准的用户设备(UE)、固定设备、移动设备、手持设备、可穿戴设备、蜂窝电话、智能电话、会话发起协议(SIP)电话、笔记本电脑、个人计算机、智能书、车辆、卫星、全球定位***(GPS)设备、目标跟踪设备、无人机、直升机、飞行器、船只、遥控设备、智能家居设备、工业设备、个人通信业务(personal communication service，PCS)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、无线网络摄像头、平板电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device，MID)、可穿戴设备如智能手表、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、车联网***中的终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端如智能加油器，高铁上的终端设备以及智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端，如智能音响、智能咖啡机、智能打印机等。通信设备120可以为以上各种场景中的无线设备或用于设置于无线设备的装置，例如，上述设备中的通信模块、调制解调器或芯片等。通信设备也可以称为终端、终端设备、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station，MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)等。通信设备还可以是未来的无线通信***中的通信设备。通信设备可以用于专用网设备或者通用设备中。本申请的实施例对通信设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。A communication device may be an entity on the user side that is used to receive or transmit signals, such as a mobile phone. Communication devices can be used to connect people, things and machines. The communication device may communicate with one or more core networks through network devices. Communication devices include handheld devices with wireless connectivity, other processing devices connected to wireless modems, or vehicle-mounted devices. The communication device may be a portable, pocket-sized, handheld, computer-built-in, or vehicle-mounted mobile device. The communication device 120 can be widely used in various scenarios, such as cellular communication, device-to-device D2D, vehicle-to-everything V2X, end-to-end P2P, machine-to-machine M2M, machine type communication MTC, Internet of Things IOT, virtual reality VR, and augmented reality AR, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, drone, robot, remote sensing, passive sensing, positioning, navigation and tracking, autonomous delivery and Mobile etc. Some examples of communication devices 120 are: 3GPP standard user equipment (UE), fixed devices, mobile devices, handheld devices, wearable devices, cellular phones, smartphones, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phones, laptops, personal computers, Smart books, vehicles, satellites, global positioning system (GPS) equipment, target tracking equipment, drones, helicopters, aircraft, ships, remote control equipment, smart home equipment, industrial equipment, personal communication service (PCS) phones , wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), wireless network camera, tablet computer, handheld computer, mobile Internet device (mobile internet device, MID), wearable devices such as Smart watches, virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control (industrial control), terminals in Internet of Vehicles systems, and self-driving (self-driving) Wireless terminals, wireless terminals in smart grid, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart city (smart city) such as smart refuelers, terminal equipment on high-speed rail and smart homes (smart Wireless terminals in home), such as smart speakers, smart coffee machines, smart printers, etc. The communication device 120 may be a wireless device in the above various scenarios or a device provided in the wireless device, for example, a communication module, a modem or a chip in the above device. Communication equipment can also be called terminal, terminal equipment, user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), etc. The communication device may also be a communication device in a future wireless communication system. Communication equipment can be used in dedicated network equipment or general equipment. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used in the communication equipment.
可选的，通信设备可以用于充当基站。例如，UE可以充当调度实体，其在V2X、D2D或P2P等中的UE之间提供侧行链路信号。如图1所示，蜂窝电话120a和汽车120b利用侧行链路信号彼此通信。蜂窝电话120a和智能家居设备120e之间通信，而无需通过基站110b中继通信信号。Optionally, the communication device can be used to act as a base station. For example, a UE may act as a scheduling entity that provides sidelink signals between UEs in V2X, D2D or P2P, etc. As shown in Figure 1, cell phone 120a and car 120b communicate with each other using sidelink signals. Cell phone 120a and smart home device 120e communicate without relaying communication signals through base station 110b.
本公开中，用于实现通信设备功能的通信装置可以是终端设备，也可以是具有以上通信设备的部分功能的终端设备，也可以是能够支持实现以上通信设备的功能的装置，例如芯片***，该装置可以被安装在终端设备中或者和终端设备匹配使用。本公开中，芯片***可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。本公开提供的技术方案中，以通信装置是终端设备或UE为例进行描述。In the present disclosure, the communication device used to implement the functions of the communication device may be a terminal device, or a terminal device having part of the functions of the above communication device, or a device that can support the realization of the functions of the above communication device, such as a chip system, The device can be installed in a terminal device or used in conjunction with the terminal device. In this disclosure, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices. In the technical solution provided by the present disclosure, the communication device is a terminal device or a UE as an example for description.
可选的，无线通信***通常由小区组成，基站提供小区的管理，基站向小区中多个移动台(mobile station，MS)提供通信服务。其中基站包含基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)和远端射频单元(remote radio unit，RRU)。BBU和RRU可以放置在不同的地方，例如：RRU拉远，放置于高话务量的区域，BBU放置于中心机房。BBU和RRU也可以放置在同一机房。BBU和RRU也可以为一个机架下的不同部件。可选的，一个小区可以对应于一个载波或成员载波。Optionally, a wireless communication system is usually composed of a cell. A base station provides management of the cell. The base station provides communication services to multiple mobile stations (MS) in the cell. The base station includes a baseband unit (BBU) and a remote radio unit (RRU). The BBU and RRU can be placed in different places. For example, the RRU is remote and placed in a high traffic area, and the BBU is placed in the central computer room. BBU and RRU can also be placed in the same computer room. The BBU and RRU can also be different components under the same rack. Optionally, a cell may correspond to a carrier or component carrier.
可以理解的是，本公开可以应用在网络设备和通信设备之间，网络设备和网络设备之间，或，通信设备和通信设备之间，也即，主设备和次设备之间，主设备可以为网络设备或通信设备，主设备为网络设备时，次设备可以为另一网络设备或通信设备，主设备为通信设备时，次设备可以为另一通信设备。It can be understood that the present disclosure can be applied between a network device and a communication device, between a network device and a network device, or between a communication device and a communication device, that is, between a primary device and a secondary device. The primary device can It is a network device or a communication device. When the main device is a network device, the secondary device can be another network device or communication device. When the main device is a communication device, the secondary device can be another communication device.
以下以主设备为网络设备，如，接入网设备，次设备为通信设备，如终端设备，为例进行方案的描述。其中，下行对应的通信方向为主设备向次设备的发送，上行对应的通信方向为次设备向主设备的发送。The following describes the solution by taking the primary device as a network device, such as an access network device, and the secondary device as a communication device, such as a terminal device, as an example. Among them, the communication direction corresponding to the downlink is from the primary device to the secondary device, and the communication direction corresponding to the uplink is from the secondary device to the primary device.
接入网设备和终端设备之间的协议层结构Protocol layer structure between access network equipment and terminal equipment
接入网设备和终端设备之间的通信遵循一定的协议层结构。该协议层结构可以包括控制面协议层结构和用户面协议层结构。例如，控制面协议层结构可以包括无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC) 层、分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层、无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层、媒体接入控制(medium access control，MAC)层和物理层等协议层的功能。例如，用户面协议层结构可以包括PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层和物理层等协议层的功能，在一种可能的实现中，PDCP层之上还可以包括业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol，SDAP)层。The communication between access network equipment and terminal equipment follows a certain protocol layer structure. The protocol layer structure may include a control plane protocol layer structure and a user plane protocol layer structure. For example, the control plane protocol layer structure may include radio resource control (RRC) layer, packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, radio link control (RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer and physical layer. . For example, the user plane protocol layer structure may include the functions of protocol layers such as the PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer and physical layer. In a possible implementation, the PDCP layer may also include service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol). protocol, SDAP) layer.
可选的，接入网设备和终端之间的协议层结构还可以包括人工智能(artificial intelligence，AI)层，用于传输AI功能相关的数据。Optionally, the protocol layer structure between the access network device and the terminal may also include an artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI) layer for transmitting data related to the AI function.
以接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输为例，数据传输需要经过用户面协议层，比如经过SDAP层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层、物理层。其中，SDAP层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层和物理层也可以统称为接入层。根据数据的传输方向分为发送或接收，上述每层又分为发送部分和接收部分。以下行数据传输为例，PDCP层自上层取得数据后，将数据传送到RLC层与MAC层，再由MAC层生成传输块，然后通过物理层进行无线传输。数据在各个层中进行相对应的封装。例如，某一层从该层的上层收到的数据视为该层的服务数据单元(service data unit，SDU)，经过该层封装后成为协议数据单元(protocol data unit，PDU)，再传递给下一个层。Taking data transmission between access network equipment and terminal equipment as an example, data transmission needs to pass through the user plane protocol layer, such as the SDAP layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, and physical layer. Among them, the SDAP layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer and physical layer can also be collectively referred to as the access layer. According to the transmission direction of data, it is divided into sending or receiving, and each layer mentioned above is divided into sending part and receiving part. Taking downlink data transmission as an example, after the PDCP layer obtains data from the upper layer, it transmits the data to the RLC layer and MAC layer, and then the MAC layer generates a transmission block, and then wirelessly transmits it through the physical layer. Data is encapsulated accordingly in each layer. For example, the data received by a certain layer from the upper layer of the layer is regarded as the service data unit (SDU) of the layer. After being encapsulated by the layer, it becomes the protocol data unit (PDU) and then passed to the Next level.
示例性的，终端设备还可以具有应用层和非接入层。其中，应用层可以用于向终端设备中所安装的应用程序提供服务，比如，终端设备接收到的下行数据可以由物理层依次传输到应用层，进而由应用层提供给应用程序；又比如，应用层可以获取应用程序产生的数据，并将数据依次传输到物理层，发送给其它通信装置。非接入层可以用于转发用户数据，比如将从应用层接收到的上行数据转发给SDAP层或者将从SDAP层接收到的下行数据转发给应用层。For example, the terminal device may also have an application layer and a non-access layer. Among them, the application layer can be used to provide services to applications installed in the terminal device. For example, the downlink data received by the terminal device can be sequentially transmitted from the physical layer to the application layer, and then provided to the application program by the application layer; for another example, The application layer can obtain the data generated by the application program and transmit the data to the physical layer in turn and send it to other communication devices. The non-access layer can be used to forward user data, such as forwarding uplink data received from the application layer to the SDAP layer or forwarding downlink data received from the SDAP layer to the application layer.
接入网设备的结构Access network equipment structure
接入网设备可以包括集中式单元(central unit，CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)。多个DU可以由一个CU集中控制。作为示例，CU和DU之间的接口可以称为F1接口。其中，控制面(control panel，CP)接口可以为F1-C，用户面(user panel，UP)接口可以为F1-U。CU和DU可以根据无线网络的协议层划分：比如，PDCP层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU，PDCP层以下协议层(例如RLC层和MAC层等)的功能设置在DU；又比如，PDCP层以上协议层的功能设置在CU，PDCP层及以下协议层的功能设置在DU。Access network equipment can include centralized units (central unit, CU) and distributed units (distributed unit, DU). Multiple DUs can be centrally controlled by one CU. As an example, the interface between the CU and the DU may be called the F1 interface. Among them, the control panel (CP) interface can be F1-C, and the user panel (UP) interface can be F1-U. CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network: for example, the functions of the PDCP layer and above are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the PDCP layer (such as the RLC layer and MAC layer, etc.) are set in the DU; for example, PDCP The functions of the protocol layers above are set in the CU, and the functions of the PDCP layer and the lower protocol layers are set in the DU.
可以理解的是，上述对CU和DU的处理功能按照协议层的划分仅仅是一种举例，也可以按照其他的方式进行划分，例如可以将CU或者DU划分为具有更多协议层的功能，又例如将CU或DU还可以划分为具有协议层的部分处理功能。在一种设计中，将RLC层的部分功能和RLC层以上的协议层的功能设置在CU，将RLC层的剩余功能和RLC层以下的协议层的功能设置在DU。在另一种设计中，还可以按照业务类型或者其他***需求对CU或者DU的功能进行划分，例如按时延划分，将处理时间需要满足时延要求的功能设置在DU，不需要满足该时延要求的功能设置在CU。在另一种设计中，CU也可以具有核心网的一个或多个功能。示例性的，CU可以设置在网络侧方便集中管理。在另一种设计中，将DU的RU拉远设置。其中，RU具有射频功能。It can be understood that the above-mentioned division of the processing functions of CU and DU according to protocol layers is only an example, and can also be divided in other ways. For example, CU or DU can be divided into functions with more protocol layers, and For example, CU or DU can also be divided into partial processing functions with protocol layer. In one design, part of the functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer above the RLC layer are set in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer below the RLC layer are set in the DU. In another design, the functions of CU or DU can also be divided according to business types or other system requirements, for example, according to delay, and the functions whose processing time needs to meet the delay requirements are set in DU, but do not need to meet the delay. The required functionality is set in CU. In another design, the CU may also have one or more functions of the core network. For example, the CU can be set on the network side to facilitate centralized management. In another design, the RU of the DU is set far away. Among them, RU has radio frequency function.
可选的，DU和RU可以在物理层(physical layer，PHY)进行划分。例如，DU可以实现PHY层中的高层功能，RU可以实现PHY层中的低层功能。其中，用于发送时，PHY层的功能可以包括添加循环冗余校验(cyclic redundancy check，CRC)码、信道编码、速率匹配、加扰、调制、层映射、预编码、资源映射、物理天线映射、和/或射频发送功能。用于接收时，PHY层的功能可以包括CRC、信道解码、解速率匹配、解扰、解调、解层映射、信道检测、资源解映射、物理天线解映射、和/或射频接收功能。其中，PHY层中的高层功能可以包括PHY层的一部分功能，例如该部分功能更加靠近MAC层，PHY层中的低层功能可以包括PHY层的另一部分功能，例如该部分功能更加靠近射频功能。例如，PHY层中的高层功能可以包括添加CRC码、信道编码、速率匹配、加扰、调制、和层映射，PHY层中的低层功能可以包括预编码、资源映射、物理天线映射、和射频发送功能；或者，PHY层中的高层功能可以包括添加CRC码、信道编码、速率匹配、加扰、调制、层映射和预编码，PHY层中的低层功能可以包括资源映射、物理天线映射、和射频发送功能。Optionally, DU and RU can be divided at the physical layer (PHY). For example, DU can implement high-level functions in the PHY layer, and RU can implement low-level functions in the PHY layer. Among them, when used for transmission, the functions of the PHY layer can include adding cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code, channel coding, rate matching, scrambling, modulation, layer mapping, precoding, resource mapping, physical antenna Mapping, and/or RF transmitting functions. When used for reception, the functions of the PHY layer may include CRC, channel decoding, derate matching, descrambling, demodulation, delayer mapping, channel detection, resource demapping, physical antenna demapping, and/or radio frequency reception functions. Among them, the high-level functions in the PHY layer may include part of the functions of the PHY layer, for example, this part of the function is closer to the MAC layer, and the lower-layer functions of the PHY layer may include another part of the function of the PHY layer, for example, this part of the function is closer to the radio frequency function. For example, high-level functions in the PHY layer may include adding CRC codes, channel coding, rate matching, scrambling, modulation, and layer mapping, and low-level functions in the PHY layer may include precoding, resource mapping, physical antenna mapping, and radio frequency transmission. Function; alternatively, the high-level functions in the PHY layer may include adding CRC codes, channel coding, rate matching, scrambling, modulation, layer mapping, and precoding, and the low-layer functions in the PHY layer may include resource mapping, physical antenna mapping, and radio frequency Send function.
示例性的，CU的功能可以由一个实体来实现，或者也可以由不同的实体来实现。例如，可以对CU的功能进行进一步划分，即将控制面和用户面分离并通过不同实体来实现，分别为控制面CU实体(即CU-CP实体)和用户面CU实体(即CU-UP实体)。该CU-CP实体和CU-UP实体可以与DU相耦合，共同完成接入网设备的功能。 For example, the functions of the CU may be implemented by one entity, or may be implemented by different entities. For example, the functions of the CU can be further divided, that is, the control plane and the user plane are separated and implemented through different entities, namely the control plane CU entity (i.e., CU-CP entity) and the user plane CU entity (i.e., CU-UP entity). . The CU-CP entity and the CU-UP entity can be coupled with the DU to jointly complete the functions of the access network equipment.
上述架构中，CU产生的信令可以通过DU发送给终端设备，或者终端设备产生的信令可以通过DU发送给CU。例如，RRC或PDCP层的信令最终会处理为物理层的信令发送给终端设备，或者，由接收到的物理层的信令转变而来。在这种架构下，该RRC或PDCP层的信令，即可以认为是通过DU发送的，或者，通过DU和RU发送的。In the above architecture, the signaling generated by the CU can be sent to the terminal device through DU, or the signaling generated by the terminal device can be sent to the CU through DU. For example, RRC or PDCP layer signaling will eventually be processed into physical layer signaling and sent to the terminal device, or it will be converted from the received physical layer signaling. Under this architecture, the RRC or PDCP layer signaling can be considered to be sent through DU, or sent through DU and RU.
可选的，上述DU、CU、CU-CP、CU-UP和RU中的任一个可以是软件模块、硬件结构、或者软件模块+硬件结构，不予限制。其中，不同实体的存在形式可以是不同的，不予限制。例如DU、CU、CU-CP、CU-UP是软件模块，RU是硬件结构。这些模块及其执行的方法也在本公开的保护范围内。Optionally, any one of the above DU, CU, CU-CP, CU-UP and RU can be a software module, a hardware structure, or a software module + hardware structure, without limitation. Among them, the existence forms of different entities can be different and are not limited. For example, DU, CU, CU-CP, and CU-UP are software modules, and RU is a hardware structure. These modules and the methods for their execution are also within the scope of the present disclosure.
应理解，图1所示的通信***中各个设备的数量、类型仅作为示意，本公开并不限于此，实际应用中在通信***中还可以包括更多的终端设备、更多的接入网设备，还可以包括其它网元，例如可以包括核心网设备，网管和/或用于实现人工智能功能的网元。其中，网管又可以称为操作维护管理(operation administration and maintenance，OAM)网元，简称OAM。操作主要完成日常网络和业务进行的分析、预测、规划和配置工作；维护主要是对网络及其业务的测试和故障管理等进行的日常操作活动，网管可以检测网络运行状态、优化网络连接和性能，提升网络运行稳定性，降低网络维护成本。It should be understood that the number and type of each device in the communication system shown in Figure 1 are only for illustration, and the present disclosure is not limited thereto. In actual applications, the communication system may also include more terminal devices and more access networks. The equipment may also include other network elements, such as core network equipment, network management and/or network elements used to implement artificial intelligence functions. Among them, network management can also be called operation administration and maintenance (OAM) network element, referred to as OAM. Operations mainly complete the analysis, prediction, planning and configuration of daily networks and services; maintenance mainly involves daily operational activities such as testing and fault management of the network and its services. The network manager can detect the network operating status and optimize network connections and performance. , improve network operation stability and reduce network maintenance costs.
本公开提供的方法可以用于接入网设备和终端设备之间的通信，也可以用于其他通信设备之间的通信，例如无线回传链路中宏基站和微基站之间的通信，又如边链路(sidelink，SL)中两个终端设备之间的通信，又如终端设备和网管(OAM)之间的通信等，不予限制。The method provided by the present disclosure can be used for communication between access network equipment and terminal equipment, and can also be used for communication between other communication equipment, such as communication between macro base stations and micro base stations in wireless backhaul links. For example, the communication between two terminal devices in the side link (SL), or the communication between the terminal device and the network management (OAM), etc., are not restricted.
本公开提供的方法涉及到人工智能(artificial Intelligence，AI)。为了便于理解，下面结合A1～A3，对本公开涉及的AI的部分用语进行介绍。可以理解的是，该介绍并不作为对本公开的限定。The method provided by this disclosure involves artificial intelligence (AI). In order to facilitate understanding, some terminology of AI involved in this disclosure will be introduced below in conjunction with A1 to A3. It should be understood that this introduction is not intended to limit the present disclosure.
A1，AI模型A1, AI model
AI模型是AI技术功能的具体实现，AI模型表征了模型的输入和输出之间的映射关系。AI模型可以是神经网络、线性回归模型、决策树模型、支持向量机(support vector machine，SVM)、贝叶斯网络、Q学习模型或者其他机器学习(machine learning,ML)模型。The AI model is the specific implementation of the AI technical function. The AI model represents the mapping relationship between the input and output of the model. AI models can be neural networks, linear regression models, decision tree models, support vector machines (SVM), Bayesian networks, Q learning models or other machine learning (ML) models.
本公开主要涉及自编码器(auto-encoders，AE)，自编码器是一种无监督学习的神经网络，它的特点是将输入数据作为标签数据，因此自编码器也可以理解为自监督学习的神经网络。自编码器可以用于数据的压缩和恢复。自编码器可以泛指由两个子模型构成的网络结构，自编码器也可以称为双边模型，双端模型或者协作模型，例如自编码器包括编码器(encoder)和解码器(decoder)两个部分，编码器和解码器匹配使用，可以理解编码器和解码器为配套的AI模型。示例性地，自编码器中的编码器可以对原始信息A进行编码(例如压缩)处理，得到编码信息B；自编码器中的解码器可以对编码信息B进行解码处理，得到原始信息A对应的解码信息A’。可选的，解码信息A’也可以描述为恢复的原始信息A。可以理解的是，解码器是编码器的逆操作；例如编码器的编码处理包括压缩处理，解码器的解码处理包括解压缩处理。同一个自编码器包括的编码器和解码器可以分别部署在不同的设备上，例如终端设备侧可以利用编码器对原始信道信息进行压缩，接入网设备侧可以利用解码器对压缩的原始信道信息进行恢复，得到恢复的信道信息。This disclosure mainly relates to auto-encoders (AE). An auto-encoder is a kind of unsupervised learning neural network. Its characteristic is that the input data is used as label data. Therefore, the auto-encoder can also be understood as self-supervised learning. neural network. Autoencoders can be used for data compression and recovery. An autoencoder can generally refer to a network structure composed of two sub-models. An autoencoder can also be called a bilateral model, a two-terminal model or a collaborative model. For example, an autoencoder includes an encoder and a decoder. In part, the encoder and decoder are used in a matched manner, and it can be understood that the encoder and decoder are matching AI models. For example, the encoder in the autoencoder can encode (for example, compress) the original information A to obtain the encoded information B; the decoder in the autoencoder can decode the encoded information B to obtain the corresponding information of the original information A. The decoded information A'. Optionally, the decoded information A' can also be described as the restored original information A. It can be understood that the decoder is the inverse operation of the encoder; for example, the encoding process of the encoder includes compression processing, and the decoding process of the decoder includes decompression processing. The encoder and decoder included in the same autoencoder can be deployed on different devices respectively. For example, the terminal device side can use the encoder to compress the original channel information, and the access network device side can use the decoder to compress the compressed original channel information. The information is restored and the restored channel information is obtained.
A2，神经网络A2, neural network
神经网络是AI或机器学习技术的一种具体实现形式。根据通用近似定理，神经网络在理论上可以逼近任意连续函数，从而使得神经网络具备学习任意映射的能力。Neural network is a specific implementation form of AI or machine learning technology. According to the universal approximation theorem, neural networks can theoretically approximate any continuous function, which enables neural networks to have the ability to learn arbitrary mappings.
神经网络的思想来源于大脑组织的神经元结构。例如，每个神经元都对其输入值进行加权求和运算，通过一个激活函数输出运算结果。如图2A所示，为神经元结构的一种示意图。假设神经元的输入为x＝[x0,x1,…,xn]，与各个输入对应的权值分别为w＝[w,w1,…,wn]，其中，wi作为xi的权值，用于对xi进行加权。根据权值对输入值进行加权求和的偏置例如为b。激活函数的形式可以有多种，假设一个神经元的激活函数为：y＝f(c)＝max(0,c)，则该神经元的输出为： 再例如，一个神经元的激活函数为：y＝f(c)＝c，则该神经元的输出为：其中，b、wi、xi可以是小数、整数(例如0、正整数或负整数)、或复数等各种可能的取值。神经网络中不同神经元的激活函数可以相同或不同。The idea of neural networks comes from the neuron structure of brain tissue. For example, each neuron performs a weighted sum operation on its input values and outputs the operation result through an activation function. As shown in Figure 2A, it is a schematic diagram of the structure of a neuron. Assume that the input of the neuron is x=[x 0 ,x 1 ,...,x n ], and the weight corresponding to each input is w=[w,w 1 ,...,w n ], where w i is x The weight of i is used to weight xi . The bias for weighted summation of input values according to the weight is, for example, b. There are many forms of activation functions. Suppose the activation function of a neuron is: y=f(c)=max(0,c), then the output of the neuron is: For another example, the activation function of a neuron is: y=f(c)=c, then the output of the neuron is: Among them, b, wi , xi can be decimals, integers (such as 0, positive integers or negative integers), or complex numbers and other possible values. The activation functions of different neurons in a neural network can be the same or different.
神经网络一般包括多个层，每层可包括一个或多个神经元。通过增加神经网络的深度和/或宽度，能够提高该神经网络的表达能力，为复杂***提供更强大的信息提取和抽象建模能力。其中，神经网络的深度可以是指神经网络包括的层数，其中每层包括的神经元个数可以称为该层的宽度。在一种实 现方式中，神经网络包括输入层和输出层。神经网络的输入层将接收到的输入信息经过神经元处理，将处理结果传递给输出层，由输出层得到神经网络的输出结果。在另一种实现方式中，神经网络包括输入层、隐藏层和输出层，可参考图2B。神经网络的输入层将接收到的输入信息经过神经元处理，将处理结果传递给中间的隐藏层，隐藏层对接收的处理结果进行计算，得到计算结果，隐藏层将计算结果传递给输出层或者相邻的隐藏层，最终由输出层得到神经网络的输出结果。其中，一个神经网络可以包括一个隐藏层，或者包括多个依次连接的隐藏层，不予限制。Neural networks generally include multiple layers, and each layer may include one or more neurons. By increasing the depth and/or width of a neural network, the expressive ability of the neural network can be improved, providing more powerful information extraction and abstract modeling capabilities for complex systems. The depth of the neural network may refer to the number of layers included in the neural network, and the number of neurons included in each layer may be called the width of the layer. in a real In the current way, the neural network includes an input layer and an output layer. The input layer of the neural network processes the received input information through neurons, and passes the processing results to the output layer, which obtains the output results of the neural network. In another implementation, the neural network includes an input layer, a hidden layer and an output layer, as shown in Figure 2B. The input layer of the neural network processes the received input information through neurons and passes the processing results to the intermediate hidden layer. The hidden layer calculates the received processing results and obtains the calculation results. The hidden layer passes the calculation results to the output layer or The adjacent hidden layer finally obtains the output result of the neural network from the output layer. Among them, a neural network may include one hidden layer, or multiple hidden layers connected in sequence, without limitation.
以AI模型的类型为神经网络为例，本公开中编码器或解码器所用的AI模型可以为深度神经网络(deep neural network,DNN)。根据网络的构建方式，DNN可以包括前馈神经网络(feedforward neural network,FNN)、卷积神经网络(convolutional neural networks,CNN)或，递归神经网络(recurrent neural network,RNN)。Taking the type of AI model as a neural network as an example, the AI model used by the encoder or decoder in this disclosure can be a deep neural network (DNN). Depending on how the network is constructed, DNNs can include feedforward neural networks (FNN), convolutional neural networks (CNN), or recurrent neural networks (RNN).
A3，训练数据和推理数据A3, training data and inference data
训练数据集用于AI模型的训练，训练数据集可以包括AI模型的输入，或者包括AI模型的输入和目标输出。其中，训练数据集包括一个或多个训练数据，训练数据可以是输入至AI模型的训练样本，也可以是AI模型的目标输出。其中，目标输出也可以被称为标签或者标签样本。训练数据集是机器学习重要的部分之一，模型训练本质上就是从训练数据中学习它的某些特征，使得AI模型的输出尽可能接近目标输出，如AI模型的输出与目标输出之间的差异尽可能地小。训练数据集的构成与选取，在一定程度上可以决定训练出来的AI模型的性能。The training data set is used for training the AI model. The training data set can include the input of the AI model, or include the input and target output of the AI model. The training data set includes one or more training data. The training data may be training samples input to the AI model, or may be the target output of the AI model. Among them, the target output can also be called a label or a label sample. The training data set is one of the important parts of machine learning. Model training is essentially to learn some of its features from the training data so that the output of the AI model is as close as possible to the target output, such as the difference between the output of the AI model and the target output. The difference is as small as possible. The composition and selection of training data sets can, to a certain extent, determine the performance of the trained AI model.
对于本公开中涉及自编码器而言，训练数据仅包括输入至自编器中编码器的训练样本，或者说训练样本就是标签样本。For the autoencoder involved in this disclosure, the training data only includes training samples input to the encoder in the autoencoder, or the training samples are label samples.
另外，在AI模型(如神经网络)的训练过程中，可以定义损失函数。损失函数描述了AI模型的输出值与目标输出值之间的差距或差异。本公开并不限制损失函数的具体形式。AI模型的训练过程就是通过调整AI模型的模型参数，使得损失函数的取值小于门限，或者使得损失函数的取值满足目标需求的过程。例如，AI模型为神经网络，调整神经网络的模型参数包括调整如下参数中的至少一种：神经网络的层数、宽度、神经元的权值、或神经元的激活函数中的参数。In addition, during the training process of AI models (such as neural networks), a loss function can be defined. The loss function describes the gap or difference between the output value of the AI model and the target output value. This disclosure does not limit the specific form of the loss function. The training process of the AI model is the process of adjusting the model parameters of the AI model so that the value of the loss function is less than the threshold, or the value of the loss function meets the target requirements. For example, the AI model is a neural network, and adjusting the model parameters of the neural network includes adjusting at least one of the following parameters: the number of layers of the neural network, the width, the weight of the neuron, or the parameters in the activation function of the neuron.
推理数据可以作为已训练好的AI模型的输入，用于AI模型的推理。在模型推理过程中，将推理数据输入AI模型，可以得到对应的输出即为推理结果。Inference data can be used as input to the trained AI model for inference of the AI model. During the model inference process, the inference data is input into the AI model, and the corresponding output can be obtained, which is the inference result.
A4，AI模型的设计A4, design of AI model
AI模型的设计主要包括数据收集环节(例如收集训练数据和/或推理数据)、模型训练环节以及模型推理环节。进一步地还可以包括推理结果应用环节。参见图2C示意一种AI应用框架。在前述数据收集环节中，数据源(data source)用于提供训练数据集和推理数据。在模型训练环节中，通过对数据源提供的训练数据(training data)进行分析或训练，得到AI模型。其中，AI模型表征了模型的输入和输出之间的映射关系。通过模型训练节点学习得到AI模型，相当于利用训练数据学习得到模型的输入和输出之间的映射关系。在模型推理环节中，使用经由模型训练环节训练后的AI模型，基于数据源提供的推理数据进行推理，得到推理结果。该环节还可以理解为：将推理数据输入到AI模型，通过AI模型得到输出，该输出即为推理结果。该推理结果可以指示：由执行对象使用(执行)的配置参数、和/或由执行对象执行的操作。在推理结果应用环节中进行推理结果的发布，例如推理结果可以由执行(actor)实体统一规划，例如执行实体可以发送推理结果给一个或多个执行对象(例如，核心网设备、接入网设备、终端设备或网管等)去执行。又如执行实体还可以反馈模型的性能给数据源，便于后续实施模型的更新训练。The design of AI models mainly includes data collection links (such as collecting training data and/or inference data), model training links, and model inference links. It may further include an application link of the reasoning results. Refer to Figure 2C to illustrate an AI application framework. In the aforementioned data collection process, data sources are used to provide training data sets and inference data. In the model training process, the AI model is obtained by analyzing or training the training data (training data) provided by the data source. Among them, the AI model represents the mapping relationship between the input and output of the model. Learning an AI model through model training nodes is equivalent to using training data to learn the mapping relationship between the input and output of the model. In the model inference link, the AI model trained through the model training link is used to perform inference based on the inference data provided by the data source to obtain the inference results. This link can also be understood as: input the inference data into the AI model, obtain the output through the AI model, and the output is the inference result. The inference result may indicate: configuration parameters used (executed) by the execution object, and/or operations performed by the execution object. The inference results are released in the inference result application link. For example, the inference results can be planned uniformly by the execution (actor) entity. For example, the execution entity can send the inference results to one or more execution objects (for example, core network equipment, access network equipment). , terminal equipment or network management, etc.) to execute. For another example, the execution entity can also feed back the performance of the model to the data source to facilitate the subsequent update and training of the model.
可以理解的是，在通信***中可以包括具备人工智能功能的网元。上述AI模型设计相关的环节可以由一个或多个具备人工智能功能的网元执行。一种可能的设计中，可以在通信***中已有网元内配置AI功能(如AI模块或者AI实体)来实现AI相关的操作，例如AI模型的训练和/或推理。例如该已有网元可以是接入网设备(如gNB)、终端设备、核心网设备、或网管等。操作主要完成日常网络和业务进行的分析、预测、规划和配置工作；维护主要是对网络及其业务的测试和故障管理等进行的日常操作活动，网管可以检测网络运行状态、优化网络连接和性能，提升网络运行稳定性，降低网络维护成本。或者另一种可能的设计中，也可以在通信***中引入独立的网元来执行AI相关的操作，如训练AI模型。该独立的网元可以称为AI网元或者AI节点等，本公开对此名称不进行限制。该AI网元可以和通信***中的接入网设备之间直接连接，也可以通过第三方网元和接入网设备实现间接连 接。其中，第三方网元可以是认证管理功能(authentication management function，AMF)网元、用户面功能(user plane function，UPF)网元等核心网网元、网管、云服务器或者其他网元，不予限制。示例性的，参见图3，示意一种通信***，该通信***包括接入网设备110，终端设备120和终端设备130；以及，图3示意的通信***中还引入了AI网元140。It is understandable that network elements with artificial intelligence functions may be included in the communication system. The above steps related to AI model design can be executed by one or more network elements with artificial intelligence functions. In one possible design, AI functions (such as AI modules or AI entities) can be configured in existing network elements in the communication system to implement AI-related operations, such as AI model training and/or inference. For example, the existing network element may be access network equipment (such as gNB), terminal equipment, core network equipment, or network management, etc. Operations mainly complete the analysis, prediction, planning and configuration of daily networks and services; maintenance mainly involves daily operational activities such as testing and fault management of the network and its services. The network manager can detect the network operating status and optimize network connections and performance. , improve network operation stability and reduce network maintenance costs. Or in another possible design, independent network elements can also be introduced into the communication system to perform AI-related operations, such as training AI models. The independent network element may be called an AI network element or an AI node, and this disclosure does not limit this name. The AI network element can be directly connected to the access network equipment in the communication system, or indirectly connected through a third-party network element and the access network equipment. catch. Among them, third-party network elements can be authentication management function (AMF) network elements, user plane function (UPF) network elements and other core network elements, network management, cloud servers or other network elements. They are not allowed. limit. For example, referring to Figure 3, a communication system is shown. The communication system includes an access network device 110, a terminal device 120 and a terminal device 130; and, the AI network element 140 is also introduced into the communication system shown in Figure 3.
本公开中，一个模型可以推理得到一个参数，或者推理得到多个参数。不同模型的训练过程可以部署在不同的设备或节点中，也可以部署在相同的设备或节点中。不同模型的推理过程可以部署在不同的设备或节点中，也可以部署在相同的设备或节点中。以终端设备完成模型训练环节为例，终端设备可以训练配套的编码器和解码器之后，将其中解码器的模型参数发送给接入网设备。以接入网设备完成模型训练环节为例，接入网设备在训练配套的编码器和解码器之后，可以将其中编码器的模型参数指示给终端设备。以独立的AI网元完成模型训练环节为例，AI网元可以训练配套的编码器和解码器之后，将其中编码器的模型参数发送给终端设备，将解码器的模型参数发送给接入网设备。进而在终端设备中进行编码器对应的模型推理环节，以及在接入网设备中进行解码器对应的模型推理环节。以除终端设备、接入网设备之外的其他已有网元(如网管、核心网网元)完成模型训练环节为例，其他已有网元可以训练配套的编码器和解码器之后，将其中编码器的模型参数发送给终端设备，将解码器的模型参数发送给接入网设备。进而在终端设备中进行编码器对应的模型推理环节，以及在接入网设备中进行解码器对应的模型推理环节。In this disclosure, a model can infer one parameter or multiple parameters. The training processes of different models can be deployed in different devices or nodes, or they can be deployed in the same device or node. The inference processes of different models can be deployed in different devices or nodes, or they can be deployed in the same device or node. Taking the terminal device completing the model training process as an example, the terminal device can train the supporting encoder and decoder and then send the model parameters of the decoder to the access network device. Taking the access network equipment completing the model training process as an example, the access network equipment can indicate the model parameters of the encoder to the terminal equipment after training the supporting encoder and decoder. Taking the independent AI network element completing the model training process as an example, the AI network element can train the supporting encoder and decoder, and then send the model parameters of the encoder to the terminal device and the model parameters of the decoder to the access network. equipment. Then, the model inference step corresponding to the encoder is performed in the terminal equipment, and the model inference step corresponding to the decoder is performed in the access network equipment. Take other existing network elements (such as network management and core network elements) other than terminal equipment and access network equipment to complete the model training process as an example. After other existing network elements can train supporting encoders and decoders, they will The model parameters of the encoder are sent to the terminal equipment, and the model parameters of the decoder are sent to the access network equipment. Then, the model inference step corresponding to the encoder is performed in the terminal equipment, and the model inference step corresponding to the decoder is performed in the access network equipment.
其中，模型参数可以包括如下的一种或多种模型的结构参数(例如模型的层数、和/或权值等)、模型的输入参数(如输入维度、输入端口数)、或模型的输出参数(如输出维度、输出端口数)。可以理解，输入维度可以指的是一个输入数据的大小，例如输入数据为一个序列时，该序列对应的输入维度可以指示该序列的长度。输入端口数可以指的是输入数据的数量。类似地，输出维度可以指的是一个输出数据的大小，例如输出数据为一个序列时，该序列对应的输出维度可以指示该序列的长度。输出端口数可以指的是输出数据的数量。Among them, the model parameters may include the structural parameters of one or more of the following models (such as the number of layers and/or weights of the model, etc.), the input parameters of the model (such as input dimensions, the number of input ports), or the output of the model. Parameters (such as output dimensions, number of output ports). It can be understood that the input dimension may refer to the size of an input data. For example, when the input data is a sequence, the input dimension corresponding to the sequence may indicate the length of the sequence. The number of input ports may refer to the amount of input data. Similarly, the output dimension can refer to the size of an output data. For example, when the output data is a sequence, the output dimension corresponding to the sequence can indicate the length of the sequence. The number of output ports can refer to the amount of output data.
进一步地，本公开还提供如图4A～图4D示意的几种网络架构，以在接入网设备中进行模型训练和/或推理为例，对接入网设备中进行模型训练和/或推理的功能模块进行了划分。Further, the present disclosure also provides several network architectures as shown in Figures 4A to 4D, taking model training and/or inference in access network equipment as an example, and performing model training and/or inference in access network equipment. The functional modules are divided.
如图4A中的(a)所示，第一种可能的实现中，接入网设备中包括近实时接入网智能控制(RAN intelligent controller，RIC)模块，用于进行模型学习和/或推理。例如，近实时RIC可以从CU、DU和RU中的至少一个获得网络侧和/或终端侧的信息，该信息可以包括训练数据或者推理数据。例如，近实时RIC可以用于进行模型的训练，还可以利用训练好的模型进行推理。此外可选的，近实时RIC可以将推理结果递交至CU、DU和RU中的至少一个。可选的，CU和DU之间可以交互推理结果。可选的，DU和RU之间可以交互推理结果，例如近实时RIC将推理结果递交至DU，由DU递交给RU。As shown in (a) in Figure 4A, in the first possible implementation, the access network equipment includes a near-real-time access network intelligent control (RAN intelligent controller, RIC) module for model learning and/or inference. . For example, the near real-time RIC may obtain network side and/or terminal side information from at least one of CU, DU and RU, and the information may include training data or inference data. For example, near-real-time RIC can be used for model training, and the trained model can also be used for inference. Additionally optionally, the near real-time RIC may submit the inference results to at least one of CU, DU and RU. Optionally, CU and DU can interact with inference results. Optionally, inference results can be exchanged between DU and RU. For example, near-real-time RIC submits inference results to DU, and DU submits them to RU.
如图4A中的(b)所示，第二种可能的实现中，在通信***中，接入网设备之外可以包括非实时RIC，可选的，该非实时RIC可以位于OAM中或核心网设备中。该非实时RIC用于进行模型学习和推理。例如，非实时RIC可以从CU、DU和RU中的至少一个获得网络侧和/或终端侧的信息，该信息可以包括训练数据或者推理数据。例如，非实时RIC用于进行模型的训练，还可以利用训练好的模型进行推理。此外可选的，非实时RIC可以将推理结果递交至CU、DU和RU中的至少一个。可选的，CU和DU之间可以交互推理结果。可选的，DU和RU之间可以交互推理结果，例如非实时RIC将推理结果递交至DU，由DU递交给RU。As shown in (b) in Figure 4A, in the second possible implementation, in the communication system, a non-real-time RIC can be included outside the access network equipment. Optionally, the non-real-time RIC can be located in the OAM or core. network equipment. This non-real-time RIC is used for model learning and inference. For example, the non-real-time RIC may obtain network-side and/or terminal-side information from at least one of CU, DU, and RU, and the information may include training data or inference data. For example, non-real-time RIC is used for model training, and the trained model can also be used for inference. Additionally optionally, the non-real-time RIC may submit the inference results to at least one of CU, DU and RU. Optionally, CU and DU can interact with inference results. Optionally, inference results can be exchanged between DU and RU. For example, non-real-time RIC submits inference results to DU, and DU submits them to RU.
如图4A中的(c)所示，第三种可能的实现中，接入网设备中包括近实时RIC，接入网设备之外还包括非实时RIC。可选的，非实时RIC可以位于OAM中或者核心网设备中。一种可能的设计中，非实时RIC可以用于进行模型训练，近实时RIC可以从非实时RIC获得训练好的AI模型的模型参数，并从CU、DU和RU中的至少一个获得网络侧和/或终端侧的信息，利用该信息和该训练好的AI模型得到推理结果。进而近实时RIC还可以将推理结果递交至CU、DU和RU中的至少一个，可选的，CU和DU之间可以交互推理结果，可选的，DU和RU之间可以交互推理结果，例如近实时RIC将推理结果递交至DU，由DU递交给RU。或者一种可能的设计中，近实时RIC用于进行模型的训练以及利用训练好的模型进行推理，非实时RIC不参与该模型的训练或推理；或者，非实时RIC用于进行模型的训练以及利用训练好的模型进行推理，实时RIC不参与该模型的训练或推理。或者一种可能的设计中，近实时RIC用于进行模型的训练，以及将训练好的AI模型的模型参数发送给非实时RIC，非 实时RIC利用训练好的模型进行推理。As shown in (c) in Figure 4A, in the third possible implementation, the access network equipment includes near-real-time RIC, and the access network equipment also includes non-real-time RIC. Optionally, the non-real-time RIC can be located in the OAM or core network equipment. In one possible design, non-real-time RIC can be used for model training. Near-real-time RIC can obtain the model parameters of the trained AI model from the non-real-time RIC, and obtain the network-side sum from at least one of CU, DU and RU. /Or information on the terminal side, use this information and the trained AI model to obtain inference results. Furthermore, the near real-time RIC can also submit the inference results to at least one of CU, DU and RU. Optionally, CU and DU can exchange inference results. Optionally, DU and RU can exchange inference results, for example. Near real-time RIC submits the inference results to DU, and DU submits them to RU. Or in a possible design, near-real-time RIC is used for model training and inference using the trained model, and non-real-time RIC does not participate in the training or inference of the model; or, non-real-time RIC is used for model training and The trained model is used for inference, and real-time RIC does not participate in the training or inference of the model. Or in a possible design, near-real-time RIC is used to train the model and send the model parameters of the trained AI model to the non-real-time RIC. Real-time RIC utilizes trained models for inference.
图4B所示为本公开提供的方法能够应用的一种网络架构的示例图。相对图4A中的(c)，图4B中将CU分离为了CU-CP和CU-UP。FIG. 4B shows an example diagram of a network architecture to which the method provided by the present disclosure can be applied. Compared with (c) in Figure 4A, the CU is separated into CU-CP and CU-UP in Figure 4B.
图4C所示为本公开提供的方法能够应用的一种网络架构的示例图。如图4C所示，可选的，接入网设备中包括一个或多个AI实体，该AI实体的功能类似上述近实时RIC。可选的，OAM中包括一个或多个AI实体，该AI实体的功能类似上述非实时RIC。可选的，核心网设备中包括一个或多个AI实体，该AI实体的功能类似上述非实时RIC。当OAM和核心网设备中都包括AI实体时，他们各自的AI实体所训练得到的模型不同，和/或用于进行推理的模型不同。本公开中，模型不同可以包括以下至少一项不同：模型的结构参数(例如模型的层数、和/或权值等)、模型的输入参数、或模型的输出参数。Figure 4C shows an example diagram of a network architecture to which the method provided by the present disclosure can be applied. As shown in Figure 4C, optionally, the access network equipment includes one or more AI entities, and the function of the AI entity is similar to the above-mentioned near real-time RIC. Optionally, OAM includes one or more AI entities whose functions are similar to the above-mentioned non-real-time RIC. Optionally, the core network equipment includes one or more AI entities whose functions are similar to the above-mentioned non-real-time RIC. When both OAM and core network equipment include AI entities, the models trained by their respective AI entities are different, and/or the models used for inference are different. In this disclosure, differences in models may include at least one of the following differences: structural parameters of the model (such as the number of layers and/or weights of the model, etc.), input parameters of the model, or output parameters of the model.
图4D所示为本公开提供的方法能够应用的一种网络架构的示例图。相对图4C，图4D中的接入网设备分离为CU和DU。可选的，CU中可以包括AI实体，该AI实体的功能类似上述近实时RIC。可选的，DU中可以包括AI实体，该AI实体的功能类似上述近实时RIC。当CU和DU中都包括AI实体时，他们各自的AI实体所训练得到的模型不同，和/或用于进行推理的模型不同。可选的，还可以进一步将图4D中的CU拆分为CU-CP和CU-UP。可选的，CU-CP中可以部署有一个或多个AI模型。和/或，CU-UP中可以部署有一个或多个AI模型。可选的，图4C或图4D中，接入网设备的OAM和核心网设备的OAM可以分开独立部署。Figure 4D shows an example diagram of a network architecture to which the method provided by the present disclosure can be applied. Compared with Figure 4C, the access network equipment in Figure 4D is separated into CU and DU. Optionally, the CU may include an AI entity whose functions are similar to the above-mentioned near real-time RIC. Optionally, the DU may include an AI entity whose functions are similar to the above-mentioned near real-time RIC. When both CU and DU include AI entities, the models trained by their respective AI entities are different, and/or the models used for inference are different. Optionally, the CU in Figure 4D can be further divided into CU-CP and CU-UP. Optionally, one or more AI models can be deployed in CU-CP. And/or, one or more AI models may be deployed in CU-UP. Optionally, in Figure 4C or Figure 4D, the OAM of the access network device and the OAM of the core network device can be deployed independently.
本公开涉及信道状态信息(channel state information，CSI)的反馈技术。在上述通信***如LTE或者NR***中，接入网设备需要获取信道的信道状态信息CSI，以下行信道的CSI为例，接入网设备可以基于CSI决定调度终端设备的下行数据信道的资源、调制编码方案(modulation and coding scheme，MCS)以及预编码等配置。可以理解，CSI属于一种信道信息，是一种能够反映信道特征、信道质量的信息。其中，信道信息也可以称为信道响应。示例性地，CSI可采用信道矩阵表现，例如CSI包括信道矩阵，或者，CSI可以由信道的特征向量组成。在频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)通信场景中，由于上下行信道不具备互易性或者说无法保证上下行信道的互易性，接入网设备通常会向终端设备发送下行参考信号，终端设备根据接收到的下行参考信号进行信道测量、干扰测量估计下行信道信息，该下行信道信息包括CSI，进而反馈CSI给接入网设备。The present disclosure relates to feedback technology of channel state information (CSI). In the above communication system such as LTE or NR system, the access network device needs to obtain the channel state information CSI of the channel. Taking the CSI of the downlink channel as an example, the access network device can decide to schedule the resources of the downlink data channel of the terminal device based on the CSI. Configurations such as modulation and coding scheme (MCS) and precoding. It can be understood that CSI belongs to a kind of channel information, which is a kind of information that can reflect channel characteristics and channel quality. The channel information may also be called channel response. For example, the CSI may be represented by a channel matrix. For example, the CSI may include a channel matrix, or the CSI may be composed of a feature vector of a channel. In frequency division duplex (FDD) communication scenarios, since the uplink and downlink channels do not have reciprocity or cannot guarantee the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, the access network equipment usually sends downlink reference signals to the terminal equipment. , the terminal equipment performs channel measurement and interference measurement to estimate the downlink channel information based on the received downlink reference signal. The downlink channel information includes CSI, and then feeds back the CSI to the access network equipment.
一种传统的CSI反馈方式中，终端设备可以按照预定义或者接入网设备配置的方式，根据估计的CSI生成CSI报告并反馈给接入网设备。其中，下行参考信号包括信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal，CSI-RS)或者同步信号块(synchronizing signal/physical broadcast channel block，SSB)。CSI报告包括秩指示(rank indicator，RI)，信道质量指示(channel quality indicator，CQI)和预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicator，PMI)等反馈量。RI用于指示终端设备建议的下行传输层数，CQI用于指示终端设备判断的当前信道条件所能支持的调制编码方式，PMI用于指示终端设备建议的预编码，PMI所指示的预编码层数与RI对应，例如，如果RI为1，则PMI指示一层预编码；如果RI为N，则PMI指示N层预编码，N为大于1的正整数，可以理解，N层预编码分别对应于RI指示的N个下行传输层。由此可见，RI指示的下行传输层数越大，PMI的反馈开销越高，导致CSI的反馈开销较大。In a traditional CSI feedback method, the terminal device can generate a CSI report based on the estimated CSI and feed it back to the access network device in a predefined or configured manner by the access network device. Among them, the downlink reference signal includes channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) or synchronizing signal block (synchronizing signal/physical broadcast channel block, SSB). The CSI report includes feedback quantities such as rank indicator (rank indicator, RI), channel quality indicator (channel quality indicator, CQI), and precoding matrix indicator (precoding matrix indicator, PMI). RI is used to indicate the number of downlink transmission layers recommended by the terminal equipment, CQI is used to indicate the modulation and coding method that the current channel conditions judged by the terminal equipment can support, PMI is used to indicate the precoding recommended by the terminal equipment, and the precoding layer indicated by the PMI The number corresponds to RI. For example, if RI is 1, then PMI indicates one layer of precoding; if RI is N, then PMI indicates N layer precoding. N is a positive integer greater than 1. It can be understood that N layer precoding corresponds to The N downlink transmission layers indicated by RI. It can be seen that the larger the number of downlink transmission layers indicated by the RI, the higher the PMI feedback overhead, resulting in larger CSI feedback overhead.
将人工智能AI引入无线通信网络中，产生了一种基于AI的CSI反馈方式。将终端设备测量估计下行信道信息中的CSI记作原始CSI，终端设备利用AI模型对原始CSI进行压缩以及量化处理后发送给接入网设备，接入网设备利用AI模型对收到的压缩以及量化的CSI进行解量化以及解压缩，得到恢复的CSI。具体地，可以将自编码器引入CSI反馈，构造一种基于自编码器的CSI反馈方式。在CSI反馈场景中，自编码器是根据下行信道信息或者说下行信道信息中的原始CSI训练的，自编码器的训练数据集包括若干个原始CSI。自编码器的训练过程可以在如接入网设备、网管OAM或者核心网设备等模型训练节点中完成，进而模型训练节点可以将训练好的自编码器中的编码器部署在终端设备，以及将训练好的自编码器中的解码器部署在接入网设备。如图5A示意一种基于自编码器的CSI反馈方式，在终端设备部署中自编码器的编码器，该编码器具备压缩和量化功能，终端设备将原始CSI输入至该编码器，编码器输出基于原始CSI的量化CSI；在接入网设备中部署自编码器的解码器，该解码器具备解量化和解压缩功能。接入网设备将收到的基于原始CSI的量化CSI输入至解码器，解码器输出恢复的CSI。如图5B示意一种基于自编码器的CSI反馈方式，在终端设备部署中自编码器的编码 器，该编码器具备压缩功能及量化功能但压缩功能和量化功能分别由压缩器和量化器实现，终端设备将原始CSI输入至该编码器，该编码器中的压缩器输出基于原始CSI的压缩CSI；然后终端设备利用量化器对基于原始CSI的压缩CSI进行量化处理，得到基于原始CSI的量化CSI。在接入网设备中部署自编码器的解码器，该解码器具备解压缩功能及解量化功能，但解量化功能和解压缩功能分别由解量化器和解压器实现。接入网设备利用解量化器对收到的基于原始CSI的量化CSI进行解量化处理，得到解量化后的压缩CSI，进而接入网设备将解量化后的压缩CSI输入至解压器，解压器输出恢复的CSI。可选的，压缩器也可以替换描述为压缩模块、压缩单元或压缩装置；量化器也可以替换描述为量化模块、量化单元或量化装置；解量化器也可以替换描述为解量化模块、解量化单元或解量化装置；解压缩器也可以替换描述为解压缩模块、解压缩单元或解压缩装置。本公开对此不予限制。Introducing artificial intelligence AI into wireless communication networks creates an AI-based CSI feedback method. The CSI in the downlink channel information measured and estimated by the terminal equipment is recorded as the original CSI. The terminal equipment uses the AI model to compress and quantify the original CSI and then sends it to the access network equipment. The access network equipment uses the AI model to compress and quantize the received CSI. The quantized CSI is dequantized and decompressed to obtain the restored CSI. Specifically, the autoencoder can be introduced into CSI feedback to construct a CSI feedback method based on the autoencoder. In the CSI feedback scenario, the autoencoder is trained based on the downlink channel information or the original CSI in the downlink channel information. The training data set of the autoencoder includes several original CSIs. The training process of the autoencoder can be completed in model training nodes such as access network equipment, network management OAM or core network equipment, and then the model training node can deploy the encoder in the trained autoencoder on the terminal device, and The decoder in the trained autoencoder is deployed on the access network device. Figure 5A illustrates a CSI feedback method based on an autoencoder. In the deployment of terminal equipment, the encoder of the autoencoder has compression and quantization functions. The terminal equipment inputs the original CSI to the encoder, and the encoder outputs Quantized CSI based on original CSI; deploy an autoencoder decoder in the access network equipment, which has dequantization and decompression functions. The access network device inputs the received quantized CSI based on the original CSI to the decoder, and the decoder outputs the restored CSI. Figure 5B illustrates a CSI feedback method based on an autoencoder. The encoding of the autoencoder in terminal equipment deployment The encoder has a compression function and a quantization function, but the compression function and the quantization function are implemented by a compressor and a quantizer respectively. The terminal device inputs the original CSI to the encoder, and the compressor in the encoder outputs compression based on the original CSI. CSI; then the terminal device uses a quantizer to quantize the compressed CSI based on the original CSI to obtain quantized CSI based on the original CSI. Deploy the decoder of the autoencoder in the access network equipment. The decoder has decompression and dequantization functions, but the dequantization and decompression functions are implemented by the dequantizer and the decompressor respectively. The access network device uses the dequantizer to dequantize the received quantized CSI based on the original CSI to obtain the dequantized compressed CSI, and then the access network device inputs the dequantized compressed CSI to the decompressor, and the decompressor Output the recovered CSI. Optionally, the compressor can also be described as a compression module, compression unit or compression device; the quantizer can also be described as a quantization module, quantization unit or quantization device; the dequantizer can also be described as a dequantization module, dequantization unit or dequantization device; a decompressor may alternatively be described as a decompression module, decompression unit or decompression device. This disclosure is not limiting in this regard.
AI模型作为一种以数据为基础的技术，对于场景变化比较敏感，当AI模型部署的场景与训练该AI模型的训练数据对应的场景差异较大时，AI模型的性能可能会出现急剧降低。针对基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景而言，如果当前通信环境与训练自编码器时的通信环境差异较大，自编码器的性能可能会降低。自编码器的性能好坏会直接影响CSI的反馈以及恢复的准确性，如何对自编码器的性能进行监控成为一个值得研究的问题。As a data-based technology, AI models are sensitive to scene changes. When the scene where the AI model is deployed is significantly different from the scene corresponding to the training data used to train the AI model, the performance of the AI model may decrease sharply. For CSI feedback scenarios based on autoencoders, if the current communication environment is significantly different from the communication environment when training the autoencoder, the performance of the autoencoder may be reduced. The performance of the autoencoder will directly affect the feedback and recovery accuracy of CSI. How to monitor the performance of the autoencoder has become an issue worth studying.
相关技术中，一般通过比较编码器的输入(原始CSI)和解码器的输出(恢复的CSI)之间的差异，来确定自编码器的性能。例如，一种设计中，在终端设备中除编码器额外部署解码器，编码器和解码器匹配使用组成自编码器，终端设备将原始CSI输入至自编码器，自编码器的输出即为恢复的CSI。终端设备比较原始CSI和恢复的CSI之间的差异可以确定自编码器的性能。通常解码器的复杂度高于编码器，在终端设备运行编码器和解码器会增加终端设备的处理复杂度，且解码器可能涉及接入网设备的算法隐私，在终端设备中部署解码器会降低通信安全性。另一种设计中，终端设备将原始的CSI发送给接入网设备，接入网设备比较原始CSI和利用解码器恢复的CSI之间的差异确定自编码器的性能，这样的设计反而会造成CSI反馈开销增大。In the related art, the performance of the autoencoder is generally determined by comparing the difference between the input of the encoder (original CSI) and the output of the decoder (recovered CSI). For example, in one design, a decoder is deployed in addition to the encoder in the terminal device. The encoder and decoder are matched and used to form an autoencoder. The terminal device inputs the original CSI to the autoencoder, and the output of the autoencoder is the recovery CSI. The end device compares the difference between the original CSI and the recovered CSI to determine the performance of the autoencoder. Generally, the decoder is more complex than the encoder. Running the encoder and decoder on the terminal device will increase the processing complexity of the terminal device, and the decoder may involve the algorithm privacy of the access network device. Deploying the decoder in the terminal device will Reduce communication security. In another design, the terminal device sends the original CSI to the access network device, and the access network device compares the difference between the original CSI and the CSI restored by the decoder to determine the performance of the autoencoder. Such a design will cause CSI feedback overhead increases.
基于此，本公开提供一种自编码器的性能监控方案，以包括第一编码器和第一解码器的第一自编码器为例，第一编码器的输入包括原始信息，第一编码器的输出包括编码信息；第一解码器的输入包括编码信息，第一解码器的输出包括解码信息。利用第二编码器对第一解码器的输出进行处理，得到第二编码器的输出，第二编码器的输出包括重编码信息。进而通过比较第二编码器输出的重编码信息与第一编码器输出的编码信息之间的差异，间接确定自编码器的性能。本公开提供的自编码器的性能监控方案可以应用于基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景中，或者其他需要部署自编码器的场景。针对基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景而言，原始信息包括原始CSI。将第一编码器部署在终端设备，将第一解码器以及第二编码器部署在接入网设备，无需在终端设备中部署解码器，能够避免增加终端设备的处理复杂度并提升通信安全性；也无需传输大量原始CSI用于自编码器性能的监控，能够降低CSI开销。可以理解的是，本申请中的CSI反馈并不限于下行CSI反馈，也可以适用于上行CSI反馈，或是，物与物之间，如侧行链路SL，的CSI反馈。本申请中的CSI可以替换为信道信息。Based on this, the present disclosure provides a performance monitoring solution for an autoencoder. Taking the first autoencoder including a first encoder and a first decoder as an example, the input of the first encoder includes original information. The output of includes encoded information; the input of the first decoder includes encoded information, and the output of the first decoder includes decoded information. The output of the first decoder is processed by the second encoder to obtain the output of the second encoder, and the output of the second encoder includes re-encoding information. Then, the performance of the autoencoder is indirectly determined by comparing the difference between the re-encoding information output by the second encoder and the encoding information output by the first encoder. The autoencoder performance monitoring solution provided by this disclosure can be applied to autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenarios, or other scenarios that require the deployment of autoencoders. For the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario, the original information includes original CSI. Deploy the first encoder in the terminal device, and deploy the first decoder and the second encoder in the access network device. There is no need to deploy the decoder in the terminal device, which can avoid increasing the processing complexity of the terminal device and improve communication security. ; There is also no need to transmit a large amount of original CSI for autoencoder performance monitoring, which can reduce CSI overhead. It can be understood that the CSI feedback in this application is not limited to downlink CSI feedback, and may also be applied to uplink CSI feedback, or CSI feedback between things, such as sidelink SL. CSI in this application can be replaced by channel information.
本公开中，第二编码器可以是第一编码器本身，或者是与第一编码器功能相同的编码器。第一编码器和第二编码器的功能相同可以理解为：当第一编码器和第二编码器的输入相同数据时，第一编码器和第二编码器的输出相同，或第一编码器和第二编码器的输出差异小于预设阈值，但第一编码器和第二编码器的模型参数和/或应用的AI模型类型不同。此外，第一编码器和第二编码器的功能相同还可以包括：第一编码器具备压缩和量化功能时，第二编码器也需具备压缩和量化功能；或者，第一编码器具备压缩但不具备量化功能时，第二编码器具备压缩功能但不具备量化功能。In the present disclosure, the second encoder may be the first encoder itself, or an encoder with the same function as the first encoder. The same function of the first encoder and the second encoder can be understood as: when the input data of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, the outputs of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, or the first encoder The output difference between the first encoder and the second encoder is less than the preset threshold, but the model parameters and/or the applied AI model types of the first encoder and the second encoder are different. In addition, the functions of the first encoder and the second encoder may also be the same: when the first encoder has compression and quantization functions, the second encoder also needs to have compression and quantization functions; or, the first encoder has compression but When it does not have the quantization function, the second encoder has the compression function but does not have the quantization function.
为便于理解，下面首先对本公开提供的方案原理进行说明。以CSI反馈场景为例，在第一编码器和第二编码器均具备压缩和量化功能的情况下，前述原始信息包括原始信道信息，如原始CSI；编码信息包括基于原始CSI的量化CSI；解码信息包括恢复的CSI；重编码信息包括基于恢复的CSI的量化CSI。将原始CSI和恢复的CSI构成的集合称为信道空间，将基于原始CSI的量化CSI以及基于恢复的CSI的量化CSI构成的集合称为隐变量空间。信道空间的1个样本点表示1个原始CSI或1个恢复的CSI，隐变量空间的1个样本点表示1个基于原始CSI的量化CSI或1个基于恢复的CSI的量化CSI。第一编码器或第二编码器可以看作一个函数f(*)。该函数f(*)可以表示将信道空间中的1个样本点映射到隐变量空间的1个样本点，或者可以描述为隐变量空间中的1个样本点为信道空间中的1个样本点的投影。例如将原始CSI记作V，基于该原始CSI的量化CSI记作z，存在函数关系式：z＝f(V)。 将第一解码器看作一个函数g(*)，将对应于V的恢复的CSI记作存在函数关系式:进而基于该恢复的CSI的量化CSI可记作存在函数关系式：通常情况下，如由于量化过程不可逆等因素影响，恢复的CSI和原始CSI之间存在一定的差异。To facilitate understanding, the principle of the solution provided by this disclosure is first described below. Taking the CSI feedback scenario as an example, when both the first encoder and the second encoder have compression and quantization functions, the aforementioned original information includes original channel information, such as original CSI; the encoding information includes quantized CSI based on the original CSI; decoding The information includes restored CSI; the recoding information includes quantized CSI based on the restored CSI. The set of original CSI and restored CSI is called channel space, and the set of quantized CSI based on original CSI and quantized CSI based on restored CSI is called latent variable space. One sample point in the channel space represents one original CSI or one restored CSI, and one sample point in the latent variable space represents one quantized CSI based on the original CSI or one quantized CSI based on the restored CSI. The first encoder or the second encoder can be regarded as a function f(*). The function f(*) can represent mapping 1 sample point in the channel space to 1 sample point in the latent variable space, or it can be described as 1 sample point in the latent variable space is 1 sample point in the channel space projection. For example, the original CSI is denoted as V, and the quantized CSI based on the original CSI is denoted as z, and there is a functional relationship: z=f(V). Consider the first decoder as a function g(*), and denote the recovered CSI corresponding to V as There is a functional relationship: Then the quantized CSI based on the restored CSI can be written as There is a functional relationship: Usually, there is a certain difference between the restored CSI and the original CSI due to factors such as irreversibility of the quantization process.
如图6示意一种映射关系图，恢复的CSI和原始CSI之间的差异可以表示为其在信道空间对应样本点之间的距离则在隐变量空间中存在对应的可以表示基于恢复的CSI的量化CSI和基于原始的CSI的量化CSI之间的差异。于是，可以通过监控与z之间的差异，间接确定恢复的CSI和原始CSI V之间的差异，从而实现对自编码器的性能监控。可选的，可以采用如欧式距离，最小均方误差(mean square error，MSE)距离，或余弦相似度等计算方式，来衡量信道空间或隐变量空间中两个样本点之间的距离。其中，欧式距离指的是欧式空间中两点的距离，点r(r1,r2,…,rn)和点q(q1,q2,…,qn)欧式距离具体表示为MSE距离具体表示为同一空间中两个样本点的欧氏距离或MSE距离越小，则该两个样本点之间的距离或者说差异越小。同一空间中两个样本点的余弦相似度指的是该两个样本点的夹角的余弦值，0度角的余弦值是1，其他任何角度的余弦值均不大于1，余弦值的最小取值为-1。两个样本点对应的余弦值可以确定两个样本点是否大致指向相同的方向，同一空间中两个样本点的余弦相似度越大，则该两个样本点之间的距离或者说差异越小。As shown in Figure 6, a mapping relationship diagram is shown. The difference between the restored CSI and the original CSI can be expressed as the distance between corresponding sample points in the channel space. Then there is a corresponding corresponding The difference between the quantized CSI based on the restored CSI and the quantized CSI based on the original CSI can be expressed. Therefore, you can monitor The difference between z and indirectly determines the recovered CSI and the original CSI V, thereby enabling performance monitoring of the autoencoder. Optionally, calculation methods such as Euclidean distance, minimum mean square error (MSE) distance, or cosine similarity can be used to measure the distance between two sample points in the channel space or latent variable space. Among them, the Euclidean distance refers to the distance between two points in the Euclidean space. The Euclidean distance of point r(r 1 ,r 2 ,…,r n ) and point q(q 1 ,q 2 ,…,q n ) is specifically expressed as The MSE distance is specifically expressed as The smaller the Euclidean distance or MSE distance of two sample points in the same space, the smaller the distance or difference between the two sample points. The cosine similarity of two sample points in the same space refers to the cosine value of the angle between the two sample points. The cosine value of an angle of 0 degrees is 1. The cosine value of any other angle is not greater than 1. The minimum cosine value is The value is -1. The cosine values corresponding to two sample points can determine whether the two sample points point roughly in the same direction. The greater the cosine similarity between the two sample points in the same space, the smaller the distance or difference between the two sample points. .
信道空间中两个样本点之间的距离与其在隐变量空间的投影之间的距离存在关联。例如，信道空间中存在3个样本点(即V1，V2，V3)之间的距离满足如下关系：d(V1,V2)>d(V2,V3)，该V1，V2，V3在隐变量空间的投影分别记作z1，z2，z3。则z1，z2，z3之间的距离满足如下关系：d(z1,z2)>d(z2,z3)。这样的关联关系也可以描述为信道空间中样本点之间的距离与在隐变量空间中对应的投影之间的距离保持一致性，或也可以描述为信道空间中样本点之间的距离与在隐变量空间中对应的投影之间的距离保持正相关。图7给出几种情况显示信道空间中两个样本点之间的距离与其在隐变量空间的投影之间的距离存在的关联关系。其中，图7中以实线表示信道空间，虚线表示隐变量空间。图7中的(a)示意出了训练数据集对应的距离相关性，图7中的(b)示意出了测量数据集1对应的距离相关性。图7中的(c)示意出了测量数据集2对应的距离相关性。训练数据集包括若干个下行信道信息或者下行信道信息中的原始CSI，测试数据集1中包括与训练数据集分布相同如信道环境相同的若干个下行信道信息或者下行信道信息中的原始CSI，测试数据集2中包括与训练数据集分布不相同如信道环境不相同的若干个下行信道信息或者下行信道信息中的原始CSI。由此可见，通过计算恢复的CSI和原始的CSI在隐变量空间的投影之间的距离，可以间接估计恢复的CSI和原始的CSI之间的差异，从而基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景中实现对自编码器的性能监控。There is a correlation between the distance between two sample points in channel space and the distance between their projections in latent variable space. For example, the distance between three sample points (i.e., V1, V2, V3) in the channel space satisfies the following relationship: d(V1,V2)>d(V2,V3), and the V1, V2, and V3 are in the latent variable space The projections are denoted as z1, z2, z3 respectively. Then the distance between z1, z2, and z3 satisfies the following relationship: d(z1,z2)>d(z2,z3). Such a correlation can also be described as the distance between sample points in the channel space and the distance between the corresponding projections in the latent variable space are consistent, or it can also be described as the distance between the sample points in the channel space and the distance in the hidden variable space. The distances between corresponding projections in the latent variable space remain positively correlated. Figure 7 shows several situations showing the correlation between the distance between two sample points in the channel space and the distance between their projections in the latent variable space. Among them, the solid line in Figure 7 represents the channel space, and the dotted line represents the hidden variable space. (a) in Figure 7 illustrates the distance correlation corresponding to the training data set, and (b) in Figure 7 illustrates the distance correlation corresponding to the measurement data set 1. (c) in Figure 7 illustrates the distance correlation corresponding to measurement data set 2. The training data set includes several pieces of downlink channel information or the original CSI in the downlink channel information. The test data set 1 includes several pieces of downlink channel information or the original CSI in the downlink channel information that have the same distribution as the training data set, such as the same channel environment. The test Data set 2 includes several pieces of downlink channel information or original CSI in the downlink channel information whose distribution is different from that of the training data set, for example, the channel environment is different. It can be seen that by calculating the distance between the restored CSI and the original CSI in the projection of the latent variable space, the difference between the restored CSI and the original CSI can be indirectly estimated, thus realizing the CSI feedback scenario based on the autoencoder. Performance monitoring of autoencoders.
下面以第一设备和第二设备之间的交互为例，对本公开提供的自编码器的性能监控方案进行详细说明。其中，第一设备为负责监控自编码器的性能的设备，第一设备可以是使用解码器的模型推理节点或者用于训练自编码器的模型训练节点，第一设备中部署第二编码器和第一自编码器中的第一解码器；第二设备是使用编码器的模型推理节点，第二设备中部署第一自编码器中的第一编码器。作为示例，在基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景中，第一设备可以是接入网设备或用于训练自编码器的其他网元如网管OAM，核心网设备或独立的AI网元等，第二设备可以是终端设备。Taking the interaction between the first device and the second device as an example, the performance monitoring solution of the autoencoder provided by the present disclosure will be described in detail below. Among them, the first device is a device responsible for monitoring the performance of the autoencoder. The first device can be a model inference node using a decoder or a model training node used to train the autoencoder. The second encoder and the second encoder are deployed in the first device. The first decoder in the first autoencoder; the second device is a model inference node using the encoder, and the first encoder in the first autoencoder is deployed in the second device. As an example, in the CSI feedback scenario based on the autoencoder, the first device can be an access network device or other network elements used to train the autoencoder, such as network management OAM, core network equipment or independent AI network elements, etc. Chapter 1 The second device may be a terminal device.
如图8示意一种通信方法，主要包括如下流程。Figure 8 illustrates a communication method, which mainly includes the following processes.
S801，第一设备接收来自第二设备的M个第一编码信息。S801. The first device receives M pieces of first coded information from the second device.
具体地，有关第二设备确定M个第一编码信息中的任意一个第一编码信息的过程，可参照如下理解：第二设备利用第一编码器和输入至第一编码器的第一原始信息，确定第一编码信息。M个第一编码信息与M个第一原始信息一一对应。Specifically, the process by which the second device determines any one of the M first encoded information can be understood as follows: the second device uses the first encoder and the first original information input to the first encoder. , determine the first encoding information. The M pieces of first coded information correspond to the M pieces of first original information in a one-to-one manner.
在一种可能的设计中，第一编码器具备压缩和量化功能且输入所述第一编码器的原始信息直接输出压缩及量化后的信息。对于M个第一原始信息中的1个第一原始信息而言，可以理解的是：第一编码器可以对输入的1个第一原始信息进行压缩和量化处理，输出该1个第一原始信息对应的1个第一编码信息，该1个第一编码信息为量化后的信息。示例性的，以基于自编码器的信道信息反馈场景，如CSI反馈场景，为例，前述第一原始信息包括第二设备测量参考信号，如下行参考信号，估计出的第一原始信道信息；其中，该第一原始信道信息中包括原始CSI。对应于第一编码器的功能，第一编码信息可以包括基于原始CSI的量化CSI，第一编码信息具体为一个比特序列。此情况下，第一设备具 体接收到的是M个第一编码信息。In one possible design, the first encoder has compression and quantization functions, and the original information input to the first encoder directly outputs the compressed and quantized information. For one first original information among the M first original information, it can be understood that: the first encoder can compress and quantize the input one first original information, and output the one first original information. A piece of first coded information corresponding to the information, and the piece of first coded information is quantized information. Exemplarily, taking the autoencoder-based channel information feedback scenario, such as the CSI feedback scenario, as an example, the aforementioned first original information includes the first original channel information estimated by the second device measurement reference signal, such as the downlink reference signal; Wherein, the first original channel information includes original CSI. Corresponding to the function of the first encoder, the first coding information may include quantized CSI based on the original CSI, and the first coding information is specifically a bit sequence. In this case, the first equipment What the body receives is M first coded information.
在另一种可能的设计中，第一编码器具备压缩功能和量化功能，但量化功能和压缩功能分别由所述第一编码器所包括的第一量化器和第一压缩器完成，输入所述第一编码器的原始信息可以经由第一压缩器先获得压缩信息再经由第一量化器获得量化信息。这种情况下，本申请中的第一编码信息可以是指压缩后未经量化的信息，或者，是指压缩及量化后的信息。In another possible design, the first encoder has a compression function and a quantization function, but the quantization function and the compression function are respectively completed by the first quantizer and the first compressor included in the first encoder, and the input The original information of the first encoder may first obtain compressed information through the first compressor and then obtain quantized information through the first quantizer. In this case, the first coded information in this application may refer to information after compression without quantization, or may refer to information after compression and quantization.
针对第一编码信息可以是指压缩后未经量化的信息的情况，对于M个第一原始信息中的1个第一原始信息而言，可以理解的是：第一压缩器可以对输入的1个第一原始信息进行压缩处理，输出该1个第一原始信息对应的1个第一编码信息，该1个第一编码信息是未经量化的信息；进而，第二设备可以利用第一量化器对该1个第一编码信息进行量化处理，得到该1个第一编码信息对应的1个第一量化信息。其中，第一量化器的输入包括该1个第一编码信息，第一量化器的输出包括1个第一量化信息。示例性的，以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例，第一原始信息包括第二设备测量下行参考信号估计出的第一原始信道信息；其中，该第一原始信道信息中包括原始CSI。第一编码信息可以理解为基于原始CSI的压缩CSI，第一编码信息具体为一个浮点数序列。此情况下，第一设备具体接收到的是M个第一编码信息对应M个第一量化信息。Regarding the situation where the first encoded information may refer to information that has not been quantized after compression, for one first original information among the M first original information, it can be understood that: the first compressor may Perform compression processing on a first original information, and output a first encoded information corresponding to the first original information. The first encoded information is unquantized information; furthermore, the second device can use the first quantization The processor performs quantization processing on the piece of first coded information to obtain a piece of first quantized information corresponding to the piece of first coded information. The input of the first quantizer includes the first encoding information, and the output of the first quantizer includes the first quantization information. Illustratively, taking the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario as an example, the first original information includes the first original channel information estimated by the second device by measuring the downlink reference signal; wherein the first original channel information includes the original CSI. The first coding information can be understood as compressed CSI based on the original CSI, and the first coding information is specifically a floating point number sequence. In this case, what the first device specifically receives is M pieces of first coding information corresponding to M pieces of first quantization information.
而针对第一编码信息可以是指压缩及量化后的信息的情况，即，第一编码信息为第一量化信息的情况，对于M个第一原始信息中的1个第一原始信息而言，第一压缩器可以对输入的1个第一原始信息进行压缩处理，输出该1个第一原始信息对应的1个第一压缩信息，该1个第一压缩信息是未经量化的信息；进而，第二设备可以利用第一量化器对该1个第一压缩信息进行量化处理，得到该1个第一压缩信息对应的1个第一量化信息。其中，第一量化器的输入包括该1个第一压缩信息，第一量化器的输出包括1个第一量化信息。示例性的，以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例，第一原始信息包括第二设备测量下行参考信号估计出的第一原始信道信息；其中，该第一原始信道信息中包括原始CSI。第一压缩信息可以理解为基于原始CSI的压缩CSI，第一压缩信息具体为一个浮点数序列。此情况下，第一设备具体接收到的是M个第一压缩信息对应的M个第一量化信息，而该M个第一量化信息即为M个第一编码信息。As for the case where the first coded information may refer to compressed and quantized information, that is, the case where the first coded information is the first quantized information, for one first original information among the M pieces of first original information, The first compressor can perform compression processing on the input first original information, and output a first compressed information corresponding to the first original information, and the first compressed information is unquantized information; and then , the second device can use the first quantizer to perform quantization processing on the piece of first compressed information, and obtain a piece of first quantized information corresponding to the piece of first compressed information. The input of the first quantizer includes the first compression information, and the output of the first quantizer includes the first quantization information. Exemplarily, taking the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario as an example, the first original information includes the first original channel information estimated by the second device by measuring the downlink reference signal; wherein the first original channel information includes the original CSI. The first compressed information can be understood as compressed CSI based on the original CSI, and the first compressed information is specifically a floating point number sequence. In this case, what the first device specifically receives is M pieces of first quantized information corresponding to M pieces of first compressed information, and the M pieces of first quantized information are M pieces of first encoded information.
在本申请的以下描述中，第一编码信息具体是以上哪种情况，不予赘述，无论哪种情况，均可适用。In the following description of the present application, which of the above situations the first encoded information is specifically will not be described in detail. No matter which situation is applicable, it is applicable.
本公开中，量化器可以是如下中的一种：非均匀量化器、标量量化器、矢量量化器、根据经验设计的量化器、通过AI训练得到的量化器，该量化器可以与第一编码器一起进行训练。量化处理也可以称作量化操作，量化处理可以理解为在量化字典中寻找与待量化的量最接近的项，并输出该项的索引。例如，本设计中待量化的量为第一压缩信息，经由查询量化字典输出的索引包含于该第一压缩信息对应的第一量化信息。可选的，可以预配置第二设备使用的第一量化器，如采用协议定义的方式实现预配置，或者第二设备与第一设备预先协商一个第一量化器。或者可选的，第二设备也可以自行决定使用的第一量化器，并向第一设备发送用于指示其使用的第一量化器的信息。In the present disclosure, the quantizer may be one of the following: a non-uniform quantizer, a scalar quantizer, a vector quantizer, a quantizer designed based on experience, or a quantizer obtained through AI training. The quantizer may be combined with the first encoder Train together. Quantization processing can also be called quantization operation. Quantization processing can be understood as finding the item closest to the quantity to be quantified in the quantization dictionary and outputting the index of the item. For example, the quantity to be quantized in this design is the first compressed information, and the index output by querying the quantization dictionary is included in the first quantized information corresponding to the first compressed information. Optionally, the first quantizer used by the second device may be pre-configured, for example, in a protocol-defined manner, or the second device and the first device may pre-negotiate a first quantizer. Or optionally, the second device can also decide on its own the first quantizer to use, and send information indicating the first quantizer to use to the first device.
可以理解的是，第二设备发送的M个第一编码信息(或M个第一量化信息)是经过信道传输至第一设备的，第一设备接收到的M个第一编码信息(或M个第一量化信息)与第二设备发送的M个第一编码信息(或M个第一量化信息)之间可能存在一定的传输损耗，或者可以理解第一设备接收到的M个第一编码信息(或M个第一量化信息)与第二设备发送的M个第一编码信息(或M个第一量化信息)之间存在一定的差异。本公开对该传输损耗或差异忽略不计，或者说本公开提供的方法不受该传输损耗或差异的限制。It can be understood that the M pieces of first coded information (or M pieces of first quantized information) sent by the second device are transmitted to the first device through the channel, and the M pieces of first coded information (or M pieces of first quantized information) received by the first device There may be a certain transmission loss between the M first quantized information) and the M first coded information (or M first quantized information) sent by the second device, or it may be understood that the M first codes received by the first device There is a certain difference between the information (or M first quantized information) and the M first encoded information (or M first quantized information) sent by the second device. The present disclosure ignores the transmission loss or difference, or the method provided by the present disclosure is not limited by the transmission loss or difference.
具体地，M为正整数。M的取值可以由第一设备自行决定。可选的，第一设备可以基于连续接收的第一编码信息来监控自编码器的性能，M的取值具体可对应于第一设备判断自编码器性能的频次。例如第一设备每收到一个第一编码信息时，判断一次自编码器的性能，则M为1。又如第一设备收到指定数量的第一编码信息时，判断一次自编码器的性能，则M的取值为前述指定数量。又如，第一设备每隔指定时长判断自编码器的性能，则M的取值为前述指定时长内第二设备发送的第一编码信息的数量。或者可选的，第一设备也可以基于非连续接收的第一编码信息来监控自编码器的性能。例如每隔指定时长或每隔设定数量个第一编码信息后接收M个第一编码信息，基于该M个第一编码信息判断一次自编码器的性能，其中M大于或等于1。Specifically, M is a positive integer. The value of M can be determined by the first device. Optionally, the first device may monitor the performance of the autoencoder based on the continuously received first encoding information, and the value of M may specifically correspond to the frequency with which the first device determines the performance of the autoencoder. For example, every time the first device receives a first encoding information, it judges the performance of the autoencoder, and M is 1. In another example, when the first device receives a specified number of first encoding information and determines the performance of the primary autoencoder, the value of M is the aforementioned specified number. For another example, if the first device judges the performance of the autoencoder every specified time period, the value of M is the number of first encoding information sent by the second device within the aforementioned specified time period. Or optionally, the first device may also monitor the performance of the autoencoder based on the discontinuously received first encoding information. For example, M pieces of first encoding information are received every specified time period or every set number of pieces of first encoding information, and the performance of the autoencoder is judged based on the M pieces of first encoding information, where M is greater than or equal to 1.
S802，第一设备利用第一解码器和所述M个第一编码信息，确定M个第一解码信息。S802: The first device uses the first decoder and the M pieces of first encoding information to determine the M pieces of first decoding information.
其中，第一解码器和第一编码器属于同一个自编码器，如记作第一自编码器。可以理解的是，可以 预先定义第一设备使用第一自编码器中的第一解码器，第二设备使用第一自编码器中的第一编码器。或者第二设备在发送M个第一编码信息时，向第一设备指示如下中的一个或多个：第一编码器、第一解码器、第一自编码器。Among them, the first decoder and the first encoder belong to the same autoencoder, such as being recorded as the first autoencoder. Understandably, yes It is predefined that the first device uses the first decoder in the first autoencoder, and the second device uses the first encoder in the first autoencoder. Or when sending M pieces of first encoding information, the second device indicates one or more of the following to the first device: a first encoder, a first decoder, or a first autoencoder.
可以理解，M个第一解码信息与M个第一编码信息一一对应，M个第一解码信息与M个第一原始信息一一对应。如M个第一解码信息中的第i个第一解码信息对应M个第一原始信息中的第i个第一原始信息，第i个第一解码信息是第一设备中恢复出的第i个第一原始信息。i为1至M中的任意一个正整数，或者描述为i取遍1至M的正整数。以基于自编器的CSI反馈场景为例，第一解码信息具体可以指的是恢复的CSI。It can be understood that the M pieces of first decoded information are in one-to-one correspondence with the M pieces of first encoded information, and the M pieces of first decoded information are in one-to-one correspondence with the M pieces of first original information. For example, the i-th first decoded information among the M pieces of first decoded information corresponds to the i-th first original information among the M pieces of first original information, and the i-th first decoded information is the i-th piece of first decoded information recovered from the first device. the first original information. i is any positive integer from 1 to M, or it can be described as a positive integer from 1 to M. Taking the auto-programmer-based CSI feedback scenario as an example, the first decoding information may specifically refer to the recovered CSI.
如果S801第一设备发送的M个第一编码信息为量化的信息。在一种可能的设计中，第一解码器具备解量化及解压缩功能。第一设备可以将M个第一编码信息并行或串行输入至第一解码器，第一解码器可以输出M个第一解码信息。在另一种可能的设计中，第一解码器具备解压缩功能及解量化功能，且解量化功能和解压缩功能分别由该第一解码器包括的第一解量化器和第一解压缩器来实现。第一设备可以先利用第一解量化器对M个第一编码信息进行解量化，得到M个第一编码信息对应的M个解量化信息；进而，第一设备将该M个解量化信息并行或串行输入至第一解压缩器，该第一解压缩器输出对应的M个第一解码信息。示例性的，以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例，第一编码信息对应的解量化信息包括解量化后的压缩CSI。If S801, the M pieces of first coded information sent by the first device are quantized information. In a possible design, the first decoder has dequantization and decompression functions. The first device may input M pieces of first encoded information to the first decoder in parallel or serially, and the first decoder may output M pieces of first decoded information. In another possible design, the first decoder has a decompression function and a dequantization function, and the dequantization function and the decompression function are respectively provided by a first dequantizer and a first decompressor included in the first decoder. accomplish. The first device may first use the first dequantizer to dequantize the M pieces of first coded information to obtain M pieces of dequantized information corresponding to the M pieces of first coded information; then, the first device parallelizes the M pieces of dequantized information. Or it is serially input to the first decompressor, and the first decompressor outputs corresponding M pieces of first decoded information. Exemplarily, taking the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario as an example, the dequantization information corresponding to the first encoding information includes dequantized compressed CSI.
如果S801中的M个第一编码信息是为未经量化的信息，第二设备发送的是M个第一编码信息对应的M个第一量化信息。在一种可能的设计中，第一解码器具备解量化及解压缩功能。第一设备可以将M个第一量化信息并行或串行输入至第一解码器，第一解码器可以输出M个第一解码信息。在另一种可能的设计中，第一解码器具备解压缩功能及解量化功能但解压缩功能和解量化功能分别由第一解码器所包括的第一解压器和第一解量化器实现。第一设备可以先利用可以第一解量化器对M个第一量化信息进行解量化，恢复M个第一压缩信息；进而，第一设备将该M个第一压缩信息并行或串行输入至第一解压器，第一解压器输出对应的M个第一解压信息。该M个第一解压信息也即M个第一解码信息。示例性的，以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例，第二设备利用第一编码器得到的第一编码信息包括基于原始CSI的压缩CSI；第一量化信息包括基于原始CSI的量化CSI；第一设备利用解量化器恢复的第一编码信息包括解量化后的压缩CSI。If the M pieces of first coded information in S801 are unquantized information, the second device sends M pieces of first quantized information corresponding to the M pieces of first coded information. In a possible design, the first decoder has dequantization and decompression functions. The first device may input M pieces of first quantized information to the first decoder in parallel or serially, and the first decoder may output M pieces of first decoded information. In another possible design, the first decoder has a decompression function and a dequantization function, but the decompression function and dequantization function are respectively implemented by the first decompressor and the first dequantizer included in the first decoder. The first device may first use a first dequantizer to dequantize the M pieces of first quantized information and restore the M pieces of first compressed information; furthermore, the first device may input the M pieces of first compressed information in parallel or serially to The first decompressor outputs corresponding M pieces of first decompressed information. The M pieces of first decompressed information are also M pieces of first decoded information. Exemplarily, taking the CSI feedback scenario based on an autoencoder as an example, the first encoding information obtained by the second device using the first encoder includes compressed CSI based on the original CSI; the first quantization information includes quantized CSI based on the original CSI; The first encoded information restored by the first device using the dequantizer includes dequantized compressed CSI.
可以理解的是，前述第一解量化器与S801中的第一量化器匹配使用，第一解量化器可以理解为第一量化器的逆操作。例如，第一解量化器的输入包括M个第一量化信息，输出包括M个第一编码信息。具体地，对应第一量化器为预配置的情况，可以理解的是第一解量化器也是预配置的。或者如果第二设备发送了用于指示第一量化器的信息，第一设备可以根据该用于指示第一量化器的信息，确定匹配的第一解量化器。It can be understood that the aforementioned first dequantizer is used in conjunction with the first quantizer in S801, and the first dequantizer can be understood as the inverse operation of the first quantizer. For example, the input of the first dequantizer includes M pieces of first quantization information, and the output includes M pieces of first encoding information. Specifically, corresponding to the situation where the first quantizer is preconfigured, it can be understood that the first dequantizer is also preconfigured. Or if the second device sends information indicating the first quantizer, the first device can determine the matching first dequantizer based on the information indicating the first quantizer.
S803，第一设备利用第二编码器和输入第二编码器的M个第一解码信息，确定M个第一重编码信息。S803: The first device uses the second encoder and the M pieces of first decoding information input to the second encoder to determine M pieces of first re-encoding information.
其中，第二编码器可以是第一编码器或者与第一编码器功能相同的编码器。有关功能相同的定义可参照前文描述理解，本公开对此不再进行赘述。该M个第一重编码信息与所述M个第一解码信息一一对应，该M个第一重编码信息与所述M个第一编码信息一一对应。The second encoder may be the first encoder or an encoder with the same function as the first encoder. The definition of the same function can be understood with reference to the foregoing description, and will not be repeated in this disclosure. The M pieces of first re-encoded information correspond to the M pieces of first decoded information on a one-to-one basis, and the M pieces of first re-encoded information correspond to the M pieces of first encoded information on a one-to-one basis.
由于第一重编码信息是与第一编码信息可比较的信息，第一编码信息为量化信息的情况下，第一重编码信息为量化信息；第一编码信息为未经量化的信息的情况下，第一重编码信息为未经量化的信息。Since the first re-encoded information is information comparable to the first encoded information, when the first encoded information is quantized information, the first re-encoded information is quantized information; when the first encoded information is unquantized information , the first re-encoded information is unquantized information.
在一种可能的设计中，第二编码器具备压缩和量化功能且压缩和量化功能由同一个模块实现，第一设备可以将M个第一解码信息并行或串行输入至第二编码器，第二编码器可以输出M个第一重编码信息，该M个第一重编码信息为量化的信息。以在基于自编器的CSI反馈场景为例，M个第一重编码信息中1个第一重编码信息可以包括基于恢复的1个CSI的量化CSI。In a possible design, the second encoder has compression and quantization functions and the compression and quantization functions are implemented by the same module. The first device can input M pieces of first decoded information to the second encoder in parallel or serially, The second encoder may output M pieces of first re-encoded information, where the M pieces of first re-encoded information are quantized information. Taking the auto-programmer-based CSI feedback scenario as an example, one of the M first re-encoding information may include quantized CSI based on one recovered CSI.
另一种可能的设计中，第二编码器具备压缩功能及量化功能且压缩功能和量化功能分别由该第二编码器所包括的第二压缩器和第二量化器来实现。第一设备可以将M个第一解码信息并行或串行输入至第二压缩器，第二压缩器可以输出M个第一重压缩信息。第一设备可以利用第二量化器对M个第一重压缩信息进行量化处理，得到M个第一重量化信息。该M个第一重编码信息可以为所述M个第一重压缩信息，或者，M个第一重量化信息，具体与第一编码信息是否为量化后的信息相对应。以在基于自编器的CSI反馈场景为例，M个第一重压缩信息中1个第一重压缩信息可以包括基于恢复的1个 CSI的压缩CSI；M个第一重量化信息中1个第一重量化信息可以包括基于恢复的1个CSI的量化CSI。In another possible design, the second encoder has a compression function and a quantization function, and the compression function and the quantization function are respectively implemented by a second compressor and a second quantizer included in the second encoder. The first device may input M pieces of first decoded information to the second compressor in parallel or serially, and the second compressor may output M pieces of first heavily compressed information. The first device may use the second quantizer to perform quantization processing on M pieces of first re-compressed information to obtain M pieces of first re-compressed information. The M pieces of first re-encoded information may be the M pieces of first re-compressed information, or M pieces of first re-encoded information, specifically corresponding to whether the first encoded information is quantized information. Taking the auto-programmer-based CSI feedback scenario as an example, one of the M first-level compressed information may include one based on recovery. Compressed CSI of CSI; one of the M first reweighted information may include quantized CSI based on the recovered 1 CSI.
S804，第一设备根据M个第一编码信息与M个第一重编码信息之间的差异，确定第一自编码器的性能。S804: The first device determines the performance of the first autoencoder based on the difference between the M pieces of first encoding information and the M pieces of first re-encoding information.
其中，当第一编码器和第二编码器均具备压缩以及量化功能且压缩及量化功能由同一个模块实现时，该步骤S804中的M个第一编码信息和M个第一重编码信息均为量化的信息，第一设备计算的是第一设备收到的M个第一编码信息与M个第一重编码信息之间的差异。例如在CSI反馈场景中，M个第一原始信息中的1个第一原始信息包括第一原始信道信息，如原始CSI。M个第一编码信息中的1个第一编码信息包括基于原始CSI的量化CSI；M个第一重编码信息中的1个第一重编码信息包括基于恢复的CSI的量化CSI。第一设备通过比较M个基于原始CSI的量化CSI和M个基于恢复的CSI的量化CSI之间的差异，可以确定第一自编码器的性能。Among them, when both the first encoder and the second encoder have compression and quantization functions and the compression and quantization functions are implemented by the same module, the M first encoding information and the M first re-encoding information in step S804 are both For quantified information, the first device calculates the difference between the M pieces of first encoded information and the M pieces of first re-encoded information received by the first device. For example, in a CSI feedback scenario, one of the M pieces of first original information includes first original channel information, such as original CSI. One first coding information among the M pieces of first coding information includes quantized CSI based on the original CSI; one piece of first recoding information among the M pieces of first recoding information includes quantized CSI based on the recovered CSI. The first device may determine the performance of the first autoencoder by comparing differences between the M quantized CSIs based on the original CSI and the M quantized CSIs based on the recovered CSIs.
当第一编码器和第二编码器均具备压缩功能及量化功能且压缩功能和量化功能分别由不同模块实现时，该步骤S804中的M个第一编码信息和M个第一重编码信息可以均为未经量化的信息，或，均为经量化的信息。参见S801中的描述，以M个第一编码信息和M个第一重编码信息均为未经量化的信息为例，此情况下第一设备收到的是M个第一编码信息对应的M个第一量化信息。第一设备可利用解量化器对M个第一量化信息进行处理，得到M个第一编码信息。第一设备计算的是第一设备解量化处理得到的M个第一编码信息与M个第一重编码信息之间的差异。例如在CSI反馈场景中，M个第一原始信息中的1个第一原始信息包括第一原始信道信息，如原始CSI。M个第一编码信息中的1个第一编码信息包括解量化后的压缩CSI；M个第一重编码信息中的1个第一重编码信息包括基于恢复的CSI的压缩CSI。第一设备通过比较M个解量化后的压缩CSI和M个基于恢复的CSI的压缩CSI之间的差异，可以确定第一自编码器的性能。When both the first encoder and the second encoder have a compression function and a quantization function and the compression function and the quantization function are respectively implemented by different modules, the M pieces of first encoding information and M pieces of first re-encoding information in step S804 can be All are unquantified information, or all are quantified information. Referring to the description in S801, take as an example that both the M first coded information and the M first re-coded information are unquantized information. In this case, the first device receives M corresponding to the M first coded information. the first quantitative information. The first device may use a dequantizer to process M pieces of first quantized information to obtain M pieces of first coded information. What the first device calculates is the difference between the M pieces of first encoded information and the M pieces of first re-encoded information obtained by dequantization processing by the first device. For example, in a CSI feedback scenario, one of the M pieces of first original information includes first original channel information, such as original CSI. One first coding information among the M pieces of first coding information includes dequantized compressed CSI; one piece of first recoding information among the M pieces of first recoding information includes compressed CSI based on the restored CSI. The first device may determine the performance of the first autoencoder by comparing differences between the M dequantized compressed CSIs and the M compressed CSIs based on the recovered CSIs.
此外一种可选的实施方式中，以M个第一编码信息和M个第一重编码信息均为经过量化的信息为例，第一设备可以利用量化器对M个第一重压缩信息进行量化处理，得到M个第一重量化信息，即，M个第一重编码信息。第一设备可以计算M个第一量化信息和M个第一重量化信息之间的差异，确定自编码器的性能。例如在CSI反馈场景中，M个第一原始信息中的1个第一原始信息包括第一原始信道信息，如原始CSI。M个第一量化信息中的1个第一量化信息包括基于原始CSI的量化CSI；M个第一重编码信息中的1个第一重编码信息包括基于恢复的CSI的压缩CSI，M个第一重量化信息中的1个第一重量化信息包括基于恢复的CSI的量化CSI。第一设备通过比较M个基于原始CSI的量化CSI和M个基于恢复的CSI的量化CSI之间的差异，可以确定第一自编码器的性能。In another optional implementation, taking the M pieces of first coded information and the M pieces of first re-encoded information as quantized information as an example, the first device can use a quantizer to perform the compression on the M pieces of first re-compressed information. After quantization processing, M pieces of first quantized information are obtained, that is, M pieces of first re-encoded information. The first device may calculate differences between the M pieces of first quantized information and the M pieces of first weighted information to determine the performance of the autoencoder. For example, in a CSI feedback scenario, one of the M pieces of first original information includes first original channel information, such as original CSI. One of the M first quantization information includes the quantized CSI based on the original CSI; one of the M first re-encoding information includes the compressed CSI based on the restored CSI, and the M-th first re-encoding information includes the compressed CSI based on the restored CSI. One of the first quantization information in the quantization information includes quantized CSI based on the restored CSI. The first device may determine the performance of the first autoencoder by comparing differences between the M quantized CSIs based on the original CSI and the M quantized CSIs based on the recovered CSIs.
具体地，下面依据M的不同取值，对于第一自编器的性能确定方式分情况进行说明。Specifically, based on different values of M, the performance determination method of the first self-editer will be described on a case-by-case basis.
情况一：M为1。如果所述1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数大于或等于第一阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，或如果所述1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数小于或等于第二阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值。Case 1: M is 1. If the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, or if the If the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is less than or equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value.
其中，第一阈值和第二阈值可以相等或者不相等。当第一阈值与第二阈值相等时，可以理解第一自编码器的性能对应第一值或第二值。当第一阈值与第二阈值不相等时，可以理解第一自编码器的性能除了可以对应第一值或第二值之外，也可以对应其他的值。不同值对应不同的性能定义，本公开对此并不限定。The first threshold and the second threshold may be equal or unequal. When the first threshold is equal to the second threshold, it can be understood that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value or the second value. When the first threshold and the second threshold are not equal, it can be understood that the performance of the first autoencoder can correspond to other values in addition to the first value or the second value. Different values correspond to different performance definitions, and this disclosure is not limiting.
一种可能的设计中，第一阈值和第二阈值是用于衡量第一编码信息和第一重编码信息之间差异的大小所设定的阈值。In a possible design, the first threshold and the second threshold are thresholds set to measure the difference between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information.
1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数包括1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异。示例性的，以隐变量空间中的样本点为例描述，1个第一编码信息表示为z，1个第一重编码信息表示为示例性的，以隐变量空间中的样本点为例描述。当第一阈值等于第二阈值时，第一阈值或第二阈值可以理解为隐变量空间样本点之间的距离差阈值D1。第一设备可以计算距离与D1之间的大小关系，来确定第一自编码器的性能。示例性的，采用欧氏距离或者MSE衡量两个样本点之间的距离时，与z之间的欧氏距离或者MSE越大，越大。采用余弦相似度衡量两个样本点之间的距离时，与z之间的余弦相似度越大，越小。当时，第一设备可以确定第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，第一值可以用于指示第一自编码器的性能不满足第一要求。时，第一设备可以确定第一自编码器的性能对应第二值，第二值可以用于指示第一自编码器的性能满足第一要求。 The difference parameter between one piece of first coded information and the one first re-coded information includes the difference between one piece of first coded information and the one first re-coded information. Illustratively, taking a sample point in the latent variable space as an example, one piece of first coding information is represented as z, and one piece of first recoding information is represented as Illustratively, the sample points in the latent variable space are used as an example to describe. When the first threshold is equal to the second threshold, the first threshold or the second threshold can be understood as the distance difference threshold D1 between sample points in the latent variable space. First device can calculate distance The size relationship with D1 is used to determine the performance of the first autoencoder. For example, when using Euclidean distance or MSE to measure the distance between two sample points, The greater the Euclidean distance or MSE between z and The bigger. When using cosine similarity to measure the distance between two sample points, The greater the cosine similarity between The smaller. when When , the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, and the first value may be used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the first requirement. When , the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value, and the second value may be used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the first requirement.
另一种可能的设计中，第一阈值和第二阈值是用于衡量第一原始信息和第一解码信息之间差异的大小所设定的阈值。1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数可以根据比例因子，以及1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异所确定。其中，比例因子可以理解为用于将第一编码信息与第一重编码信息之间的差异调节至与原始信息和解码信息之间的差异同一水平的系数。比如，1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数可以等于比例因子与1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异的乘积，1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数与第一原始信息和第一解码信息之间差异为同一量级的值。示例性的，以信道空间中的样本点为例描述。当第一阈值等于第二阈值时，第一阈值可以理解为信道空间中样本点之间的距离差阈值D2。以隐变量空间中的样本点为例描述，1个第一编码信息表示为z，1个第一重编码信息表示为比例因子记作k。当时，第一设备可以确定第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，第一值可以用于指示第一自编码器的性能不满足第一要求。时，第一设备可以确定第一自编码器的性能对应第二值，第二值可以用于指示第一自编码器的性能满足第一要求。In another possible design, the first threshold and the second threshold are thresholds set to measure the difference between the first original information and the first decoded information. The difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information may be determined based on the scaling factor and the difference between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information. The scaling factor may be understood as a coefficient used to adjust the difference between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information to the same level as the difference between the original information and the decoded information. For example, the difference parameter between one first encoded information and the one first re-encoded information may be equal to the product of the scaling factor and the difference between one first encoded information and the one first re-encoded information. , the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is a value of the same magnitude as the difference between the first original information and the first decoded information. For example, sample points in the channel space are used as an example for description. When the first threshold is equal to the second threshold, the first threshold can be understood as the distance difference threshold D2 between sample points in the channel space. Taking the sample points in the latent variable space as an example, one first encoding information is represented as z, and one first re-encoding information is represented as The scaling factor is denoted k. when When , the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, and the first value may be used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the first requirement. When , the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value, and the second value may be used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the first requirement.
可选的，前述比例因子可以是预先配置给第一设备的，或者比例因子是第一设备根据多个原始信息以及多个原始信息对应的多个编码信息确定的。又或者比例因子是第二设备根据多个原始信息以及多个原始信息对应的多个编码信息确定的，进而第一设备从第二设备中获取该比例因子。可选的，比例因子是可变化的，第一设备确定比例因子时可以周期性地更新比例因子。或者在第二设备确定比例因子时，第一设备可以配置第二设备上报该比例因子的时机，如周期性上报或动态指示上报则第二设备上报一次。第二设备每次上报的比例因子可以是相同的或者不同的。本公开对此不予限制。Optionally, the aforementioned scaling factor may be preconfigured to the first device, or the scaling factor may be determined by the first device based on multiple pieces of original information and multiple pieces of coded information corresponding to the multiple pieces of original information. Or the scale factor is determined by the second device based on multiple pieces of original information and multiple pieces of coded information corresponding to the pieces of original information, and then the first device obtains the scale factor from the second device. Optionally, the scale factor is variable, and the first device can periodically update the scale factor when determining the scale factor. Or when the second device determines the scaling factor, the first device can configure the timing for the second device to report the scaling factor. For example, the second device reports once for periodic reporting or dynamic indication reporting. The scaling factor reported by the second device each time may be the same or different. This disclosure is not limiting in this regard.
可以理解的是，第一设备和第二设备确定比例因子的方式相同。下面以第一设备确定比例因子的方式进行举例说明。It will be appreciated that the first device and the second device determine the scaling factor in the same manner. The following is an example of how the first device determines the scaling factor.
第一设备可以接收来自第二设备的N个第二原始信息以及N个第二原始信息对应的N个第二编码信息。其中，所述N个第二原始信息中的全部或部分属于所述M个第一原始信息，或者，所述N个第二原始信息不包括所述M个第一原始信息中的任意一个。The first device may receive N pieces of second original information from the second device and N pieces of second encoded information corresponding to the N pieces of second original information. Wherein, all or part of the N pieces of second original information belong to the M pieces of first original information, or the N pieces of second original information do not include any of the M pieces of first original information.
在第一种可选的实施方式中，N为大于1的正整数。第一设备可以根据N个第二原始信息中两两第二原始信息之间的差异和所述两两第二原始信息对应的两两第二编码信息之间的差异的比例，确定比例因子。In a first optional implementation, N is a positive integer greater than 1. The first device may determine the scaling factor based on the ratio between the difference between pairs of second original information in the N pieces of second original information and the difference between pairs of second encoded information corresponding to the pair of second original information.
可选的，第一设备可以将N个第二原始信息划分为多组原始信息，其中每组原始信息中包括N个第二原始信息中的两个第二原始信息。相应地，N个第二编码信息也可划分为多组编码信息，其中每组编码信息中包括N个第二编码信息中的两个第二编码信息。多组原始信息和多组编码信息之间一一对应，例如第一组原始信息与第一组编码信息之间对应，那么该第一组原始信息中的两个第二原始信息与第一组编码信息中的两个第二编码信息之间存在映射关系。Optionally, the first device may divide the N pieces of second original information into multiple groups of original information, where each group of original information includes two second pieces of original information among the N pieces of second original information. Correspondingly, the N pieces of second coded information can also be divided into multiple groups of coded information, where each group of coded information includes two pieces of second coded information among the N pieces of second coded information. There is a one-to-one correspondence between multiple sets of original information and multiple sets of coded information. For example, there is a correspondence between the first set of original information and the first set of coded information. Then the two second original information in the first set of original information corresponds to the first set of coded information. There is a mapping relationship between the two second coded information in the coded information.
以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例，N个第二原始信息包括当前通信环境中的N个第二原始信道信息。N可以为3，3个第二原始信息可以包括当前环境中3个原始CSI。如图9示意，在信道空间中，将该3个第二原始信息分别表示为V1，V2，V3。该3个第二原始信息对应的3个第二编码信息在隐变量空间中分别表示为z1，z2，z3。比例因子k可以表示为： Taking the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario as an example, the N second original information includes N second original channel information in the current communication environment. N may be 3, and the 3 second original information may include 3 original CSIs in the current environment. As shown in Figure 9, in the channel space, the three second original information are represented as V1, V2, and V3 respectively. The three second coded information corresponding to the three second original information are respectively represented as z1, z2, and z3 in the latent variable space. The scaling factor k can be expressed as:
在第二种可选的实施方式中，第一设备可以根据N个第二原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异和N个第二编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异的比例，确定比例因子。其中，参考原始信息可以包括第一编码器的训练数据集中的一个或多个原始信息，相应地，参考编码信息可以是第一编码器的训练数据集中与参考原始信息对应的标签数据，或者参考编码信息可以是第二设备发送给第一设备的。在该方式中，N可以为1或者大于1的整数。In a second optional implementation, the first device may use the difference between the N pieces of second original information and the reference original information and the difference between the N pieces of second encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information. proportion, determine the scaling factor. The reference original information may include one or more original information in the training data set of the first encoder. Correspondingly, the reference encoding information may be label data corresponding to the reference original information in the training data set of the first encoder, or the reference The encoded information may be sent by the second device to the first device. In this method, N can be 1 or an integer greater than 1.
以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例，N个第二原始信息包括当前通信环境中的N个第二原始信道信息。例如，N为3时，3个第二原始信息包括3个原始CSI，参考原始信息包括第一自编码器的训练数据集中的1个原始CSI。在信道空间中，以V1表示参考原始信息，V1对应的参考编码信息在隐变量空间表示为z1；V2，V3，V4表示M个第一原始信息中的3个原始CSI；该3个第二原始信息对应的3个第二编码信息在隐变量空间中分别表示为z2，z3，z4。比例因子k可以表示为： 又如，N为2，2个第二原始信息可以包括当前环境中2个原始CSI，参考原始信 息包括第一自编码器的训练数据集中的2个原始CSI。在信道空间中，以V1和V2表示第一自编码器的训练数据集中的2个原始CSI，V3，V4表示M个第一原始信息中的2个原始CSI；V1，V2，V3，V4在隐变量空间中分别表示为z1，z2，z3，z4。比例因子k可以表示为： Taking the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario as an example, the N second original information includes N second original channel information in the current communication environment. For example, when N is 3, the 3 second original information includes 3 original CSIs, and the reference original information includes 1 original CSI in the training data set of the first autoencoder. In the channel space, V1 represents the reference original information, and the reference coding information corresponding to V1 is represented as z1 in the latent variable space; V2, V3, and V4 represent 3 original CSIs among the M first original information; the 3 second The three second coded information corresponding to the original information are represented as z2, z3, and z4 respectively in the latent variable space. The scaling factor k can be expressed as: For another example, N is 2, and the two second original information may include two original CSIs in the current environment. The reference original information The information includes the 2 original CSIs in the training data set of the first autoencoder. In the channel space, V1 and V2 represent the two original CSIs in the training data set of the first autoencoder, and V3 and V4 represent the two original CSIs in the M first original information; V1, V2, V3, and V4 are They are represented as z1, z2, z3, and z4 respectively in the latent variable space. The scaling factor k can be expressed as:
在第三种可选的实施方式中，第一设备可以根据N个第二原始信息中每个第二原始信息与N个第二解码信息中每个第二解码信息之间的差异和所述每个第二原始信息对应的第二编码信息与所述每个第二编码信息对应的第二重编码信息之间的差异的比例，确定所述比例因子；其中，所述N个第二解码信息与所述N个第二原始信息一一对应。In a third optional implementation, the first device may calculate the difference between each second original information among the N second original information and each second decoded information among the N second decoded information. The ratio of the difference between the second encoded information corresponding to each second original information and the second re-encoded information corresponding to each second encoded information determines the scaling factor; wherein, the N second decoded The information corresponds one-to-one to the N pieces of second original information.
具体地，第一设备可以利用第一解码器对N个第二原始信息对应的N个第二编码器信息进行解码，得到N个第二解码信息，进而第一设备可以利用第二编码器对N个第二解码信息进行重编码，得到N个第二重编码信息。Specifically, the first device can use the first decoder to decode the N second encoder information corresponding to the N second original information to obtain N second decoded information, and then the first device can use the second encoder to decode the N second encoder information. N pieces of second decoded information are re-encoded to obtain N pieces of second re-encoded information.
以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例，N个第二原始信息包括当前通信环境中的N个第二原始信道信息。例如，N为3时，3个第二原始信息包括3个原始CSI。将3个第二原始信息表示为V1，V2，V3。在隐变量空间，3个第二原始信息对应的3个第二编码信息，分别记作z1，z2，z3。将3个第二原始信息对应的3个第二解码信息表示为V1’，V2’，V3’，在隐变量空间，3个第二解码信息对应的3个第二重编码信息，分别记作z1’，z2’，z3’，比例因子k可以表示为： Taking the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario as an example, the N second original information includes N second original channel information in the current communication environment. For example, when N is 3, 3 pieces of second original information include 3 pieces of original CSI. Denote the 3 second original information as V1, V2, V3. In the latent variable space, the three second coded information corresponding to the three second original information are recorded as z1, z2, and z3 respectively. The three second decoded information corresponding to the three second original information are represented as V1', V2', V3'. In the latent variable space, the three second re-encoded information corresponding to the three second decoded information are recorded as z1', z2', z3', the scale factor k can be expressed as:
情况二：对应于M大于1的情况。Case 2: Corresponds to the case where M is greater than 1.
一种可能的设计中，第一设备可以根据第一阈值、第二阈值或其他阈值，衡量K个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息与所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数。K个第一编码信息包含于M个第一编码信息，K个第一编码信息包括M个第一编码信息中的部分或全部第一编码信息，K为小于或等于M的整数。In a possible design, the first device can measure each of the K first encoding information and the corresponding first encoding information of the K first encoding information according to the first threshold, the second threshold or other thresholds. Difference parameter between one layer of encoded information. K pieces of first coded information are included in M pieces of first coded information. K pieces of first coded information include part or all of the M pieces of first coded information. K is an integer less than or equal to M.
具体地，如果K个第一编码信息与所述K个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数大于或等于第一阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，或如果K个第一编码信息与所述K个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数小于或等于第二阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值。Specifically, if the difference parameter between the K pieces of first encoded information and the first re-encoded information corresponding to the K pieces of first encoded information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, then the performance corresponding to the first autoencoder is determined. The first value, or if the difference parameter between the K pieces of first encoded information and the first re-encoded information corresponding to the K pieces of first encoded information is less than or equal to the second threshold, determine the value of the first autoencoder. Performance corresponds to the second value.
可选的，K个第一编码信息占所述M个第一编码信息的比例大于或等于第一比例阈值，第一比例阈值可以是预先配置的。示例性的，K可以表示为其中，β表示第一比例阈值，β的取值可以为0.6、0.7或者其他的值，表示向上取整符。或者也可以描述为：如果则可以确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值。Optionally, the proportion of the K pieces of first coding information to the M pieces of first coding information is greater than or equal to a first proportion threshold, and the first proportion threshold may be preconfigured. For example, K can be expressed as Among them, β represents the first proportion threshold, and the value of β can be 0.6, 0.7 or other values. Indicates rounding up. Or it can also be described as: if Then it can be determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value.
另一种可能的设计中，第一设备可以计算M个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息与所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数，得到M个差异参数；进而第一设备可以确定M个差异参数的平均值。第一设备可以根据第一阈值、第二阈值或其他阈值，衡量M个差异参数的平均值。In another possible design, the first device can calculate the difference parameter between each of the M first encoded information and the first re-encoded information corresponding to each of the first encoded information, and obtain M difference parameters; then the first device can determine the average value of the M difference parameters. The first device may measure the average of the M difference parameters based on the first threshold, the second threshold, or other thresholds.
具体地，如果M个差异参数的平均值大于或等于第一阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，或如果M个差异参数的平均值小于或等于第二阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值。Specifically, if the average of the M difference parameters is greater than or equal to the first threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, or if the average of the M difference parameters is less than or equal to the second threshold, Then it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value.
此外，关于第一阈值，第二阈值，第一值，第二值，以及1个第一编码信息与对应的1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数可参照情况一中的描述理解，本公开对此不再进行赘述。In addition, regarding the first threshold, the second threshold, the first value, the second value, and the difference parameters between a piece of first encoded information and a corresponding piece of first re-encoded information, please refer to the description in case 1. This disclosure will not go into details.
基于前述S801～S804，第一设备可以确定第一自编码器的性能满足第一要求或者确定第一自编码器的性能不满足第一要求。进一步地，当第一自编码器的性能差时，第一设备还可以执行如下一个或多个操作：对第一自编码器进行更新；指示第二设备停止使用第一自编码器；指示第二设备采用其他自编码器中的编码器；指示第二设备使用传统CSI反馈方式进行CSI的反馈。Based on the aforementioned S801 to S804, the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the first requirement or determine that the performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the first requirement. Further, when the performance of the first autoencoder is poor, the first device can also perform one or more of the following operations: update the first autoencoder; instruct the second device to stop using the first autoencoder; instruct the second device to stop using the first autoencoder. The second device uses an encoder in another autoencoder; instructs the second device to use a traditional CSI feedback method for CSI feedback.
作为示例，图8进一步示意出了可选步骤S805：As an example, Figure 8 further illustrates optional step S805:
S805：第一设备确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应所述第一值时，向所述第二设备发送第五信息，所述第五信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器。S805: When the first device determines that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, the first device sends fifth information to the second device, where the fifth information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the Describe the first encoder.
本公开提供的上述通信方法，在部署自编码器中解码器的一端引入一个编码器，通过比较自编码器所包括的编码器输出的编码信息和该解码器引入的编码器输出的重编码信息之间的差异，能够间接判断 自编码器的性能。能够在保证减少信息传输开销的同时安全有效的监控自编码器的性能。The above communication method provided by the present disclosure introduces an encoder at one end of the decoder in the deployed autoencoder, and compares the encoding information output by the encoder included in the autoencoder with the re-encoding information output by the encoder introduced by the decoder. The difference between them can be indirectly judged Performance of autoencoders. It can safely and effectively monitor the performance of the autoencoder while ensuring reduced information transmission overhead.
本公开还提供一种自编码器的性能监控方案，主要通过判断编码信息之间是否与对应的原始信息之间的差异关系一致，或判断编码信息和重编码信息之间的差异关系是否与对应的原始信息和解码信息之间的差异关系一致，确定自编码器的性能。以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例，可以理解的是：该方案主要利用隐变量空间中样本点之间的距离关系以及信道空间中样本点之间的距离关系，衡量自编码器的性能。下面通过图10～图11对该方案进行详细说明。如图10示意一种通信方法，主要包括如下流程。The disclosure also provides a performance monitoring solution for the autoencoder, mainly by judging whether the difference relationship between the encoded information is consistent with the corresponding original information, or by judging whether the difference relationship between the encoded information and the re-encoded information is consistent with the corresponding difference. The difference relationship between the original information and the decoded information is consistent and determines the performance of the autoencoder. Taking the CSI feedback scenario based on autoencoders as an example, it can be understood that this solution mainly uses the distance relationship between sample points in the latent variable space and the distance relationship between sample points in the channel space to measure the performance of the autoencoder. . This solution will be described in detail below with reference to Figures 10 and 11. Figure 10 illustrates a communication method, which mainly includes the following processes.
S1001，第二设备向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息。S1001. The second device sends P pieces of third coded information to the first device.
其中，第二设备可以利用第一编码器对P个第三原始信息进行处理，确定P个第三编码信息，即P个第三编码信息是基于P个第三原始信息生成的。或者可以理解为，P个第三编码信息可以是信道空间中P个第三原始信息在隐变量空间中的P个投影。Wherein, the second device can use the first encoder to process the P pieces of third original information and determine the P pieces of third encoded information, that is, the P pieces of third encoded information are generated based on the P pieces of third original information. Or it can be understood that the P third coded information can be P projections of the P third original information in the channel space into the latent variable space.
具体地，P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于3的正整数，例如P个第三原始信息之间两两第三原始信息组成一组，将P个第三原始信息分为多组第三原始信息。多组第三原始信息中的1组第三原始信息对应1个差异信息，1组第三原始信息对应的差异信息用于指示该第三原始信息中两个第三原始信息之间的差异。多组第三原始信息对应的多个差异信息之间的大小关系满足第一预设关系。示例性地，以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例。P个第三原始信息对应于信道空间的P个样本点，P为3时，将3个第三原始信息分别记作V1，V2，V3。第一预设关系可以包括：d(V1,V2)>d(V2,V3)。Specifically, the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3. For example, the P pieces of third original information form a group of two pieces of third original information. The P pieces of third original information are divided into multiple groups of third original information. One set of third original information among multiple sets of third original information corresponds to one piece of difference information, and the difference information corresponding to one set of third original information is used to indicate the difference between two third original information in the third original information. The magnitude relationship between the plurality of difference information corresponding to the plurality of sets of third original information satisfies the first preset relationship. Illustratively, take the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario as an example. P third original information corresponds to P sample points in the channel space. When P is 3, the three third original information are recorded as V1, V2, and V3 respectively. The first preset relationship may include: d(V1, V2)>d(V2, V3).
可选的，第二设备可以主动向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息，或在第一设备的请求触发下发送P个第三编码信息。例如，图10在S1001之前还示意出了一个可选步骤S1000：第一设备向第二设备发送第二信息，该第二信息用于请求满足第一预设关系的P个第三原始信息，或者第二信息用于请求基于满足第一预设关系的P个第三原始信息生成的P个第三编码信息。进而在S1001中，第二设备向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息。Optionally, the second device may actively send P pieces of third coded information to the first device, or may send P pieces of third coded information triggered by a request from the first device. For example, Figure 10 also illustrates an optional step S1000 before S1001: the first device sends second information to the second device, and the second information is used to request P third original information that satisfies the first preset relationship, Or the second information is used to request P pieces of third coded information generated based on P pieces of third original information that satisfy the first preset relationship. Furthermore, in S1001, the second device sends P pieces of third coded information to the first device.
可选的，可以预先定义P个第三原始信息对应的第一预设关系。第二设备和第一设备可以预先约定发送P个第三原始信息对应的P个第三编码信息所占的资源，这样第一设备收到P个第三编码信息可以确定P个第三原始信息与P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。或者第二设备可以向第一设备发送第三信息，该第三信息用于指示P个第三原始信息与P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。例如，第三信息包括P个第三编码信息中每个信道状态指示信息对应的第三原始信息的标识、资源ID等。Optionally, first preset relationships corresponding to the P pieces of third original information may be predefined. The second device and the first device can pre-agree on the resources occupied by sending the P pieces of third coded information corresponding to the P pieces of third original information. In this way, the first device can determine the P pieces of third original information after receiving the P pieces of third coded information. Correspondence between P third coded information. Or the second device may send third information to the first device, where the third information is used to indicate the correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information. For example, the third information includes the identifier, resource ID, etc. of the third original information corresponding to each channel state indication information in the P third coded information.
S1002，第一设备判断P个第三编码信息之间的差异是否满足第一预设关系。S1002: The first device determines whether the differences between the P pieces of third coded information satisfy the first preset relationship.
具体地，对应于S1001中描述的P个第三原始信息，P个第三编码信息之间两两第三编码信息组成一组，将P个第三编码信息分为多组第三编码信息。多组第三编码信息中的1组第三编码信息对应1个差异信息，1组第三编码信息对应的差异信息用于指示该组第三编码信息中两个第三编码信息之间的差异。第一设备可以具体判断多组第三编码信息对应的多个差异信息之间的大小关系满足第一预设关系。Specifically, corresponding to the P pieces of third original information described in S1001, pairs of P pieces of third coded information form a group of third coded information, and the P pieces of third coded information are divided into multiple groups of third coded information. One group of third encoding information among multiple groups of third encoding information corresponds to one piece of difference information, and the difference information corresponding to one group of third encoding information is used to indicate the difference between two third encoding information in the group of third encoding information. . The first device may specifically determine that the magnitude relationship between the plurality of difference information corresponding to the plurality of sets of third encoding information satisfies the first preset relationship.
示例性地，以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例。P个第三原始信息对应于信道空间的P个样本点，P为3时，将3个第三原始信息分别记作V1，V2，V3。P个第三原始信息在隐变量空间中的投影分别记作z1，z2，z3。对应于d(V1,V2)>d(V2,V3)，第一设备可以判断z1，z2，z3是否符合第一预设关系包括的如下关系：d(z1,z2)>d(z2,z3)。一种可选的实施方式中，如果P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，则第一设备可以确定第一自编码器的性能满足第二要求，第一设备可以不作任何操作；如果P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足第一预设关系，则第一设备可以确定第一自编码器的性能不满足第二要求，进而第一设备可以向第二设备发送第五信息，所述第五信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器。另一种可选的实施方式中，可以将图10的方法和图8的方法结合在一起使用。下面首先对将图10的方法和图8的方法结合在一起使用的原理进行说明。由S804中的描述可知，判断自编码器的性能的一个关键点是利用编码信息和重编码信息之间的差异反映原始信息和解码信息之间的差异，或者说是利用隐变量空间中样本点之间的距离反映信道空间中样本点之间的距离。由图7示意的几种关系图也可以得知，信道空间中样本点之间的距离与在隐变量空间中对应的投影之间的距离保持一致性时，利用编码信息和重编码信息之间的差异反映原始信息和解码信息之间的差异具有可靠性。于是，图10的方法可以看作对图8描述的自编码器的性能监控方案的有效性进行判定的方案，通过判 断编码信息和重编码信息之间的差异关系，与原始信息和解码信息之间的差异关系是否具备一致性，确定是否可以应用图8描述的自编码器的性能监控方案。这样的设计能够提升自编码器的性能监控方案的有效性和准确性。Illustratively, take the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario as an example. P third original information corresponds to P sample points in the channel space. When P is 3, the three third original information are recorded as V1, V2, and V3 respectively. The projections of the P third original information in the latent variable space are recorded as z1, z2, and z3 respectively. Corresponding to d(V1,V2)>d(V2,V3), the first device can determine whether z1, z2, z3 conform to the following relationship included in the first preset relationship: d(z1,z2)>d(z2,z3 ). In an optional implementation, if the difference between the P third encoded information satisfies the first preset relationship, the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the second requirement, and the first device may not perform Any operation; if the difference between the P third encoded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, the first device can determine that the performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the second requirement, and the first device can then provide the second device with Send fifth information, the fifth information being used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder. In another optional implementation, the method in Figure 10 and the method in Figure 8 can be used together. First, the principle of using the method in Figure 10 and the method in Figure 8 together will be explained below. It can be seen from the description in S804 that a key point in judging the performance of the autoencoder is to use the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information to reflect the difference between the original information and the decoded information, or to use the sample points in the latent variable space The distance between reflects the distance between sample points in the channel space. It can also be known from the several relationship diagrams illustrated in Figure 7 that when the distance between sample points in the channel space is consistent with the distance between the corresponding projections in the latent variable space, the relationship between the encoding information and the re-encoding information is used The difference reflects the difference between the original information and the decoded information with reliability. Therefore, the method in Figure 10 can be regarded as a scheme for judging the effectiveness of the performance monitoring scheme of the autoencoder described in Figure 8. By judging Determine whether the difference relationship between the encoded information and the re-encoded information is consistent with the difference relationship between the original information and the decoded information, and determine whether the performance monitoring scheme of the autoencoder described in Figure 8 can be applied. Such a design can improve the effectiveness and accuracy of the autoencoder performance monitoring solution.
可选的，当P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系时，第一设备可以确定图8描述的监控方案有效，进而第一设备可按照图8描述的监控方案对第一自编码器的性能进行监控。作为示例，图10示意出了S1003a：当P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系时，第一设备根据编码信息和重编码信息进行第一自编码器的性能监控。当P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足第一预设关系时，第一设备可以确定图8示意的方案无效。作为示例，图10示意出了S1003b：当P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足第一预设关系时，第一设备停止对第一自编码器的性能监控。Optionally, when the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship, the first device can determine that the monitoring scheme described in Figure 8 is valid, and then the first device can monitor the third coded information according to the monitoring scheme described in Figure 8. The performance of an autoencoder is monitored. As an example, Figure 10 illustrates S1003a: when the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information satisfies the first preset relationship, the first device performs performance monitoring of the first autoencoder based on the encoding information and the re-encoding information. When the difference between the P pieces of third coded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, the first device may determine that the solution illustrated in Figure 8 is invalid. As an example, FIG. 10 illustrates S1003b: when the difference between the P pieces of third encoded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, the first device stops performance monitoring of the first autoencoder.
可选的，当图10的方法和图8的方法结合在一起使用时，可以理解的是：所述P个第三原始信息中的全部或部分属于所述M个第一原始信息，或者，所述P个第三原始信息不包括所述M个第一原始信息中的任意一个。Optionally, when the method of Figure 10 and the method of Figure 8 are used together, it can be understood that: all or part of the P third original information belongs to the M first original information, or, The P pieces of third original information do not include any of the M pieces of first original information.
如图11示意另一种通信方法，主要包括如下流程。Figure 11 illustrates another communication method, which mainly includes the following processes.
S1101，第二设备向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息。S1101. The second device sends P pieces of third coded information to the first device.
其中，第二设备可以利用第一编码器对P个第三原始信息进行处理，确定P个第三编码信息，即P个第三编码信息是基于P个第三原始信息生成的。或者可以理解为，P个第三编码信息可以是信道空间中P个第三原始信息在隐变量空间中的P个投影。Wherein, the second device can use the first encoder to process the P pieces of third original information and determine the P pieces of third encoded information, that is, the P pieces of third encoded information are generated based on the P pieces of third original information. Or it can be understood that the P third coded information can be P projections of the P third original information in the channel space into the latent variable space.
具体地，P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数。其中，参考原始信息可以包括第一自编码器的训练数据集中的至少一个参考原始信息。其中，在参考原始信息包括第一自编码器的训练数据集中的1个参考原始信息时，可以将P个第三原始信息中1个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异记作1个差异信息。P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异可记作P个差异信息，P个差异信息之间的大小关系满足第二预设关系。示例性地，以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例。参考原始信息对应于信道空间的1个样本点记作V1。P个第三原始信息对应于信道空间的P个样本点，P为2时，将2个第三原始信息分别记作V2，V3。第二预设关系可以包括：d(V1,V2)>d(V1,V3)。类似地，在参考原始信息包括第一自编码器的训练数据集中的Q个参考原始信息，Q为大于1的正整数时，可以将P个第三原始信息中1个第三原始信息与Q个参考原始信息中的1个参考原始信息之间的差异记作1个差异信息。P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异可记作Q×P个差异信息，Q×P个差异信息之间的大小关系满足第二预设关系。示例性地，以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例。参考原始信息对应于信道空间的2个样本点记作V1，V2。P个第三原始信息对应于信道空间的P个样本点，P为2时，将2个第三原始信息分别记作V3，V4。第二预设关系可以包括：d(V1,V3)>d(V1,V4)，以及d(V2,V3)>d(V2,V4)。Specifically, the difference between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2. The reference original information may include at least one reference original information in the training data set of the first autoencoder. Wherein, when the reference original information includes 1 reference original information in the training data set of the first autoencoder, the difference between 1 third original information in the P third original information and the reference original information can be recorded as 1 difference information. The differences between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information can be recorded as P pieces of difference information, and the magnitude relationship between the P pieces of difference information satisfies the second preset relationship. Illustratively, take the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario as an example. One sample point corresponding to the reference original information in the channel space is recorded as V1. P third original information corresponds to P sample points in the channel space. When P is 2, the two third original information are recorded as V2 and V3 respectively. The second preset relationship may include: d(V1,V2)>d(V1,V3). Similarly, when the reference original information includes Q pieces of reference original information in the training data set of the first autoencoder, and Q is a positive integer greater than 1, 1 third original information among the P pieces of third original information can be combined with Q The difference between one of the reference original information is recorded as one piece of difference information. The difference between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information can be recorded as Q×P pieces of difference information, and the size relationship between the Q×P pieces of difference information satisfies the second preset relationship. Illustratively, take the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario as an example. The two sample points corresponding to the reference original information in the channel space are denoted V1 and V2. P third original information corresponds to P sample points in the channel space. When P is 2, the two third original information are recorded as V3 and V4 respectively. The second preset relationship may include: d(V1,V3)>d(V1,V4), and d(V2,V3)>d(V2,V4).
可选的，第二设备可以主动向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息，或在第一设备的请求触发下发送P个第三编码信息。例如，图10在S1101之前还示意出了一个可选步骤S1100：第一设备向第二设备发送第二信息，该第二信息用于请求满足第二预设关系的P个第三原始信息，或者第二信息用于请求基于满足第二预设关系的P个第三原始信息生成的P个第三编码信息。进而在S1101中，第二设备向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息。Optionally, the second device may actively send P pieces of third coded information to the first device, or may send P pieces of third coded information triggered by a request from the first device. For example, Figure 10 also illustrates an optional step S1100 before S1101: the first device sends second information to the second device, and the second information is used to request P third original information that satisfies the second preset relationship, Or the second information is used to request P pieces of third coded information generated based on P pieces of third original information that satisfy the second preset relationship. Furthermore, in S1101, the second device sends P pieces of third coded information to the first device.
可选的，可以预先定义P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息对应的第二预设关系。第二设备和第一设备可以预先约定发送P个第三原始信息对应的P个第三编码信息所占的资源，这样第一设备收到P个第三编码信息可以确定P个第三原始信息与P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。或者第二设备可以向第一设备发送第三信息，该第三信息用于指示P个第三原始信息与P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。例如，第三信息包括P个第三编码信息中每个第三编码信息对应的第三原始信息的标识、资源ID等。Optionally, a second preset relationship corresponding to the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information may be predefined. The second device and the first device can pre-agree on the resources occupied by sending the P pieces of third coded information corresponding to the P pieces of third original information. In this way, the first device can determine the P pieces of third original information after receiving the P pieces of third coded information. Correspondence between P third coded information. Or the second device may send third information to the first device, where the third information is used to indicate the correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information. For example, the third information includes the identifier, resource ID, etc. of the third original information corresponding to each of the P pieces of third coded information.
S1102，第一设备判断P个第三编码信息与基于参考原始信息生成的参考编码信息之间的差异是否满足第二预设关系。S1102. The first device determines whether the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information generated based on the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship.
具体地，对应于S1101中描述的P个第三原始信息，将P个第三编码信息中1个第三编码信息与参考编码信息之间的差异记作1个差异信息。P个第三编码信息与参考编码信息之间的差异可记作P个差异信息。P个差异信息之间的大小关系满足第二预设关系。第一设备可以具体判断P个第三编码信息 对应的多个差异信息之间的大小关系满足第二预设关系。Specifically, corresponding to the P pieces of third original information described in S1101, the difference between one piece of third piece of coded information and the reference coded information among the P pieces of third coded information is recorded as one piece of difference information. The differences between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information can be recorded as P pieces of difference information. The magnitude relationship between the P pieces of difference information satisfies the second preset relationship. The first device can specifically determine P third coded information The size relationship between the corresponding plurality of difference information satisfies the second preset relationship.
示例性地，以基于自编码器的CSI反馈场景为例，参考原始信息指的是参考信道信息。1个参考信道信息对应于信道空间的1个样本点记作V1。P个第三原始信息对应于信道空间的P个样本点，P为2时，将2个第三原始信息分别记作V2，V3。参考信道信息在隐变量空间中的投影记作z1，P个第三原始信息在隐变量空间中的投影分别记作z2，z3。对应于d(V1,V2)>d(V1,V3)，第一设备可以判断z1，z2，z3是否符合第二预设关系包括的如下关系：d(z1,z2)>d(z1,z3)。Illustratively, taking the autoencoder-based CSI feedback scenario as an example, the reference original information refers to the reference channel information. One reference channel information corresponds to one sample point in the channel space, denoted as V1. P third original information corresponds to P sample points in the channel space. When P is 2, the two third original information are recorded as V2 and V3 respectively. The projection of the reference channel information in the latent variable space is denoted as z1, and the projection of the P third original information in the latent variable space is denoted as z2 and z3 respectively. Corresponding to d(V1,V2)>d(V1,V3), the first device can determine whether z1, z2, and z3 comply with the following relationship included in the second preset relationship: d(z1,z2)>d(z1,z3 ).
一种可选的实施方式中，如果P个第三编码信息与参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，则第一设备可以确定第一自编码器的性能满足第二要求，第一设备可以不作任何操作；如果P个第三编码信息与参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系，则第一设备可以确定第一自编码器的性能不满足第二要求，进而第一设备可以向第二设备发送第五信息，所述第五信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器。In an optional implementation, if the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information satisfies the second preset relationship, the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the second requirement. A device may not perform any operation; if the difference between the P third encoding information and the reference encoding information does not meet the second preset relationship, the first device may determine that the performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the second requirement, and then The first device may send fifth information to the second device, the fifth information being used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder.
另一种可选的实施方式中，可以将图11的方法和图8的方法结合在一起使用。下面首先对将图11的方法和图8的方法结合在一起使用的原理进行说明。由S804中的描述可知，判断自编码器的性能的一个关键点是利用编码信息和重编码信息之间的差异反映原始信息和解码信息之间的差异，或者说是利用隐变量空间中样本点之间的距离反映信道空间中样本点之间的距离。由图7示意的几种关系图也可以得知，信道空间中样本点之间的距离与在隐变量空间中对应的投影之间的距离保持一致性时，利用编码信息和重编码信息之间的差异反映原始信息和解码信息之间的差异具有可靠性。于是，图11的方法可以看作对图8描述的自编码器的性能监控方案的有效性进行判定的方案，通过判断编码信息和重编码信息之间的差异关系，与原始信息和解码信息之间的差异关系是否具备一致性，确定是否可以应用图8描述的自编码器的性能监控方案。这样的设计能够提升自编码器的性能监控方案的有效性和准确性。In another optional implementation, the method in Figure 11 and the method in Figure 8 can be used together. The principle of combining the method of Fig. 11 and the method of Fig. 8 will be explained below. It can be seen from the description in S804 that a key point in judging the performance of the autoencoder is to use the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information to reflect the difference between the original information and the decoded information, or to use the sample points in the latent variable space The distance between reflects the distance between sample points in the channel space. It can also be known from the several relationship diagrams illustrated in Figure 7 that when the distance between sample points in the channel space is consistent with the distance between the corresponding projections in the latent variable space, the relationship between the encoding information and the re-encoding information is used. The difference reflects the difference between the original information and the decoded information with reliability. Therefore, the method in Figure 11 can be regarded as a scheme to determine the effectiveness of the performance monitoring scheme of the autoencoder described in Figure 8, by judging the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information, and the difference between the original information and the decoded information. Whether the difference relationship is consistent, determine whether the performance monitoring scheme of the autoencoder described in Figure 8 can be applied. Such a design can improve the effectiveness and accuracy of the autoencoder performance monitoring solution.
可选的，当P个第三编码信息与参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系时，第一设备可以确定图8描述的监控方案有效，进而第一设备可按照图8描述的监控方案对第一自编码器的性能进行监控。作为示例，图11示意出了S1103a：当P个第三编码信息与参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系时，第一设备根据编码信息和重编码信息进行第一自编码器的性能监控。当P个第三编码信息与参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系时，第一设备可以确定图8示意的方案无效。作为示例，图11示意出了S1103b：当P个第三编码信息与参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系时，第一设备停止对第一自编码器的性能监控。Optionally, when the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information satisfies the second preset relationship, the first device can determine that the monitoring scheme described in Figure 8 is effective, and then the first device can determine according to the method described in Figure 8 The monitoring scheme monitors the performance of the first autoencoder. As an example, Figure 11 illustrates S1103a: when the difference between the P third encoding information and the reference encoding information satisfies the second preset relationship, the first device performs the first autoencoder according to the encoding information and the re-encoding information. Performance monitoring. When the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information does not satisfy the second preset relationship, the first device may determine that the solution illustrated in Figure 8 is invalid. As an example, FIG. 11 illustrates S1103b: when the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information and the reference encoding information satisfies the second preset relationship, the first device stops performance monitoring of the first autoencoder.
可选的，当图11的方法和图8的方法结合在一起使用时，可以理解的是：所述P个第三原始信息中的全部或部分属于所述M个第一原始信息，或者，所述P个第三原始信息不包括所述M个第一原始信息中的任意一个。Optionally, when the method of Figure 11 and the method of Figure 8 are used together, it can be understood that: all or part of the P third original information belongs to the M first original information, or, The P pieces of third original information do not include any of the M pieces of first original information.
上述图10和图11仅作为示例，示意出了第一设备判定图8描述的监控方案有效性的方式。类似地，本公开中针对自编码器的性能监控方案进行有效性判定的方式可以由第二设备执行。第二设备与第一设备可采用相同的有效性判定方式，即可参照图10或图11的方案实施，本公开对此不再进行赘述。可选的，第二设备在确定图8中描述的方案有效时，向第一设备发送第四信息，该第四信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定。The above-mentioned FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 are only examples, illustrating the way in which the first device determines the effectiveness of the monitoring solution described in FIG. 8 . Similarly, the method of determining the validity of the performance monitoring scheme of the autoencoder in the present disclosure can be performed by the second device. The second device and the first device can use the same validity determination method, which can be implemented with reference to the solution in Figure 10 or Figure 11 , which will not be described again in this disclosure. Optionally, when determining that the solution described in Figure 8 is valid, the second device sends fourth information to the first device, and the fourth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder.
基于同一构思，参见图12，本公开提供了一种通信装置1200，该通信装置1200包括处理模块1201和通信模块1202。该通信装置1200可以是第二设备，也可以是应用于第二设备或者和第二设备匹配使用，能够实现第二设备侧执行的通信方法的通信装置；或者，该通信装置1200可以是第一设备，也可以是应用于第一设备或者和第一设备匹配使用，能够实现第一设备侧执行的通信方法的通信装置。Based on the same concept, referring to FIG. 12 , the present disclosure provides a communication device 1200 , which includes a processing module 1201 and a communication module 1202 . The communication device 1200 may be a second device, or may be a communication device applied to the second device or used in conjunction with the second device, capable of implementing a communication method executed by the second device; or, the communication device 1200 may be a first device. The device may also be a communication device applied to the first device or used in conjunction with the first device, capable of implementing the communication method executed by the first device.
其中，通信模块也可以称为收发模块、收发器、收发机、或收发装置等。处理模块也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理单元、或处理装置等。可选的，通信模块用于执行上述方法中第二设备侧或第一设备侧的发送操作和接收操作，可以将通信模块中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将通信模块中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即通信模块包括接收单元和发送单元。Among them, the communication module may also be called a transceiver module, a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver device, etc. The processing module may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing unit, or a processing device. Optionally, the communication module is used to perform the sending operation and receiving operation on the second device side or the first device side in the above method. The device used to implement the receiving function in the communication module can be regarded as a receiving unit, and the devices used in the communication module can be regarded as receiving units. The device that implements the sending function is regarded as a sending unit, that is, the communication module includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
该通信装置1200应用于第一设备时，处理模块1201可用于实现图8、图10和图11所述示例中所述第一设备的处理功能，通信模块1202可用于实现图8、图10和图11所述示例中所述第一设备的收发功能。或者也可以参照发明内容中第一方面、第三方面、第五方面、第七方面、第九方面、第十一方面、第十三方面、或第十五方面中的描述和可能的设计理解该通信装置。 When the communication device 1200 is applied to a first device, the processing module 1201 can be used to implement the processing functions of the first device in the examples described in Figures 8, 10 and 11, and the communication module 1202 can be used to implement the processing functions of the first device in the examples of Figures 8, 10 and 11. The transceiver function of the first device in the example shown in Figure 11. Or it can also be understood with reference to the description and possible designs in the first, third, fifth, seventh, ninth, eleventh, thirteenth or fifteenth aspects of the invention. the communication device.
该通信装置1200应用于第二设备时，处理模块1201可用于实现图8、图10和图11所述示例中所述第二设备的处理功能，通信模块1202可用于实现图8、图10和图11所述示例中所述第二设备的收发功能。或者也可以参照发明内容中第二方面、第四方面、第六方面、第八方面、第十方面、第十二方面、第十四方面、或第十六方面中的描述和可能的设计理解该通信装置。When the communication device 1200 is applied to a second device, the processing module 1201 can be used to implement the processing functions of the second device in the examples described in Figures 8, 10 and 11, and the communication module 1202 can be used to implement the processing functions of the second device in the examples of Figures 8, 10 and 11. The transceiver function of the second device in the example shown in Figure 11. Or it can also be understood by referring to the description and possible designs in the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, twelfth, fourteenth or sixteenth aspect in the summary of the invention. the communication device.
此外需要说明的是，前述通信模块和/或处理模块可通过虚拟模块实现，例如处理模块可通过软件功能单元或虚拟装置实现，通信模块可以通过软件功能或虚拟装置实现。或者，处理模块或通信模块也可以通过实体装置实现，例如若该装置采用芯片/芯片电路实现，所述通信模块可以是输入输出电路和/或通信接口，执行输入操作(对应前述接收操作)、输出操作(对应前述发送操作)；处理模块为集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。In addition, it should be noted that the aforementioned communication module and/or processing module can be implemented through a virtual module. For example, the processing module can be implemented through a software functional unit or a virtual device, and the communication module can be implemented through a software function or a virtual device. Alternatively, the processing module or the communication module can also be implemented by a physical device. For example, if the device is implemented by a chip/chip circuit, the communication module can be an input/output circuit and/or a communication interface to perform input operations (corresponding to the aforementioned receiving operations), Output operation (corresponding to the aforementioned sending operation); the processing module is an integrated processor or microprocessor or integrated circuit.
本公开中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，另外，在本公开各个示例中的各功能模块可以集成在一个处理器中，也可以是单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上模块集成在一个模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。The division of modules in this disclosure is schematic and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. In addition, each functional module in each example of this disclosure may be integrated into one processor. It can also exist physically alone, or two or more modules can be integrated into one module. The above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules.
基于相同的技术构思，本公开还提供了一种通信装置1300。例如，该通信装置1300可以是芯片或者芯片***。可选的，在本公开中芯片***可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。Based on the same technical concept, the present disclosure also provides a communication device 1300. For example, the communication device 1300 may be a chip or a chip system. Optionally, in the present disclosure, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
通信装置1300可用于实现前述示例描述的通信***中任一网元的功能。通信装置1300可以包括至少一个处理器1310。可选的，该处理器1310与存储器耦合，存储器可以位于该装置之内，或，存储器可以和处理器集成在一起，或，存储器也可以位于该装置之外。例如，通信装置1300还可以包括至少一个存储器1320。存储器1320保存实施上述任一示例中必要计算机程序、计算机程序或指令和/或数据；处理器1310可能执行存储器1320中存储的计算机程序，完成上述任一示例中的方法。The communication device 1300 can be used to implement the functions of any network element in the communication system described in the foregoing examples. Communication device 1300 may include at least one processor 1310. Optionally, the processor 1310 is coupled to a memory, and the memory may be located within the device, or the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be located outside the device. For example, the communication device 1300 may further include at least one memory 1320. The memory 1320 stores the necessary computer programs, computer programs or instructions and/or data to implement any of the above examples; the processor 1310 may execute the computer program stored in the memory 1320 to complete the method in any of the above examples.
通信装置1300中还可以包括通信接口1330，通信装置1300可以通过通信接口1330和其它设备进行信息交互。示例性的，所述通信接口1330可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块、管脚或其它类型的通信接口。当该通信装置1300为芯片类的装置或者电路时，该装置1300中的通信接口1330也可以是输入输出电路，可以输入信息(或称，接收信息)和输出信息(或称，发送信息)，处理器为集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路或则逻辑电路，处理器可以根据输入信息确定输出信息。The communication device 1300 may also include a communication interface 1330, and the communication device 1300 may interact with other devices through the communication interface 1330. For example, the communication interface 1330 may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, a pin, or other types of communication interfaces. When the communication device 1300 is a chip-like device or circuit, the communication interface 1330 in the device 1300 can also be an input-output circuit, which can input information (or receive information) and output information (or send information), The processor is an integrated processor, a microprocessor, an integrated circuit, or a logic circuit, and the processor can determine output information based on input information.
本公开中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式，用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。处理器1310可能和存储器1320、通信接口1330协同操作。本公开中不限定上述处理器1310、存储器1320以及通信接口1330之间的具体连接介质。Coupling in this disclosure is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information interaction between devices, units or modules. The processor 1310 may cooperate with the memory 1320 and the communication interface 1330. The present disclosure does not limit the specific connection medium between the above-mentioned processor 1310, memory 1320 and communication interface 1330.
可选的，参见图13，所述处理器1310、所述存储器1320以及所述通信接口1330之间通过总线1340相互连接。所述总线1340可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect，PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture，EISA)总线等。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图13中仅用一条粗线表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。Optionally, referring to FIG. 13 , the processor 1310 , the memory 1320 and the communication interface 1330 are connected to each other through a bus 1340 . The bus 1340 may be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc. The bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of presentation, only one thick line is used in Figure 13, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
在本公开中，处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件，可以实现或者执行本公开中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本公开所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成，或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。In the present disclosure, a processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field-programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component that may implement or execute the present disclosure. The disclosed methods, steps and logical block diagrams are disclosed. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor, etc. The steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the present disclosure can be directly embodied as executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
在本公开中，存储器可以是非易失性存储器，比如硬盘(hard disk drive，HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive，SSD)等，还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory)，例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory，RAM)。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。本公开中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置，用于存储程序指令和/或数据。In the present disclosure, the memory may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., or it may be a volatile memory (volatile memory), such as a random access memory. Get memory (random-access memory, RAM). Memory is, but is not limited to, any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer. The memory in the present disclosure can also be a circuit or any other device capable of realizing a storage function, used to store program instructions and/or data.
在一种可能的实施方式中，该通信装置1300可以应用于第一设备，具体通信装置1300可以是第一设备，也可以是能够支持第一设备，实现上述涉及的任一示例中第一设备的功能的装置。存储器1320保存实现上述任一示例中的第一设备的功能的计算机程序(或指令)和/或数据。处理器1310可执行存储器1320存储的计算机程序，完成上述任一示例中第一设备执行的方法。应用于第一设备，该通信装置1300中的通信接口可用于与第二设备进行交互，向第二设备发送信息或者接收来自第二设备的信息。In a possible implementation, the communication device 1300 can be applied to the first device. Specifically, the communication device 1300 can be the first device, or can support the first device to implement the first device in any of the above-mentioned examples. functional device. The memory 1320 stores computer programs (or instructions) and/or data that implement the functions of the first device in any of the above examples. The processor 1310 can execute the computer program stored in the memory 1320 to complete the method executed by the first device in any of the above examples. Applied to the first device, the communication interface in the communication device 1300 can be used to interact with the second device, send information to the second device or receive information from the second device.
在另一种可能的实施方式中，该通信装置1300可以应用于第二设备，具体通信装置1300可以是第 二设备，也可以是能够支持第二设备，实现上述涉及的任一示例中第二设备的功能的装置。存储器1320保存实现上述任一示例中的第二设备的功能的计算机程序(或指令)和/或数据。处理器1310可执行存储器1320存储的计算机程序，完成上述任一示例中第二设备执行的方法。应用于第二设备，该通信装置1300中的通信接口可用于与第一设备进行交互，向第一设备发送信息或者接收来自第一设备的信息。In another possible implementation, the communication device 1300 can be applied to the second device, and specifically the communication device 1300 can be a third device. The second device may also be a device capable of supporting the second device and realizing the functions of the second device in any of the above-mentioned examples. The memory 1320 stores computer programs (or instructions) and/or data that implement the functions of the second device in any of the above examples. The processor 1310 can execute the computer program stored in the memory 1320 to complete the method executed by the second device in any of the above examples. Applied to the second device, the communication interface in the communication device 1300 can be used to interact with the first device, send information to the first device or receive information from the first device.
由于本示例提供的通信装置1300可应用于第一设备，完成上述第一设备执行的方法，或者应用于第二设备，完成第二设备执行的方法。因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法示例，在此不再赘述。Since the communication device 1300 provided in this example can be applied to a first device to complete the method performed by the first device, or applied to a second device to complete the method performed by the second device. Therefore, the technical effects that can be obtained can be referred to the above method examples and will not be described again here.
基于以上示例，本公开提供了一种通信***，包括第一设备和第二设备，其中，所述第一设备和第二设备可以实现图8、图10和图11所示的示例中所提供的通信方法。Based on the above examples, the present disclosure provides a communication system, including a first device and a second device, wherein the first device and the second device can implement what is provided in the examples shown in Figures 8, 10 and 11 communication method.
本公开提供的技术方案可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本公开所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、第二设备、第一设备或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line，DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机可以存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，数字视频光盘(digital video disc，DVD))、或者半导体介质等。The technical solutions provided by this disclosure can be implemented in whole or in part through software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in the present disclosure are produced in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a second device, a first device, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another, e.g., the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that contains one or more available media integrated. The available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, tape), optical media (eg, digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or semiconductor media, etc.
在本公开中，在无逻辑矛盾的前提下，各示例之间可以相互引用，例如方法实施例之间的方法和/或术语可以相互引用，例如装置实施例之间的功能和/或术语可以相互引用，例如装置示例和方法示例之间的功能和/或术语可以相互引用。In this disclosure, on the premise that there is no logical contradiction, examples may refer to each other. For example, methods and/or terms between method embodiments may refer to each other. For example, functions and/or terms between device embodiments may refer to each other. Cross-references, for example, functions and/or terms between apparatus examples and method examples may refer to each other.
显然，本领域的技术人员可以对本公开进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本公开的范围。这样，倘若本公开的这些修改和变型属于本公开权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内，则本公开也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。 Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present disclosure without departing from the scope of the disclosure. In this way, if these modifications and variations of the present disclosure fall within the scope of the claims of the present disclosure and equivalent technologies, the present disclosure is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (85)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第一设备，包括：A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a first device and includes:
    接收来自第二设备的M个第一编码信息，M为正整数；Receive M pieces of first coded information from the second device, where M is a positive integer;
    利用第一解码器和输入所述第一解码器的所述M个第一编码信息，确定M个第一解码信息；其中，所述第一解码器和第一编码器属于第一自编码器，所述第一编码器用于对输入的M个第一原始信息处理，确定所述M个第一编码信息；Using the first decoder and the M pieces of first encoding information input to the first decoder, M pieces of first decoding information are determined; wherein the first decoder and the first encoder belong to the first autoencoder , the first encoder is used to process the input M pieces of first original information and determine the M pieces of first coded information;
    利用第二编码器和输入所述第二编码器的所述M个第一解码信息，确定M个第一重编码信息，所述M个第一重编码信息与所述M个第一编码信息一一对应；Utilize the second encoder and the M first decoded information input to the second encoder to determine M first re-encoded information, the M first re-encoded information and the M first encoded information one-to-one correspondence;
    根据所述M个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息和所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异，确定所述第一自编码器的性能。The performance of the first autoencoder is determined according to the difference between each first encoding information in the M first encoding information and the first re-encoding information corresponding to each first encoding information.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器相同，或者所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的功能相同。The method of claim 1, wherein the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, or the first encoder and the second encoder have the same function.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的功能相同，包括如下中的至少一项：当所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的输入相同数据时，所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的输出相同；当所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的输入相同数据时，所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的输出差异小于预设阈值；所述第一编码器具备压缩和量化功能，所述第二编码器具备压缩和量化功能。The method of claim 2, wherein the functions of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, including at least one of the following: when the first encoder and the second encoder When the inputs of the encoders are the same data, the outputs of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same; when the inputs of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same data, the outputs of the first encoder are the same. The output difference between the encoder and the second encoder is less than the preset threshold; the first encoder has compression and quantization functions, and the second encoder has compression and quantization functions.
  4. 如权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述M个第一编码信息与所述M个第一重编码信息之间的差异，确定所述第一自编码器的性能，包括：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that, determining the first self-coding information based on the difference between the M pieces of first encoding information and the M pieces of first re-encoding information. Encoder performance, including:
    M为1时，如果所述1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数大于或等于第一阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，或如果所述1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数小于或等于第二阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值；或，When M is 1, if the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, or if the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is less than or equal to the second threshold, determine that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value; or,
    M大于1时，如果K个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息与所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数大于或等于第一阈值，所述K个第一编码信息占所述M个第一编码信息的比例大于或等于第一比例阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，或如果K个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息与所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数小于或等于第二阈值，所述K个第一编码信息占所述M个第一编码信息的比例大于或等于第一比例阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值；其中，所述K个第一编码信息包含于所述M个第一编码信息，K为小于或等于M的正整数。When M is greater than 1, if the difference parameter between each first coding information in the K first coding information and the first re-coding information corresponding to each first coding information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the The proportion of the K pieces of first encoded information to the M pieces of first encoded information is greater than or equal to the first proportion threshold, then it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, or if among the K pieces of first encoded information The difference parameter between each first encoded information and the first re-encoded information corresponding to each first encoded information is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the K first encoded information accounts for the M first If the proportion of coding information is greater than or equal to the first proportion threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value; wherein, the K pieces of first coding information are included in the M pieces of first coding information, K is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  5. 如权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一阈值和所述第二阈值相等或者不相等；其中，所述第一阈值和/或所述第二阈值是预先配置的；或者，第一阈值和/或第二阈值是所述第二设备指示的。The method of claim 4, wherein the first threshold and the second threshold are equal or unequal; wherein the first threshold and/or the second threshold are preconfigured; or , the first threshold and/or the second threshold are indicated by the second device.
  6. 如权利要求4或5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述M个第一编码信息中第i个第一编码信息对应的差异参数包括所述第i个第一编码信息与所述M个第一重编码信息中第i个第一重编码信息之间的差异；或者，The method according to claim 4 or 5, characterized in that the difference parameter corresponding to the i-th first coded information among the M first coded information includes the i-th first coded information and the M piece of first coded information. The difference between the i-th first re-encoded information in the first re-encoded information; or,
    所述M个第一编码信息中第i个第一编码信息对应的差异参数是由比例因子以及所述第i个第一编码信息与所述M个第一重编码信息中第i个第一重编码信息之间的差异确定的；其中，i为1至M中的任意一个正整数。The difference parameter corresponding to the i-th first coded information among the M first coded information is determined by the scaling factor and the i-th first coded information and the i-th first coded information among the M first re-coded information. The difference between the re-encoded information is determined; where i is any positive integer from 1 to M.
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述比例因子是预配置的；或者，所述比例因子是从所述第二设备中获取的。The method of claim 6, wherein the scale factor is preconfigured; or the scale factor is obtained from the second device.
  8. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 6, further comprising:
    接收来自所述第二设备的N个第二原始信息，所述N为大于1的整数；Receive N pieces of second original information from the second device, where N is an integer greater than 1;
    根据所述N个第二原始信息中两两第二原始信息之间的差异和所述两两第二原始信息对应的两两第二编码信息之间的差异的比例，确定所述比例因子。The scaling factor is determined according to the ratio of the difference between pairs of second original information in the N pieces of second original information and the difference between pairs of second encoded information corresponding to the pair of second original information.
  9. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 6, further comprising:
    接收来自所述第二设备的N个第二原始信息，所述N为正整数；Receive N pieces of second original information from the second device, where N is a positive integer;
    根据所述N个第二原始信息中每个第二原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异和所述每个原始信息对应的第二编码信息与所述参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异的比例，确定所述比例因子。 According to the difference between each second original information and the reference original information in the N second original information and the difference between the second encoding information corresponding to each original information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information. The proportion of the difference determines the scaling factor.
  10. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 6, further comprising:
    接收来自所述第二设备的N个第二原始信息，所述N为正整数；Receive N pieces of second original information from the second device, where N is a positive integer;
    根据所述N个第二原始信息中每个第二原始信息与N个第二解码信息中每个第二解码信息之间的差异和所述每个第二原始信息对应的第二编码信息与所述每个第二编码信息对应的第二重编码信息之间的差异的比例，确定所述比例因子；其中，所述N个第二解码信息与所述N个第二原始信息一一对应。According to the difference between each second original information in the N second original information and each second decoded information in the N second decoded information and the second encoded information corresponding to each second original information and The proportion of the difference between the second re-encoded information corresponding to each second encoded information determines the scaling factor; wherein the N pieces of second decoded information correspond to the N pieces of second original information one-to-one .
  11. 如权利要求1-10任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-10, further comprising:
    获取来自所述第二设备的P个第三编码信息，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于3的正整数；Obtaining P pieces of third encoded information from the second device, the difference between the P pieces of third original information used to generate the P pieces of third encoded information satisfies a first preset relationship, and P is greater than or equal to 3 a positive integer;
    确定所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足所述第一预设关系；Determine that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship;
    其中，所述P个第三原始信息中的全部或部分属于所述M个第一原始信息，或者，所述P个第三原始信息不包括所述M个第一原始信息中的任意一个。Wherein, all or part of the P pieces of third original information belong to the M pieces of first original information, or the P pieces of third original information do not include any of the M pieces of first original information.
  12. 如权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，在获取P个第三编码信息之前，还包括：The method according to claim 11, characterized in that, before obtaining the P pieces of third coded information, it further includes:
    向所述第二设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于请求所述P个第三编码信息。Send first information to the second device, where the first information is used to request the P pieces of third coded information.
  13. 如权利要求1-10任一所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-10, further comprising:
    获取来自所述第二设备的P个第三编码信息，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数；Obtain P pieces of third coded information from the second device, and the difference between the P pieces of third original information used to generate the P pieces of third coded information and the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, P is A positive integer greater than or equal to 2;
    确定所述P个第三编码信息和与所述参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足所述第二预设关系；Determine that the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship;
    其中，所述P个第三原始信息中的全部或部分属于所述M个第一原始信息，或者，所述P个第三原始信息不包括所述M个第一原始信息中的任意一个。Wherein, all or part of the P pieces of third original information belong to the M pieces of first original information, or the P pieces of third original information do not include any of the M pieces of first original information.
  14. 如权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，在获取P个第三原始信息之前，还包括：The method of claim 13, characterized in that, before acquiring the P pieces of third original information, it further includes:
    向所述第二设备发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于请求所述P个第三编码信息。Send second information to the second device, where the second information is used to request the P pieces of third coded information.
  15. 如权利要求11-14任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method according to any one of claims 11-14, further comprising:
    接收来自所述第二设备的第三信息，所述第三信息指示所述P个第三原始信息与所述P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。Third information is received from the second device, and the third information indicates a correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information.
  16. 如权利要求1-15任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在确定所述M个第一重编码信息之前，还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 15, characterized in that, before determining the M first re-encoding information, it further includes:
    接收来自所述第二设备的第四信息，所述第四信息用于触发所述第一自编码器的性能确定。Fourth information is received from the second device, the fourth information being used to trigger a performance determination of the first autoencoder.
  17. 如权利要求1-16任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一编码信息为量化后的信息，或者，The method according to any one of claims 1 to 16, characterized in that the first encoded information is quantized information, or,
    所述接收来自第二设备的M个第一编码信息，包括：接收来自所述第二设备的M个第一编码信息对应的M个第一量化信息；The receiving the M pieces of first coding information from the second device includes: receiving the M pieces of first quantization information corresponding to the M pieces of first coding information from the second device;
    所述利用第一解码器和输入所述第一解码器的所述M个第一编码信息，确定M个第一解码信息之前，还包括：Before using the first decoder and the M pieces of first encoding information input to the first decoder to determine the M pieces of first decoding information, the method further includes:
    对所述M个第一量化信息进行解量化处理，得到所述M个第一编码信息。Dequantize the M pieces of first quantized information to obtain the M pieces of first coded information.
  18. 如权利要求1-17任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值或第二值，所述第一值用于指示所述第一自编码器的性能不满足第一要求，所述第二值用于指示所述第一自编码器的性能满足第一要求；所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 17, characterized in that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to a first value or a second value, and the first value is used to indicate the first autoencoder. The performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the first requirement, and the second value is used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the first requirement; the method further includes:
    确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应所述第一值时，向所述第二设备发送第五信息，所述第五信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器。When it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, fifth information is sent to the second device, and the fifth information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder. .
  19. 如权利要求1-18任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一编码信息包括第一信道状态指示信息；所述第一解码信息包括第一恢复信道信息；所述第一原始信息包括第一原始信道信息；所述第一重编码信息包括与所述第一恢复信道信息对应的第二信道状态指示信息。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 18, wherein the first encoded information includes first channel status indication information; the first decoded information includes first restored channel information; and the first original The information includes first original channel information; the first re-encoding information includes second channel status indication information corresponding to the first restored channel information.
  20. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第二设备，包括：A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a second device, including:
    利用第一编码器用于对输入的M个第一原始信息处理，确定所述M个第一编码信息，M为正整数；Utilize the first encoder to process the input M pieces of first original information and determine the M pieces of first encoded information, where M is a positive integer;
    向第一设备发送所述M个第一编码信息，所述M个第一编码信息用于第一自编码器的性能确定，所述第一自编码器包括所述第一编码器。The M pieces of first encoding information are sent to a first device, the M pieces of first encoding information being used for performance determination of a first autoencoder, the first autoencoder including the first encoder.
  21. 如权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括： The method of claim 20, further comprising:
    向所述第一设备发送第四信息，所述第四信息用于触发所述第一自编码器的性能确定。Fourth information is sent to the first device, the fourth information being used to trigger a performance determination of the first autoencoder.
  22. 如权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 20, further comprising:
    向所述第一设备发送第一参数信息，所述第一参数信息用于自编码的性能确定；其中，第一参数信息包括如下中的一项或多项：用于衡量编码信息和重编码信息之间差异的一个或多个参考阈值；用于表征至少两个原始信息的差异与所述至少两个原始信息分别对应的编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子；用于表征原始信息和解码信息的差异与编码信息与重编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子，所述编码信息或所述重编码信息的数量；自编码器的性能对应的取值范围，所述重编码信息为第一设备将所述编码信息输入解码器获得的输出再输入编码器进行重编码获得的。Send first parameter information to the first device, where the first parameter information is used to determine self-encoding performance; wherein the first parameter information includes one or more of the following: used to measure encoding information and re-encoding One or more reference thresholds for the difference between the information; a scaling factor used to characterize the ratio between the difference between the at least two original information and the difference between the encoded information corresponding to the at least two original information; used to characterize the original information and the proportional factor between the difference between the decoded information and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information, the number of the encoded information or the re-encoded information; the value range corresponding to the performance of the autoencoder, the re-encoded information The information is obtained by the first device inputting the encoded information into the decoder and then inputting the output into the encoder for re-encoding.
  23. 如权利要求21所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 21, further comprising:
    向所述第一设备发送P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息用于第一自编码器的性能确定方式的有效性判定；其中，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于3的正整数；或者，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数。Send P pieces of third coding information to the first device, the P pieces of third coding information being used to determine the validity of the performance determination method of the first autoencoder; wherein, used to generate the P pieces of third coding information The difference between the P third original information of the information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3; or, the P third original information used to generate the P third encoded information and The difference between the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
  24. 如权利要求23所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 23, further comprising:
    向所述第一设备发送第三信息，所述第三信息指示所述P个第三原始信息与所述P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。Third information is sent to the first device, where the third information indicates a correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information.
  25. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第一设备，包括：A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a first device and includes:
    接收来自第二设备的P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息；其中，所述P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数；确定所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足所述第一预设关系，或者，所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足所述第一预设关系。Receive P pieces of third encoded information from the second device, the P pieces of third encoded information corresponding to P pieces of third original information; wherein the differences between the P pieces of third original information satisfy a first preset relationship , P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2; it is determined that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship, or the difference between the P pieces of third coded information does not satisfy the required Describe the first default relationship.
  26. 如权利要求25所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 25, further comprising:
    当所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系时，向所述第二设备发送第六信息，所述第六信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或，When the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information satisfies the first preset relationship, sending sixth information to the second device, the sixth information being used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or ,
    当所述第一结果指示所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足第一预设关系时，向所述第二设备发送第七信息，所述第七信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。When the first result indicates that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, seventh information is sent to the second device, where the seventh information is used to indicate that the P third encoded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship. The second device stops using the first encoder or stops determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
  27. 如权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述P个第三编码信息为输入所述第一编码器的所述P个第三原始信息所对应的输出，所述第一设备包括与所述第一编码器对应的第一解码器，所述第一自编码器包括所述第一编码器和所述第一解码器。The method of claim 26, wherein the P pieces of third encoded information are outputs corresponding to the P pieces of third original information input to the first encoder, and the first device includes: The first decoder corresponding to the first encoder, the first autoencoder includes the first encoder and the first decoder.
  28. 如权利要求25-27任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method according to any one of claims 25-27, further comprising:
    向所述第二设备发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于请求所述P个第三编码信息。Send second information to the second device, where the second information is used to request the P pieces of third coded information.
  29. 如权利要求25-28任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method according to any one of claims 25-28, further comprising:
    接收来自所述第二设备的第三信息，所述第三信息指示所述P个第三原始信息与所述P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。Third information is received from the second device, and the third information indicates a correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information.
  30. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第二设备，包括：A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a second device, including:
    确定P个第三原始信息，所述P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数；Determine P third pieces of original information, the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2;
    向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息，所述P个第三编码信息用于自编码器的性能的确定。P pieces of third coded information are sent to the first device, the P pieces of third coded information correspond to P pieces of third original information, and the P pieces of third coded information are used to determine the performance of the autoencoder.
  31. 如权利要求30所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 30, further comprising:
    接收来自所述第一设备的第六信息，所述第六信息用于指示所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，所述第六信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或者，Receive sixth information from the first device, the sixth information is used to indicate that the difference between the P pieces of third encoded information satisfies a first preset relationship, and the sixth information is used to trigger a first automatic Encoder performance determined; or,
    接收来自所述第一设备的第七信息，所述第七信息用于指示所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足第一预设关系，或所述第七信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。Receive seventh information from the first device, the seventh information is used to indicate that the difference between the P pieces of third encoded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, or the seventh information is used to indicate that the The second device stops using the first encoder or stops determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
  32. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第一设备，包括：A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a first device and includes:
    接收来自第二设备的P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息，其中， 所述P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为正整数；Receive P pieces of third encoded information from the second device, the P pieces of third encoded information corresponding to P pieces of third original information, wherein, The difference between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer;
    确定P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，或者，P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系。It is determined that the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, or the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy The second default relationship.
  33. 如权利要求32所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 32, further comprising:
    当P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系时，向所述第二设备发送第八信息，所述第八信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；When the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, eighth information is sent to the second device, where the eighth information is used to trigger the first automatic The performance of the encoder is determined;
    或，当P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系时，向所述第二设备发送第九信息，所述第九信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。Or, when the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship, send ninth information to the second device, where the ninth information is used to indicate The second device stops using the first encoder or stops performance determination of the first autoencoder.
  34. 如权利要求33所述的方法，其特征在于，在向所述第二设备发送第八信息之后，还包括：The method according to claim 33, characterized in that, after sending the eighth information to the second device, further comprising:
    接收来自所述第二设备的M个第一编码信息，M为正整数；Receive M pieces of first coded information from the second device, where M is a positive integer;
    利用第一解码器和输入所述第一解码器的所述M个第一编码信息，确定M个第一解码信息；其中，所述第一解码器和所述第一编码器属于所述第一自编码器，所述第一编码器用于对输入的M个第一原始信息处理，确定所述M个第一编码信息；Using a first decoder and the M pieces of first encoding information input to the first decoder, M pieces of first decoding information are determined; wherein the first decoder and the first encoder belong to the An autoencoder, the first encoder is used to process the input M pieces of first original information and determine the M pieces of first encoded information;
    利用第二编码器和输入所述第二编码器的所述M个第一解码信息，确定M个第一重编码信息，所述M个第一重编码信息与所述M个第一编码信息一一对应；Utilize the second encoder and the M first decoded information input to the second encoder to determine M first re-encoded information, the M first re-encoded information and the M first encoded information one-to-one correspondence;
    根据所述M个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息和所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异，确定所述第一自编码器的性能。The performance of the first autoencoder is determined according to the difference between each first encoding information in the M first encoding information and the first re-encoding information corresponding to each first encoding information.
  35. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第二设备，包括：A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a second device, including:
    确定P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为正整数；Determine that the differences between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information satisfy the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer;
    向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于所述P个第三原始信息，所述P个第三编码信息用于自编码器性能的确定。P pieces of third coded information are sent to the first device, the P pieces of third coded information correspond to the P pieces of third original information, and the P pieces of third coded information are used to determine the performance of the autoencoder.
  36. 如权利要求35所述的方法，其他在于，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 35, further characterized by:
    接收来自所述第一设备的第八信息，所述第八信息用于指示P个第三编码信息与所述参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，所述第八信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或者，接收来自第一设备的第九信息，所述第九信息用于指示P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系，所述第九信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。Receive eighth information from the first device, the eighth information is used to indicate that the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies a second preset relationship, the The eighth information is used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or, receive the ninth information from the first device, the ninth information is used to indicate the reference encoding information corresponding to the P third encoding information and the reference original information. The difference does not satisfy the second preset relationship, and the ninth information is used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
  37. 如权利要求35或36所述的方法，其特征在于，在接收来自所述第一设备的第八信息之后，还包括：The method of claim 35 or 36, wherein after receiving the eighth information from the first device, it further includes:
    利用所述第一编码器用于对输入的M个第一原始信息处理，确定所述M个第一编码信息，M为正整数；The first encoder is used to process the input M pieces of first original information and determine the M pieces of first encoded information, where M is a positive integer;
    向所述第一设备发送所述M个第一编码信息，所述M个第一编码信息用于第一自编码器的性能确定，所述第一自编码器包括所述第一编码器。The M pieces of first encoding information are sent to the first device, the M pieces of first encoding information being used for performance determination of a first autoencoder, the first autoencoder including the first encoder.
  38. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第一设备，包括：A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a first device and includes:
    接收来自第二设备的第一参数信息，所述第一参数信息用于确定自编码器的性能；receiving first parameter information from the second device, the first parameter information being used to determine the performance of the autoencoder;
    根据所述第一参数信息，确定自编码器的性能。According to the first parameter information, the performance of the autoencoder is determined.
  39. 如权利要求38所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一参数信息包括如下中的一项或多项：The method of claim 38, wherein the first parameter information includes one or more of the following:
    用于衡量编码信息和重编码信息之间差异的一个或多个参考阈值；One or more reference thresholds used to measure the difference between encoded information and recoded information;
    用于表征至少两个原始信息的差异与所述至少两个原始信息分别对应的编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子；A scaling factor used to characterize the ratio between the difference between the at least two original information and the difference between the encoded information respectively corresponding to the at least two original information;
    用于表征原始信息和解码信息的差异与编码信息与重编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子，所述编码信息或所述重编码信息的数量；a scaling factor used to characterize the ratio between the difference between the original information and the decoded information and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information, the amount of the encoded information or the re-encoded information;
    所述自编码器的性能对应的取值范围，所述重编码信息为第一设备将所述编码信息输入解码器获得的输出再输入编码器进行重编码获得的。The value range corresponding to the performance of the autoencoder, and the re-encoding information is obtained by the first device inputting the encoding information into the decoder and then inputting the output into the encoder for re-encoding.
  40. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第二设备，包括：A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a second device, including:
    确定第一参数信息；Determine the first parameter information;
    向第一设备发送所述第一参数信息，所述第一参数信息用于自编码器的性能确定。 The first parameter information is sent to the first device, the first parameter information being used for performance determination of the autoencoder.
  41. 如权利要求40所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一参数信息包括如下中的一项或多项：The method of claim 40, wherein the first parameter information includes one or more of the following:
    用于衡量编码信息和重编码信息之间差异的一个或多个参考阈值；One or more reference thresholds used to measure the difference between encoded information and re-encoded information;
    用于表征至少两个原始信息的差异与所述至少两个原始信息分别对应的编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子；A scaling factor used to characterize the ratio between the difference between the at least two original information and the difference between the encoded information respectively corresponding to the at least two original information;
    用于表征原始信息和解码信息的差异与编码信息与重编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子，所述编码信息或所述重编码信息的数量；a scaling factor used to characterize the ratio between the difference between the original information and the decoded information and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information, the amount of the encoded information or the re-encoded information;
    所述自编码器的性能对应的取值范围，所述重编码信息为第一设备将所述编码信息输入解码器获得的输出再输入编码器进行重编码获得的。The value range corresponding to the performance of the autoencoder, and the re-encoding information is obtained by the first device inputting the encoding information into the decoder and then inputting the output into the encoder for re-encoding.
  42. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized by including:
    通信模块，用于接收来自第二设备的M个第一编码信息，M为正整数；A communication module, used to receive M pieces of first coded information from the second device, where M is a positive integer;
    处理模块，用于：Processing module for:
    利用第一解码器和输入所述第一解码器的所述M个第一编码信息，确定M个第一解码信息；其中，所述第一解码器和第一编码器属于第一自编码器，所述第一编码器用于对输入的M个第一原始信息处理，确定所述M个第一编码信息；Using the first decoder and the M pieces of first encoding information input to the first decoder, M pieces of first decoding information are determined; wherein the first decoder and the first encoder belong to the first autoencoder , the first encoder is used to process the input M pieces of first original information and determine the M pieces of first coded information;
    利用第二编码器和输入所述第二编码器的所述M个第一解码信息，确定M个第一重编码信息，所述M个第一重编码信息与所述M个第一编码信息一一对应；Utilize the second encoder and the M first decoded information input to the second encoder to determine M first re-encoded information, the M first re-encoded information and the M first encoded information one-to-one correspondence;
    根据所述M个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息和所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异，确定所述第一自编码器的性能。The performance of the first autoencoder is determined according to the difference between each first encoding information in the M first encoding information and the first re-encoding information corresponding to each first encoding information.
  43. 如权利要求42所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器相同，或者所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的功能相同。The device of claim 42, wherein the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, or the first encoder and the second encoder have the same function.
  44. 如权利要求43所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的功能相同，包括如下中的至少一项：当所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的输入相同数据时，所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的输出相同；当所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的输入相同数据时，所述第一编码器和所述第二编码器的输出差异小于预设阈值；所述第一编码器具备压缩和量化功能，所述第二编码器具备压缩和量化功能。The device of claim 43, wherein the functions of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same, including at least one of the following: when the first encoder and the second encoder When the inputs of the encoders are the same data, the outputs of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same; when the inputs of the first encoder and the second encoder are the same data, the outputs of the first encoder are the same. The output difference between the encoder and the second encoder is less than the preset threshold; the first encoder has compression and quantization functions, and the second encoder has compression and quantization functions.
  45. 如权利要求42-44任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理模块，具体用于：The device according to any one of claims 42 to 44, characterized in that the processing module is specifically used for:
    在M为1时，如果所述1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数大于或等于第一阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，或如果所述1个第一编码信息与所述1个第一重编码信息之间的差异参数小于或等于第二阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值；或，When M is 1, if the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first A value, or if the difference parameter between the first encoded information and the first re-encoded information is less than or equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value ;or,
    在M大于1时，如果K个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息与所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数大于或等于第一阈值，所述K个第一编码信息占所述M个第一编码信息的比例大于或等于第一比例阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值，或，如果K个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息与所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异参数小于或等于第二阈值，所述K个第一编码信息占所述M个第一编码信息的比例大于或等于第一比例阈值，则确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应第二值；其中，所述K个第一编码信息包含于所述M个第一编码信息，K为小于或等于M的正整数。When M is greater than 1, if the difference parameter between each first coding information in the K first coding information and the first re-coding information corresponding to each first coding information is greater than or equal to the first threshold, then If the proportion of the K first coded information to the M first coded information is greater than or equal to the first proportion threshold, then it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, or if the K first coded information The difference parameter between each first encoded information in the information and the first re-encoded information corresponding to each first encoded information is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the K pieces of first encoded information account for the M pieces of If the proportion of the first coding information is greater than or equal to the first proportion threshold, it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the second value; wherein the K pieces of first coding information are included in the M pieces of first coding information. , K is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  46. 如权利要求45所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一阈值和所述第二阈值相等或者不相等；其中，所述第一阈值和/或所述第二阈值是预先配置的；或者，第一阈值和/或第二阈值是所述第二设备指示的。The device of claim 45, wherein the first threshold and the second threshold are equal or unequal; wherein the first threshold and/or the second threshold are preconfigured; or , the first threshold and/or the second threshold are indicated by the second device.
  47. 如权利要求45或46所述的装置，其特征在于，所述M个第一编码信息中第i个第一编码信息对应的差异参数包括所述第i个第一编码信息与所述M个第一重编码信息中第i个第一重编码信息之间的差异；或者，The device of claim 45 or 46, wherein the difference parameter corresponding to the i-th first coded information among the M pieces of first coded information includes the i-th first coded information and the M pieces of The difference between the i-th first re-encoded information in the first re-encoded information; or,
    所述M个第一编码信息中第i个第一编码信息对应的差异参数是由比例因子以及所述第i个第一编码信息与所述M个第一重编码信息中第i个第一重编码信息之间的差异确定的；其中，i为1至M中的任意一个正整数。The difference parameter corresponding to the i-th first coded information among the M first coded information is determined by the scaling factor and the i-th first coded information and the i-th first coded information among the M first re-coded information. The difference between the re-encoded information is determined; where i is any positive integer from 1 to M.
  48. 如权利要求47所述的装置，其特征在于，所述比例因子是预配置的；或者，所述比例因子是从所述第二设备中获取的。The apparatus of claim 47, wherein the scale factor is preconfigured; or the scale factor is obtained from the second device.
  49. 如权利要求47所述的装置，其特征在于，The device of claim 47, wherein:
    所述通信模块，还用于接收来自所述第二设备的N个第二原始信息，所述N为大于1的整数； The communication module is also configured to receive N pieces of second original information from the second device, where N is an integer greater than 1;
    所述处理模块，还用于根据所述N个第二原始信息中两两第二原始信息之间的差异和所述两两第二原始信息对应的两两第二编码信息之间的差异的比例，确定所述比例因子。The processing module is also configured to calculate the data based on the difference between pairs of second original information in the N second original information and the difference between pairs of second encoded information corresponding to the pair of second original information. Scale, determine the scaling factor.
  50. 如权利要求47所述的装置，其特征在于，The device of claim 47, wherein:
    所述通信模块，还用于接收来自所述第二设备的N个第二原始信息，所述N为正整数；The communication module is also configured to receive N pieces of second original information from the second device, where N is a positive integer;
    所述处理模块，还用于根据所述N个第二原始信息中每个第二原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异和所述每个原始信息对应的第二编码信息与所述参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异的比例，确定所述比例因子。The processing module is also configured to calculate the difference between each of the N second original information and the reference original information and the second coded information corresponding to each original information and the reference original information. The scaling factor is determined based on the ratio of the difference between the reference encoding information corresponding to the information.
  51. 如权利要求47所述的装置，其特征在于，The device of claim 47, wherein:
    所述通信模块，还用于接收来自所述第二设备的N个第二原始信息，所述N为正整数；The communication module is also configured to receive N pieces of second original information from the second device, where N is a positive integer;
    所述处理模块，还用于根据所述N个第二原始信息中每个第二原始信息与N个第二解码信息中每个第二解码信息之间的差异和所述每个第二原始信息对应的第二编码信息与所述每个第二编码信息对应的第二重编码信息之间的差异的比例，确定所述比例因子；其中，所述N个第二解码信息与所述N个第二原始信息一一对应。The processing module is further configured to calculate the difference between each second original information among the N second original information and each second decoded information among the N second decoded information and each second original information. The proportion of the difference between the second encoded information corresponding to the information and the second re-encoded information corresponding to each second encoded information determines the scaling factor; wherein the N second decoded information and the N There is a one-to-one correspondence with the second original information.
  52. 如权利要求42-51任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，The device according to any one of claims 42-51, characterized in that,
    所述通信模块，还用于获取来自所述第二设备的P个第三编码信息，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于3的正整数；The communication module is also used to obtain P third pieces of encoded information from the second device, and the difference between the P pieces of third original information used to generate the P pieces of third encoded information satisfies the first preset Relationship, P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3;
    所述处理模块，还用于确定所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足所述第一预设关系；The processing module is also used to determine that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship;
    其中，所述P个第三原始信息中的全部或部分属于所述M个第一原始信息，或者，所述P个第三原始信息不包括所述M个第一原始信息中的任意一个。Wherein, all or part of the P pieces of third original information belong to the M pieces of first original information, or the P pieces of third original information do not include any of the M pieces of first original information.
  53. 如权利要求52所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信模块，还用于：The device according to claim 52, characterized in that the communication module is also used for:
    在获取P个第三编码信息之前，向所述第二设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于请求所述P个第三编码信息。Before acquiring the P pieces of third encoding information, first information is sent to the second device, where the first information is used to request the P pieces of third encoding information.
  54. 如权利要求42-51任一所述的装置，其特征在于，The device according to any one of claims 42-51, characterized in that,
    所述通信模块，还用于获取来自所述第二设备的P个第三编码信息，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数；The communication module is also used to obtain P pieces of third coded information from the second device, and the difference between the P pieces of third original information used to generate the P pieces of third coded information and the reference original information satisfies The second preset relationship, P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2;
    所述处理模块，还用于确定所述P个第三编码信息和与所述参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足所述第二预设关系；The processing module is also configured to determine that the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship;
    其中，所述P个第三原始信息中的全部或部分属于所述M个第一原始信息，或者，所述P个第三原始信息不包括所述M个第一原始信息中的任意一个。Wherein, all or part of the P pieces of third original information belong to the M pieces of first original information, or the P pieces of third original information do not include any of the M pieces of first original information.
  55. 如权利要求54所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信模块，还用于：The device of claim 54, wherein the communication module is also used to:
    在获取P个第三原始信息之前，向所述第二设备发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于请求所述P个第三编码信息。Before acquiring the P pieces of third original information, send second information to the second device, where the second information is used to request the P pieces of third encoded information.
  56. 如权利要求52-55任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，The device according to any one of claims 52-55, characterized in that,
    所述通信模块，还用于接收来自所述第二设备的第三信息，所述第三信息指示所述P个第三原始信息与所述P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。The communication module is further configured to receive third information from the second device, where the third information indicates a correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information.
  57. 如权利要求42-56任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信模块，还用于：The device according to any one of claims 42 to 56, characterized in that the communication module is also used for:
    在确定所述M个第一重编码信息之前，接收来自所述第二设备的第四信息，所述第四信息用于触发所述第一自编码器的性能确定。Before determining the M first re-encoding information, fourth information is received from the second device, and the fourth information is used to trigger performance determination of the first autoencoder.
  58. 如权利要求42-57任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一编码信息为量化后的信息，或者，The device according to any one of claims 42 to 57, wherein the first encoded information is quantized information, or,
    所述通信模块，还用于接收来自所述第二设备的M个第一编码信息对应的M个第一量化信息；The communication module is also configured to receive M pieces of first quantized information corresponding to the M pieces of first encoded information from the second device;
    所述处理模块，还用于在利用第一解码器和输入所述第一解码器的所述M个第一编码信息，确定M个第一解码信息之前，对所述M个第一量化信息进行解量化处理，得到所述M个第一编码信息。The processing module is also configured to use the first decoder and the M first encoding information input to the first decoder to determine the M first decoding information, before determining the M first quantized information. Perform dequantization processing to obtain the M pieces of first coded information.
  59. 如权利要求42-58任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一自编码器的性能对应第一值或第二值，所述第一值用于指示所述第一自编码器的性能不满足第一要求，所述第二值用于指示所述第一自编码器的性能满足第一要求；The device according to any one of claims 42 to 58, wherein the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to a first value or a second value, and the first value is used to indicate the first autoencoder. The performance of the first autoencoder does not meet the first requirement, and the second value is used to indicate that the performance of the first autoencoder meets the first requirement;
    所述处理模块，还用于确定所述第一自编码器的性能对应所述第一值时，向所述第二设备发送第五信息，所述第五信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器。The processing module is also configured to send fifth information to the second device when it is determined that the performance of the first autoencoder corresponds to the first value, where the fifth information is used to indicate to the second device Stop using the first encoder.
  60. 如权利要求42-59任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一编码信息包括第一信道状态指示 信息；所述第一解码信息包括第一恢复信道信息；所述第一原始信息包括第一原始信道信息；所述第一重编码信息包括与所述第一恢复信道信息对应的第二信道状态指示信息。The device according to any one of claims 42 to 59, wherein the first coded information includes a first channel status indication. information; the first decoded information includes first restored channel information; the first original information includes first original channel information; the first re-encoding information includes a second channel state corresponding to the first restored channel information Instructions.
  61. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized by including:
    处理模块，用于利用第一编码器用于对输入的M个第一原始信息处理，确定所述M个第一编码信息，M为正整数；A processing module configured to use the first encoder to process the input M pieces of first original information and determine the M pieces of first encoded information, where M is a positive integer;
    通信模块，用于向第一设备发送所述M个第一编码信息，所述M个第一编码信息用于第一自编码器的性能确定，所述第一自编码器包括所述第一编码器。A communication module, configured to send the M first encoding information to the first device, the M first encoding information being used for performance determination of a first autoencoder, the first autoencoder including the first Encoder.
  62. 如权利要求61所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信模块，还用于向所述第一设备发送第四信息，所述第四信息用于触发所述第一自编码器的性能确定。The apparatus of claim 61, wherein the communication module is further configured to send fourth information to the first device, the fourth information being used to trigger performance determination of the first autoencoder. .
  63. 如权利要求61所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信模块，还用于：The device according to claim 61, characterized in that the communication module is also used to:
    向所述第一设备发送第一参数信息，所述第一参数信息用于自编码的性能确定；其中，第一参数信息包括如下中的一项或多项：用于衡量编码信息和重编码信息之间差异的一个或多个参考阈值；用于表征至少两个原始信息的差异与所述至少两个原始信息分别对应的编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子；用于表征原始信息和解码信息的差异与编码信息与重编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子，所述编码信息或所述重编码信息的数量；自编码器的性能对应的取值范围，所述重编码信息为第一设备将所述编码信息输入解码器获得的输出再输入编码器进行重编码获得的。Send first parameter information to the first device, where the first parameter information is used to determine self-encoding performance; wherein the first parameter information includes one or more of the following: used to measure encoding information and re-encoding One or more reference thresholds for the difference between the information; a scaling factor used to characterize the ratio between the difference between the at least two original information and the difference between the encoded information corresponding to the at least two original information; used to characterize the original information and the proportional factor between the difference between the decoded information and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information, the number of the encoded information or the re-encoded information; the value range corresponding to the performance of the autoencoder, the re-encoded information The information is obtained by the first device inputting the encoded information into the decoder and then inputting the output into the encoder for re-encoding.
  64. 如权利要求62所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信模块，还用于：The device according to claim 62, characterized in that the communication module is also used for:
    向所述第一设备发送P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息用于第一自编码器的性能确定方式的有效性判定；其中，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于3的正整数；或者，用于生成所述P个第三编码信息的P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数。Send P pieces of third coding information to the first device, the P pieces of third coding information being used to determine the validity of the performance determination method of the first autoencoder; wherein, used to generate the P pieces of third coding information The difference between the P third original information of the information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 3; or, the P third original information used to generate the P third encoded information and The difference between the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
  65. 如权利要求64所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信模块，还用于：The device according to claim 64, characterized in that the communication module is also used for:
    向所述第一设备发送第三信息，所述第三信息指示所述P个第三原始信息与所述P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。Third information is sent to the first device, where the third information indicates a correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information.
  66. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized by including:
    通信模块，用于接收来自第二设备的P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息；其中，所述P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数；确定所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足所述第一预设关系，或者，所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足所述第一预设关系。A communication module, configured to receive P pieces of third encoded information from the second device, the P pieces of third encoded information corresponding to P pieces of third original information; wherein the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies The first preset relationship, P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2; it is determined that the difference between the P third coded information satisfies the first preset relationship, or the difference between the P third coded information The difference does not satisfy the first preset relationship.
  67. 如权利要求66所述的装置，其特征在于，还包括处理模块，所述通信模块，还用于在所述处理模块的控制下，执行如下操作：The device of claim 66, further comprising a processing module, and the communication module is further configured to perform the following operations under the control of the processing module:
    当所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系时，向所述第二设备发送第六信息，所述第六信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或，When the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information satisfies the first preset relationship, sending sixth information to the second device, the sixth information being used to trigger the performance determination of the first autoencoder; or ,
    当所述第一结果指示所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足第一预设关系时，向所述第二设备发送第七信息，所述第七信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。When the first result indicates that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, seventh information is sent to the second device, where the seventh information is used to indicate that the P third encoded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship. The second device stops using the first encoder or stops determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
  68. 如权利要求67所述的装置，其特征在于，所述P个第三编码信息为输入所述第一编码器的所述P个第三原始信息所对应的输出，所述第一设备包括与所述第一编码器对应的第一解码器，所述第一自编码器包括所述第一编码器和所述第一解码器。The apparatus of claim 67, wherein the P pieces of third encoded information are outputs corresponding to the P pieces of third original information input to the first encoder, and the first device includes: The first decoder corresponding to the first encoder, the first autoencoder includes the first encoder and the first decoder.
  69. 如权利要求66-68任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信模块，还用于：The device according to any one of claims 66 to 68, characterized in that the communication module is also used for:
    向所述第二设备发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于请求所述P个第三编码信息。Send second information to the second device, where the second information is used to request the P pieces of third coded information.
  70. 如权利要求66-69任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信模块，还用于：The device according to any one of claims 66 to 69, characterized in that the communication module is also used for:
    接收来自所述第二设备的第三信息，所述第三信息指示所述P个第三原始信息与所述P个第三编码信息之间的对应关系。Third information is received from the second device, and the third information indicates a correspondence between the P pieces of third original information and the P pieces of third encoded information.
  71. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized by including:
    处理模块，用于确定P个第三原始信息，所述P个第三原始信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，P为大于或等于2的正整数；A processing module configured to determine P third pieces of original information, the difference between the P pieces of third original information satisfies the first preset relationship, and P is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2;
    通信模块，用于向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始 信息，所述P个第三编码信息用于自编码器的性能的确定。A communication module, configured to send P third encoded information to the first device, where the P third encoded information corresponds to P third original Information, the P third encoding information is used to determine the performance of the autoencoder.
  72. 如权利要求71所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信模块，还用于：The device according to claim 71, characterized in that the communication module is also used for:
    接收来自所述第一设备的第六信息，所述第六信息用于指示所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异满足第一预设关系，所述第六信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或者，Receive sixth information from the first device, the sixth information is used to indicate that the difference between the P pieces of third encoded information satisfies a first preset relationship, and the sixth information is used to trigger a first automatic Encoder performance determined; or,
    接收来自所述第一设备的第七信息，所述第七信息用于指示所述P个第三编码信息之间的差异不满足第一预设关系，或所述第七信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。Receive seventh information from the first device, the seventh information is used to indicate that the difference between the P pieces of third encoded information does not satisfy the first preset relationship, or the seventh information is used to indicate that the The second device stops using the first encoder or stops determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
  73. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized by including:
    通信模块，用于接收来自第二设备的P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于P个第三原始信息，其中，所述P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为正整数；A communication module, configured to receive P pieces of third encoded information from the second device, the P pieces of third encoded information corresponding to P pieces of third original information, wherein the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information The difference between satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer;
    处理模块，用于确定P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，或者，P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系。A processing module configured to determine that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, or that the difference between the P pieces of third coded information and the reference coded information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship. The difference between does not satisfy the second preset relationship.
  74. 如权利要求73所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信模块，还用于：The device according to claim 73, characterized in that the communication module is also used for:
    当P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系时，向所述第二设备发送第八信息，所述第八信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；When the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, eighth information is sent to the second device, where the eighth information is used to trigger the first automatic The performance of the encoder is determined;
    或，当P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系时，向所述第二设备发送第九信息，所述第九信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。Or, when the difference between the P pieces of third coding information and the reference coding information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship, send ninth information to the second device, where the ninth information is used to indicate The second device stops using the first encoder or stops performance determination of the first autoencoder.
  75. 如权利要求74所述的装置，其特征在于，The device of claim 74, wherein:
    所述通信模块，还用于在向所述第二设备发送第八信息之后，接收来自所述第二设备的M个第一编码信息，M为正整数；The communication module is also configured to receive M pieces of first coded information from the second device after sending the eighth information to the second device, where M is a positive integer;
    所述处理模块，还用于：The processing module is also used for:
    利用第一解码器和输入所述第一解码器的所述M个第一编码信息，确定M个第一解码信息；其中，所述第一解码器和所述第一编码器属于所述第一自编码器，所述第一编码器用于对输入的M个第一原始信息处理，确定所述M个第一编码信息；Using a first decoder and the M pieces of first encoding information input to the first decoder, M pieces of first decoding information are determined; wherein the first decoder and the first encoder belong to the An autoencoder, the first encoder is used to process the input M pieces of first original information and determine the M pieces of first encoded information;
    利用第二编码器和输入所述第二编码器的所述M个第一解码信息，确定M个第一重编码信息，所述M个第一重编码信息与所述M个第一编码信息一一对应；Utilize the second encoder and the M first decoded information input to the second encoder to determine M first re-encoded information, the M first re-encoded information and the M first encoded information one-to-one correspondence;
    根据所述M个第一编码信息中的每个第一编码信息和所述每个第一编码信息对应的第一重编码信息之间的差异，确定所述第一自编码器的性能。The performance of the first autoencoder is determined according to the difference between each first encoding information in the M first encoding information and the first re-encoding information corresponding to each first encoding information.
  76. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized by including:
    处理模块，用于确定P个第三原始信息与参考原始信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，P为正整数；A processing module used to determine that the difference between the P pieces of third original information and the reference original information satisfies the second preset relationship, and P is a positive integer;
    通信模块，用于向第一设备发送P个第三编码信息，所述P个第三编码信息对应于所述P个第三原始信息，所述P个第三编码信息用于自编码器性能的确定。A communication module, configured to send P third coded information to the first device, where the P third coded information corresponds to the P third original information, and the P third coded information is used for autoencoder performance. OK.
  77. 如权利要求76所述的装置，其他在于，其特征在于，所述通信模块，还用于：The device according to claim 76, further characterized in that the communication module is also used for:
    接收来自所述第一设备的第八信息，所述第八信息用于指示P个第三编码信息与所述参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异满足第二预设关系，所述第八信息用于触发第一自编码器的性能确定；或者，Receive eighth information from the first device, the eighth information is used to indicate that the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information satisfies a second preset relationship, the The eighth information is used to trigger performance determination of the first autoencoder; or,
    接收来自第一设备的第九信息，所述第九信息用于指示P个第三编码信息与参考原始信息对应的参考编码信息之间的差异不满足第二预设关系，所述第九信息用于指示所述第二设备停止使用所述第一编码器或停止对第一自编码器的性能确定。Receive ninth information from the first device, the ninth information is used to indicate that the difference between the P pieces of third encoding information and the reference encoding information corresponding to the reference original information does not satisfy the second preset relationship, the ninth information Used to instruct the second device to stop using the first encoder or to stop determining the performance of the first autoencoder.
  78. 如权利要求76或77所述的装置，其特征在于，The device according to claim 76 or 77, characterized in that:
    所述处理模块，还用于在所述通信模块接收来自所述第一设备的第八信息之后，利用所述第一编码器用于对输入的M个第一原始信息处理，确定所述M个第一编码信息，M为正整数；The processing module is also configured to use the first encoder to process the input M first original information to determine the M pieces of information after the communication module receives the eighth information from the first device. The first coded information, M is a positive integer;
    所述通信模块，还用于向所述第一设备发送所述M个第一编码信息，所述M个第一编码信息用于第一自编码器的性能确定，所述第一自编码器包括所述第一编码器。The communication module is also configured to send the M first encoding information to the first device. The M first encoding information is used to determine the performance of the first autoencoder. The first autoencoder including the first encoder.
  79. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized by including:
    通信模块，用于接收来自第二设备的第一参数信息，所述第一参数信息用于确定自编码器的性能； A communication module, configured to receive first parameter information from the second device, where the first parameter information is used to determine the performance of the autoencoder;
    处理模块，用于根据所述第一参数信息，确定自编码器的性能。A processing module, configured to determine the performance of the autoencoder according to the first parameter information.
  80. 如权利要求79所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一参数信息包括如下中的一项或多项：The device of claim 79, wherein the first parameter information includes one or more of the following:
    用于衡量编码信息和重编码信息之间差异的一个或多个参考阈值；One or more reference thresholds used to measure the difference between encoded information and recoded information;
    用于表征至少两个原始信息的差异与所述至少两个原始信息分别对应的编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子；A scaling factor used to characterize the ratio between the difference between the at least two original information and the difference between the encoded information respectively corresponding to the at least two original information;
    用于表征原始信息和解码信息的差异与编码信息与重编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子，所述编码信息或所述重编码信息的数量；a scaling factor used to characterize the ratio between the difference between the original information and the decoded information and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information, the amount of the encoded information or the re-encoded information;
    所述自编码器的性能对应的取值范围，所述重编码信息为第一设备将所述编码信息输入解码器获得的输出再输入编码器进行重编码获得的。The value range corresponding to the performance of the autoencoder, and the re-encoding information is obtained by the first device inputting the encoding information into the decoder and then inputting the output into the encoder for re-encoding.
  81. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized by including:
    处理模块，用于确定第一参数信息；A processing module used to determine the first parameter information;
    通信模块，用于向第一设备发送所述第一参数信息，所述第一参数信息用于自编码器的性能确定。A communication module, configured to send the first parameter information to the first device, where the first parameter information is used for performance determination of the autoencoder.
  82. 如权利要求81所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一参数信息包括如下中的一项或多项：The device of claim 81, wherein the first parameter information includes one or more of the following:
    用于衡量编码信息和重编码信息之间差异的一个或多个参考阈值；One or more reference thresholds used to measure the difference between encoded information and recoded information;
    用于表征至少两个原始信息的差异与所述至少两个原始信息分别对应的编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子；A scaling factor used to characterize the ratio between the difference between the at least two original information and the difference between the encoded information respectively corresponding to the at least two original information;
    用于表征原始信息和解码信息的差异与编码信息与重编码信息的差异之间的比例的比例因子，所述编码信息或所述重编码信息的数量；a scaling factor used to characterize the ratio between the difference between the original information and the decoded information and the difference between the encoded information and the re-encoded information, the amount of the encoded information or the re-encoded information;
    所述自编码器的性能对应的取值范围，所述重编码信息为第一设备将所述编码信息输入解码器获得的输出再输入编码器进行重编码获得的。The value range corresponding to the performance of the autoencoder, and the re-encoding information is obtained by the first device inputting the encoding information into the decoder and then inputting the output into the encoder for re-encoding.
  83. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized by including:
    处理器，所述处理器和存储器耦合，所述处理器用于调用所述存储器存储的计算机程序指令，以执行如权利要求1-41任一项所述的方法。A processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, and the processor is configured to call computer program instructions stored in the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-41.
  84. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有指令，当所述指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求1-41任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that instructions are stored on the computer-readable storage medium, and when the instructions are run on a computer, they cause the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-41 .
  85. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，包括指令，当所述指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求1-41任一项所述的方法。 A computer program product, characterized by comprising instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method according to any one of claims 1-41.
PCT/CN2023/116088 2022-08-31 2023-08-31 Communication method and apparatus WO2024046419A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211056078.6 2022-08-31
CN202211056078.6A CN117676630A (en) 2022-08-31 2022-08-31 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024046419A1 true WO2024046419A1 (en) 2024-03-07

Family

ID=90064933

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/116088 WO2024046419A1 (en) 2022-08-31 2023-08-31 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117676630A (en)
WO (1) WO2024046419A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111178523A (en) * 2019-08-02 2020-05-19 腾讯科技（深圳）有限公司 Behavior detection method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
US20210273707A1 (en) * 2020-02-28 2021-09-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Neural network based channel state information feedback
WO2022040655A1 (en) * 2020-08-18 2022-02-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Federated learning of autoencoder pairs for wireless communication

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111178523A (en) * 2019-08-02 2020-05-19 腾讯科技（深圳）有限公司 Behavior detection method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
US20210273707A1 (en) * 2020-02-28 2021-09-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Neural network based channel state information feedback
WO2022040655A1 (en) * 2020-08-18 2022-02-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Federated learning of autoencoder pairs for wireless communication

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SAMSUNG: "Views on Evaluation of AI/ML for CSI feedback enhancement", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2203897, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20220509 - 20220520, 29 April 2022 (2022-04-29), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052153235 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117676630A (en) 2024-03-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11477770B2 (en) Asynchronous multi-point transmission schemes
WO2021121585A1 (en) Methods for cascade federated learning for telecommunications network performance and related apparatus
US11201712B2 (en) Facilitating incremental downlink control information design to support downlink control information scheduling
US20240137082A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2023125660A1 (en) Communication method and device
US20240211770A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2024046419A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN113039732A (en) ACQI decoding confidence detection
WO2024008004A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2024046215A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN114492784A (en) Neural network testing method and device
WO2024131900A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2023006096A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2023125996A1 (en) Uplink precoding method and apparatus
WO2023202514A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN118118133A (en) Communication method and device
WO2023231881A1 (en) Model application method and apparatus
US20240211769A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2023036280A1 (en) Model test method and apparatus
WO2023198018A1 (en) Uplink signal sending method and apparatus, and uplink signal receiving method and apparatus
WO2023279947A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2024051789A1 (en) Beam management method
US20240048207A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving feedback information based on artificial neural network
WO2023098860A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
US20240040420A1 (en) Apparatus and method for reporting csi in wireless communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23859448

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1